JP7278601B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which is controlled to a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is established, symbols are variably displayed, and when a special result is derived.

As this type of game machine, for example, in a high-probability time-reduction state in which winning to the starting port is facilitated and the lottery probability is increased, the time-reduction state ends when the variable display is performed a specified number of times, and a special game is performed. A gaming machine is disclosed in which the number of balls put out can be increased by shifting to a high-probability non-time-reduction state in which is likely to be executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-174800 A

The gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 has a new game feature such as an increase in the number of balls released when the high-probability time-shortening state transitions to the high-probability non-time-shortening state. is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a new gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
holding means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S395 or S402) capable of acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied and holding the acquired starting information (for example, various random numbers) up to a predetermined number;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, lottery means ( For example, the main CPU 201) that performs the processing of S104,
Symbol control means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that performs the processes of S93 and S94) that performs control such that, when the fluctuation start condition is established, the symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined display area and the result of the lottery is derived;
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and the special stop mode indicating the special result is derived, a special game capable of shifting to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to the player. State control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S93 and S94);
A specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S161) that can shift to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state when any one of a plurality of predetermined conditions is established; ,
an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls such that the effect is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbols in a predetermined effect area;
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a prefetch determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
Preceding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301);
a counting means (for example, a ceiling counter) capable of counting the number of variable display times of the pattern;
with
The plurality of predetermined conditions are
a first predetermined condition that can be satisfied when the pattern is variably displayed and a specific stop mode indicating the specific result is derived;
at least a second predetermined condition that can be satisfied when the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times,
The preceding production control means is
When there is a possibility that the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to perform the preceding effect,
A special start in which the special stop mode can be derived from the start information after the number of times of variable display of the pattern counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times among the start information held by the hold means. When the information is included, it is possible to control so that the preceding performance for the special start information is not performed,
If the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is included in the start information after the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, among the start information held by the holding means, It is possible to control so that the preceding performance for the special start information is performed,
When the special result is derived, even if the holding means contains the specific start information from which the specific result can be derived, the preceding performance related to the specific start information in the game state after the special game state is completed. is controllable so that
The production control means is
It can be controlled to execute a state notification effect (for example, night mode display effect) that notifies that it is controlled to the specific game state,
The state notification effect is not executed in the variation in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied, but is performed based on the satisfaction of the variation start condition after the variation in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is characterized by being a production that can be obtained.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the front right diagonally above. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a general game state transition. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of special symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start of special symbols of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of the first pachinko game machine. The first pachinko game machine is an example of a normal symbol determination table. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving setting processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a modification of the time-saving counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first modification of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the second modification of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing in the third modification of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the third modification of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing in the fourth modification of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing in the fifth modification of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing in the sixth modification of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table for low start in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit look-ahead effect pattern table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern table at the time of losing in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the big hit-type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving per-system look-ahead performance form changes. It is a figure which shows the process which a pending|holding image changes from a common hit look-ahead production form to a big-hit system look-ahead production form in a 1st pachinko game machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common hit lookahead effect form to a big hit lookahead effect form. It is a diagram showing the process in which the pending image changes from the dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit look-ahead effect form in the first pachinko game machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the open mode is the first open mode, and (B) a case where the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 4010 provided in a fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a read-ahead performance pattern in a fourth pachinko game machine, showing a process of changing a reserved image from a common win-read-ahead performance form to a big win-type read-ahead performance form, and then performing a big win-type ready-to-win. It is an image showing that the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation in the fourth pachinko game machine has developed into a big win system ready-to-win. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern in a fourth pachinko game machine, showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common winning look-ahead effect form to a time-saving winning-type look-ahead effect form, and then a time-saving winning type effect is performed. . It is the image which shows that the variation performance pattern corresponding to the said variation in the 4th pachinko game machine developed into time saving per performance. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern in the fourth pachinko game machine, showing a mode in which an image of a hatching egg is displayed substantially in the center of the display area. It is an example of a random number determination table per normal symbol of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a random number determination table per normal symbol of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal pattern variation pattern table of the fifth pachinko game machine. (a) is a diagram showing transition of the production mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (b) is a table summarizing transition conditions of the production mode according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st production|presentation stage announcement content lottery process which concerns on a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first notice effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first notice effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of a 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of a 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a 2nd notice production|presentation and the variation pattern of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the flow of a 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of a 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a 3rd notice production|presentation and the variation pattern of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the flow of a 4th notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the time chart of a 4th advance notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a 4th notice production|presentation and the variation pattern of a decorative design. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the effect content of the notice after icon stop. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stop, and the variation pattern of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stop, and the variation pattern of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of a 1st notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of a 1st notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of a 1st notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 2nd notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 2nd notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 2nd notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 3rd notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 3rd notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 3rd notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 3rd notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 4th notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 4th notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of a 4th notice production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of an advance notice after stopping the icon; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of an advance notice after stopping the icon; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining examples of icons; It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative design in a 1st production|presentation stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative design in a 2nd production|presentation stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative design in a 3rd production|presentation stage. It is a figure which shows the flow of a 6th notice production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the time chart of a 6th advance notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a 6th notice production|presentation and the variation pattern of a decorative design. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a seventh advance notice effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh advance notice effect. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change announcement effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a stage change announcement effect. (c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area holding|maintenance ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area holding|maintenance ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change area holding|maintenance ball. It is a flow chart showing the process at the time of winning the first start opening related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a stage change section determination process according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a stage change occurrence presence or absence determination process according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a stage count process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a stage change occurrence lottery process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table. (a) is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in a 1st production|presentation stage. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the second effect stage. (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the third effect stage. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth notice effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth notice effect. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp forewarning effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a logo lamp forewarning effect. (c) is a diagram showing a time chart of the logo lamp forewarning effect. It is a flowchart which shows the content lottery process of the 1st production stage logo lamp notice regarding the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery processing of the logo lamp notice content lottery process for pseudo 3 according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the logo lamp notice content lottery process for pseudo 1 concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd production|presentation stage logo lamp notice content lottery process which concerns on a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd production|presentation stage logo lamp notice content lottery process based on the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the logo lamp notice content lottery process for pseudo 1 concerning the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in probability variable mode. It is a flow chart showing a drum variation effect determination process according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a process at the time of drum fluctuation effect start related to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the normal symbol variation and the reserved ball currently being performed. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of a drum fluctuation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of a drum fluctuation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of a drum fluctuation production|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example of normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestive effect. It is a diagram showing an example of normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestive effect. It is a flow chart showing a process at the time of a big hit in the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a process at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a process at the end of the first bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a prize number counter addition process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a result display process during the bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing during the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (I) during the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (II) during the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (III) during the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing remaining ST number adjustment processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a remaining ST count update process for display according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing normal figure foreseeing effect processing in probability variation mode according to the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a special figure foreseeing effect processing during probability variation mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (a) is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in a 1st production|presentation stage. (b) is a diagram showing a pattern of an icon stop suggestion advance notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing which concerns on a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the production|presentation block in 6th specific super reach. It is a flow chart showing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect forewarning effect for the first effect stage. (b) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific mode of a logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific mode of a logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific mode of a logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage; In the fifth pachinko game machine, a time chart showing the production control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time saving game state, (A) A time chart showing an example of the production control performed in the first normal pattern, (B) is a time chart showing an example of effect control performed in the second normal pattern. In the fifth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area of the display device. In the fifth pachinko game machine, a time chart showing production control in an irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving game state, (A) Time showing an example of production control performed in the first irregular pattern chart, (B) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the third irregular pattern. It is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, a third pachinko gaming machine, a fourth pachinko gaming machine, and a fifth pachinko gaming machine are exemplified. will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front side, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear side, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left side. The right side when viewed from the front of the machine is the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is the top side, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is the bottom side, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is the clockwise direction. , and vice versa, define the counterclockwise direction as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Also, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination The result of processing (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the second special symbol). pattern) will be described as an example. However, for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, etc., which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it becomes possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see later-described FIG. 4) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . Furthermore, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4 , and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46 . Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46 . The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . As described above, the tray unit 5 is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process for special symbols. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out to the lower tray 52 through the payout port 55. - 特許庁

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52 . In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The shooting handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61 . The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 passes through a shooting rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. The area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) is embossed. In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 . The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to the upper tray 51, for example, when the payout condition is satisfied. A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (shown in the diagram below) for supplying power. 6) is mounted on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/fire control board 93 and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all accommodated in the board case. ing.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. A center accessory 115, a first starting port 120, a general prize winning port 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting port 140A, 140B, and a normal electric role. It has an object unit 145, a small win unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10.例文帳に追加Incidentally, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and has an arcuate center rail 116 on the upper side. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, of the game area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is called a left area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called a right area 107. The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down the right side region 107 is referred to as "left hitting". A method of shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 . The stage 118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of and below the display area of the display device 7 . Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119 at the first start. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition (also referred to as "fluctuation starting condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first 1 special symbol symbol random value, reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values of the first special symbol effect selection random value, etc.) is referred to as start information of the first special symbol. Storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension, and the starting information of the first special symbol that is suspended is also called "reserved ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the game area 105, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). . When a game ball enters the general winning opening 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right region 107, and includes a passing gate 126 constructed so that a game ball hit to the right can pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of a game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected by the passing gate switch 127, various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, a maximum of 4) is stored. The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 125 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

Also, the passage gate 126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device are activated, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), the accessory continuous actuating device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbols) etc.) is usually referred to as starting information of the design. Further, until the start condition is satisfied, the storage of the starting information of the normal design is called suspension, and the starting information of the normal design that is suspended is also referred to as "suspended ball of the normal design".

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a big winning big winning hole 131 and a big winning big winning hole count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning big winning hole 131. , and the special electric accessory 133 are integrated. The special electric accessary product unit 130 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 105 and below the passage gate unit 125 .

The big winning opening 131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning big winning hole 131, a big winning big winning hole for winning a left-handed game ball may be arranged, or the center accessory 115 may be provided. A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), ten winning balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for the special electric, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 for a big win, and to allow a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 for a big hit. ) is configured to allow state transitions to and from impossible or difficult closing states. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot jackpot 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in play state.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second starting opening, the second starting opening 140A and the second starting opening 140B are arranged in the game area 105, and these second starting openings 140A and 140B are both right-handed. A game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 140A and/or the second starting hole 140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the second start ports 140A and 140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected by the second starting port switches 141A and 141B (see FIG. 6 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The received starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 131, there are two flow paths 107a and 107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without winning the big winning hole 131 for a big hit is sent to an upper flow path 107a or a lower flow path 107b by a branch nail 108 shown in FIG. 4, for example. distributed.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a to win the second starting port 140A. Alternatively, a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a may be configured so that a prize can be won. In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 107a but have not won the second starting port 140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the downward flow path 107b side, and includes a prize winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The normal electric accessory 146 includes a normal electric shutter 147 that can move back and forth, and a normal electric solenoid 148 that operates the normal electric shutter 147 (see FIG. 6 described later). The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the normal electric shutter 147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 140B or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 140B. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. Note that instead of the above-described general electric shutter 147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric tulip, which is composed of, for example, a pair of blade members, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(small hit unit)
The small-hit unit 150 includes a small-hit big winning opening 151 and a small-hitting big winning opening count switch 152 for detecting the winning (passage) of the game ball to the small-hitting big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). , a small-hit shutter 153 that can move forward and backward, and a small-hit solenoid 154 that can operate the small-hit shutter 153 are integrated.

The small-hit shutter 153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction to enable or facilitate the entry (passage) of the game ball to the small-hit large winning opening 151, and the game to the small-hitting large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to win a prize.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 145 in the downward flow path 107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 146, even if the small winning big winning port 151 is open, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 151 for winning, it is difficult (or impossible) to win the big winning opening 151 for small winning because the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side is won.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 131 for big winning and the big winning opening 151 for small winning are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(out port)
The out port 178 is any of various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting ports 140A and 140B, the big winning port 131 for big wins, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are launched toward the game area 105. This is for ejecting game balls that did not win any prizes outside the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, out ports are provided at positions other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 122, between the normal electric accessory unit 145 and the small winning unit 150, etc. A game ball flowing down the area 105 may be discharged outside the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance accessories 58 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165 and a second special symbol reservation display part 166 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of normal symbols") is established, the variable display of normal symbols is started, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. be. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric shutter 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is reached. Winning (passing) of the game ball becomes easy.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of variable display of the normally reserved symbols (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved normal symbols") when the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved. There, it is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected, and various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols, etc.) applied to the normal symbols are It refers to the state from extraction to establishment of the starting condition of the normal symbol. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, when the number of reserved symbols is normally two, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group 163a including, for example, eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a made up of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is established, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually. Variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (e.g., eight LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is specified. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is established, the second special symbol display LED group 164a alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing. Variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (e.g., eight LEDs) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is specified. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol reserved display unit displays the number of variable display of the reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the variable display of the special symbols is reserved. A first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 are provided.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. Prepare. ``Variable display of the first special symbol is suspended'' means that the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for judging the jackpot, random numbers for the design of the first special symbol, random numbers for the reach judgment of the first special design, and random numbers for effect selection used when determining the variation pattern of the first special design. Numerical value etc.) is extracted, until the start condition of the 1st special design is satisfied. In addition, the condition for starting the first special symbol will be described later.

The first special symbol holding display unit 165 displays the number of variable display holdings of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol holding display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Further, when the number of reserved first special symbols is 3, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of second special symbols pending when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. Prepare. "Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the second Random numbers for jackpot determination of special symbols, random numbers for second special symbols, random numbers for reach determination of second special symbols, and random numbers for effect selection used when determining variation patterns of second special symbols, etc. Various random numbers, etc.) is extracted, until the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. In addition, the condition for starting the second special symbol will be described later.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of pending variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , second special symbol holding display portion 166, general electric solenoid 148, special electric solenoid 135, small hit solenoid 154 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starter switch 121, second starter switches 141A and 141B, a passage gate switch 127, a big win win count switch 132 for big wins, a general win win switch 123 and a big win for small wins. A mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205 .

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming the setting value in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared in response to the operation of . In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. "Within a given case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also only the corresponding parts of the case corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role product control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns are stored.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of controlling ball rental, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the first pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. FIG. 7 is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing general game state transitions. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize-winning ports (for example, the first start port 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120, 140A, and 140B, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. . In addition, the normal symbol game, for example, executes the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and operates the normal electric accessory 146 to operate the winning opening (the second game in this embodiment) This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140B). In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, for example, the normal symbol game and the operation unit such as the production button 54 ( For example, see FIG. 1) is included in "games".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, if the game state is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, one special symbol game is performed until the end of the big win game state or the small win game state. do.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, maximum 30000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot 131 is increased. Relatively enhanced.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols in the normal symbol game is drawn to the normal symbol display unit 161, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 causes the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) to open. It will be in an open state, and the possibility of winning a prize to, for example, the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol start winning process which is performed when there is a winning (passing) through the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A, 140B, and Special symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the fact that the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, are included.

When there is a winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A, 140B, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for design, a reach judgment Various random numbers such as random numbers for use and random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is established. When the starting condition of the special pattern is established, the random number value for judging the big win extracted from the counter for judging the big win of the special pattern is referred to, and the special pattern hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a ``big hit'' is performed. After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, the high probability short working hours gaming state and the high probability non short working hours gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7, sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32, etc. is performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to a high probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, when it is a small hit, a small-hit game control process is performed. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when a game ball enters the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and effect selection Various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, during the period from when the special symbol starts winning until the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied, when the game ball enters (passes) the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B Based on the extracted starting information, pre-reading determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. 63 described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (whether or not a "big hit" is elected) and the variation pattern prior to the special symbol hit determination process, and this pre-reading A pre-reading effect function may be provided for performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result. In addition, the above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the start information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In the normal symbol starting passage processing, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number value, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not to set the "normal symbol hit". A pattern hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the results of the win determination process for the normal symbols and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols and a predetermined effect. Perform production control processing. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

When the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" is led to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) operates, and the game to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which winning (passing) of the ball is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140B), the control in which at least one of the electrical support control that increases the frequency of opening the opening 140B) is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

The electric sapo control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal pattern", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) of the normal electric accessory 146. It is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and the winning probability of "per normal symbol" , the variable display time of normal symbols, or/and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (number of times of opening, opening time, wait time, etc.). Improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball into a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). That is, when the electric sapo control is executed, compared with the case where the electric sapo control is not executed, the winning probability of "per normal symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, or / and normal electric accessories Winning facilitation (increasing the number of openings, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) is performed by 146.

Then, each time the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number of the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol, The pattern random number value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random number value of the second special symbol, and the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol, etc.) are extracted within a predetermined range ( width) may be used, or a hard random number method may be used in which a random number is extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random number is updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol win determination processing, the non-jackpot game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. In addition, the explanation about the small winning game state shall be omitted.

The non-jackpot game state is divided into a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol win determination process is relatively low, and a high probability game state in which the probability of winning the big win in the win determination process of the special symbol is relatively high. can be broadly classified.

The high-probability gaming state includes a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (high-probability low base state) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a high-probability short-time gaming state (high-probability high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving game state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state, and a C time saving game state.

The A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a special symbol game of a specified number of times is executed or transitioned to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is changed. finish. When the A time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the state shifts to the normal game state.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the special symbols starting from when the variable display of the special symbols in the non-high probability gaming state (that is, the gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) is started. When the number of times of variable display (for example, a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), it is a time-saving game state that can be shifted, and when a special symbol game is executed a specified number of times or the state is shifted to a big win game state. , B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted to when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of the time-saving winning is derived. When the special symbol game is executed the number of times or the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the C time saving game state is terminated. When the C time-saving game state is terminated by executing the special symbol game for a specified number of times, in principle, the state shifts to the normal game state.

It should be noted that after the end of the time-saving game state "as a general rule" to shift to the normal game state, for example, when the time-saving game state is elected in the B time-saving game state, such as when the time-saving game state is duplicated , Considering the case where a plurality of time-saving game states overlap. However, the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed repeatedly, the conditions for shifting to the time-saving gaming state are established in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for shifting to multiple time-saving gaming states are established at the same time To do, the time saving game state is referred to as “overlapping”. And, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, activating any of the plurality of overlapping time-saving game states is referred to as “overlapping execution”.

Next, the game state transition will be described.

Normal game state, time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), and high-certainty game state (high-certainty time-saving game state, high-certainty non-time-saving game state) Even if there is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the state shifts to a big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it can be shifted to any of the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the high-quality game state (high-quality time-saving game state, high-quality non-time-saving game state). . However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the high certainty game state, it does not shift from the high certainty game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, it does not shift to the high-accuracy gaming state unless it passes through the big-hit gaming state.

When it is controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the B time reduction game state or C time reduction game state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time reduction game state unless the jackpot game state is passed. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if it is controlled to either the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, when the special symbol game of the specified number of times is executed, it will shift to the normal game state. It is also possible to shift from the game state to the normal game state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times that can be executed in the A time saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transition to the B time saving game state, so from the A time saving game state to B It does not shift to the time saving game state. In addition, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the B time saving game state to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state can overlap. . However, there is no transition from the C time-saving game state to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled in the B time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the condition for transition to the C time-saving game state is established, so the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state. can overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state can overlap.

When it is controlled to the C time saving game state, the condition for transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", so the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state can overlap.

In addition, the detail about duplication of a time-saving game state is mentioned later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15. FIG.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is executed is not executed, and a low-probability short-time gaming state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 can select one of these gaming states. It is possible to progress the game in . However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, high-probability non-short-time game state, and low-probability short-time game state is progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good. In addition, although a plurality of time-saving gaming states are prepared in the time-saving gaming state, the plurality of time-saving gaming states will be described later.

In this embodiment, of the plurality of game modes (e.g. shooting mode), the game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (which is advantageous to the player) (hereinafter referred to as "regular game mode") is the normal game mode. Hitting to the left is a regular game mode, and hitting to the right is a regular game mode in the high-probability short working hours game state, high-probability short working hours game state and low-probability short working hours game state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display a regular game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 7, for example.

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, using the above-described setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both), a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6, for example, can be set. Any one of these can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (in this embodiment, for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state) the jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/309. 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state and a high probability non-short-time gaming state). setting 3 is about 1/76, setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

It should be noted that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all set values, unlike the jackpot probability. For example, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is 1/160, and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, the time saving probability is 1/240. there is The time saving hit probability may be different between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but may be the same.

However, even if the time saving per probability is a common probability with all set values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the time saving number of times to be set) may be varied according to the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times are set as the number of time saving can be

In addition, the small hit probability is a probability common to all set values when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, but in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the small hit is included in the lottery target. not However, as a mode not including the small win in the lottery object, in addition to a mode in which it is not determined whether or not the small win has been won, it is determined whether or not the small win has been won although the probability of the small win is 0. It may be an aspect.

Although the above-mentioned time saving hit probability and small hit probability are common probabilities for all set values as described above, they are not limited to this and may be different probabilities according to set values.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29 described later), that is, the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start ports 140A, 140B. It is a table that is referred to when a "time-saving hit", a "minor hit", a "big hit" or a "loss" is determined by lottery based on the big hit determination random number value obtained at that time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time-saving hit", "minor hit", "big hit", and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted big hit determination random number value in the first special symbol win determination process. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the variable probability flag is off, and when the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a “time-saving win”, a “minor win”, a “big win”, or a “lose” based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) relationship with the data, the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the relationship with the corresponding judgment value data for judging a big hit, the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "losing" and the corresponding loss determination value data are stipulated. be.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 409, the main CPU 201 ”, and the hit-loss determination value data is determined as “time saving hit determination value data”. Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 410 to 614, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and hits and drops. The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Also, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 615 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges that it is "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Also, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 409, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 410 to 1260, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1261 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit". It judges and decides judgment value data as "time reduction per judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit", and determines The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit", and determines The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, out of the jackpot determination random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 409 in the case of the hit determination process for the first special symbol), It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data) excluding big hit judgment value data and loss judgment value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 615 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing so, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or reduces) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared with the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving game state when winning the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state, when the "time-saving win" is won just before the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state is substantially It will be extended, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win" regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. . However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal game state, time reduction game state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time reduction game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time reduction hit", but the probability variation flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140A, 140B and the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and the "designated symbol command" that determine the (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S105 in FIG. 29 described later). The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines the selected symbol. "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command "z10" is selected as the symbol designation command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, by operating the small-hit shutter 153 (see FIG. 6), the winning (passing) of the game ball to the small-hit big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is possible or easily opened. Execution of the control to become the state, the prize balls can be paid out.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, the main CPU 201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11), a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery may be performed to determine special symbol winning/losing, selection symbol commands, and symbol designation commands based on the extracted random number values for judging big hits and the symbol random number values of special symbols.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12 is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12, the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. Consists of bytes of control signals. Each area 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display section 163 on a one-to-one basis. Similarly, each area of 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164 on a one-to-one basis.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (time saving win display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163 and the first special symbol The LED corresponding to the area 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 and the first special symbol area out of the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163. 1 and the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 and the first special symbol area out of the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163. 2 and the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 displays the LED corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164 and the second special symbol The LED corresponding to the area 1 and the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 0 and the second special symbol area out of the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164. 2 and the LED corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the display mode of the LED (small hit display mode) derived to the second special symbol display section 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the area 1 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164 and the second special symbol The second special symbol display portion 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed in a mode in which the LED corresponding to the area 7 is lit and the other LEDs are extinguished.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the display mode of the LEDs (big hit display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selection symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163 and the first special symbol The LED corresponding to the area 4 and the LED corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display part 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 and the first special symbol area among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163. 4 and the LED corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are lit, and the other LEDs are extinguished, and the first special symbol display part 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 and the first special symbol area among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163. 5 and the LED corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 and the first special symbol area among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163. 4, the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 6 are lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, the first special symbol display It decides to stop displaying the part 163 . When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164. 4 and the LED corresponding to the area 5 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z12", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164. 4 and the LED corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z13", the main CPU 201 selects the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display unit 164. 5 is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", the display mode of the LEDs (losing display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED corresponding to the first special symbol area 7 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163, and the other LEDs. LED is turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z14", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED corresponding to the second special symbol area 7 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164, and lights the other LEDs. is turned off, and the second special symbol display portion 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol stop mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED to constitute, and controls the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 .

In addition, in FIG. 12, the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display portion 163 and the display mode of the LED led to the second special symbol display portion 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. However, it is preferable to transmit the control signals separately for the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 .

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the winning game state and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (that is, when determining the mode of the game state after that) When executing the hit type determination process of S106 of FIG. 29). The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 13 shows the mode of the big winning game state or the mode of the small winning game state. Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, since the winning game state is not controlled when the result of the special symbol hitting determination process is "time saving hit", the aspect of the winning game state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the time saving number of times to be set is the same and However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for “shorter working hours” as shown in FIG. In some cases, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 201 draws a lottery for "shorter working hours" even if the variable probability flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly changed to a special symbol. You may make it draw|lead out to the display part 163,164. Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving hit decision value data is not assigned to the big hit decision random number value, that is, the winning decision process not including the "time saving hit" in the lottery result may be performed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) to be one as the mode of the small winning gaming state. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "small win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-described small win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, and then the determined small win big win. By setting the number of opening times of the mouth 151, it becomes possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small win game state ends, the main CPU 201 does not change the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot gaming state, and then sets the variable probability flag and the time saving mode as the mode of the subsequent gaming state. Of the flags, it is decided to set ON only the variable probability flag and to set the variable probability number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the high probability non-work-time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends after the above-described jackpot display mode is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5" and "z12", the main CPU 201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds and 10 rounds respectively as the mode of the jackpot gaming state. to decide. In addition, as a form of the game state after that, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times are both set to 10000 times. . In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

Also, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag. Also, the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be set to 200 times, for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", and determined to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable in a time-saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state. In addition, the mode of time saving control in the high probability time saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving .

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 201 determines the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure 13.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Win/lose determination value data is determined (performs hit/lose determination) based on the random number value for big hit determination, and hit/lose (“time-saving hit”, “small hit”, “big win” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. The selection pattern command is determined based on the hit/lose determination value data, and the type of display mode derived to the special pattern display parts 163 and 164 (for example, the type of time-saving winning, the type of big winning) is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, despite winning the "jackpot", it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of not winning the "jackpot" (the case of winning the "shorter working hours") becomes.

In addition, instead of the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state being higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. may be set higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13"). On the other hand, the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is for "z2"). Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state).

In addition, "10000" of the variable probability number and the number of times of time saving shown in FIG.

[1-4-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the special symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 16 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the special symbols of the first pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. 15 and 16 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B. Determine the variation pattern of the design. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 15 and 16 is a table referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S107 of FIG. 29 described later.

In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to a special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 15, for example.

As shown in the variation pattern table of special symbols for low start in FIG. If so, set the readahead flag. The sub CPU 301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect when a look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 decides whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, in a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, or a low-probability short-time game state, for example, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the high start special symbol variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the special symbol variation pattern is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hit-or-lose), the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number. determined by However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start of FIG. 16, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start of FIG. The expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time is greater than when it is determined. In particular, when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over a very long period of time, for example, approximately 600000 msec (eg, long variation A to C). display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, for example, the high probability short time game state, the high probability short time game state, and In the low-probability time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but it is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of special symbols for high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of variable display times of special symbols per unit time are provided, for example, according to the type of time-saving gaming state, special symbols Different tables may be referred to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the "remarks" column of FIG. 15 and the "remarks" column of FIG. It is a reach production that shows that there is no possibility). Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, as the time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared. These time-saving game states will be described below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z6" or "z13". is. That is, the condition for shifting to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot with a selected symbol command of "z6" or "z13"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the condition that prevents the transition to the A time-saving gaming state is established instead of always moving to the A time-saving gaming state (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.) does not shift to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the end condition of the A time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see column "Number of times of shortening of hours" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied.

In the B time-saving gaming state, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-certainty gaming state starts, the ceiling counter is updated (1 is added), and the ceiling counter It is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the ceiling value is reached. That is, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving gaming state may be when the variable display of special symbols when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "final ceiling fluctuation") is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is finished. Alternatively, it may be the time when the variable display of the special symbol following the final ceiling change is started. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the ceiling final variation is started and when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. In addition, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process in the final ceiling change is "losing", the display mode of losing is derived to the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the transition to the B time saving game state is performed. Become. It should be noted that even if the condition to transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established, it does not necessarily shift to the B time-saving gaming state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established (for example, a special When the result of the hit determination process of the pattern is a big hit, etc.), the transition to the A time saving game state is not performed.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and when the probability variation flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, unless the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is "big hit", the game is controlled to the B time-saving game state. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163, 164, the B time saving game is performed. The state may be started, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the end of the small winning game state. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is "big win", the game state is controlled to the big win game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on, when the ceiling counter is controlled to the jackpot game state, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the backup clear switch 176 When another switch (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, in a game machine that can change the normal per symbol probability, when the high probability of the normal per symbol probability ends, etc. is reset when the condition is met. Then, when the update of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special pattern is executed. For example, if the variable probability flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko game machine instead of being set each time.

If the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot game state is ended, the main CPU 201 controls the first variable display of the special symbol at the start or end. Update (+1) the ceiling counter. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but if it is a specification that performs a ST machine or a variable drop lottery, for example, the probability variable flag The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the is turned off.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with specifications in which a variable probability drop lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect that suggests that the variable probability drop lottery has been won, and a high probability game It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing of starting the count by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state based on the display effect etc. displayed on the display device 7, and it is interesting. It is possible to provide a game with When it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, a countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state or a fake countdown effect is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further enhance interest.

In addition, when the clearing process (backup clearing process) of the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is performed, the main CPU 201 starts variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the clearing process of the work area in the RAM 203. Update (+1) the ceiling counter at time or end.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 causes the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated. update (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and a predetermined prescribed number of times (hereinafter It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied, out of the case where the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state, "When the variable display of the special symbols for the B time-saving specified number of times is executed", is the B time-saving specified number of times of the special design variable display (hereinafter "B time-saving final variation ”) may be started, or may be when the B time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the B time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this B time-saving final variation is completed.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is to win the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z8" or "z9" time saving hit), and the time saving per display mode is a special symbol It is derived (determined display) on the display units 163 and 164 . It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established, instead of always shifting to the C time-saving gaming state, if the conditions that prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established (for example, B time-saving gaming state and (details will be described later), and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), C time-saving game Do not transition to state. It should be noted that, when the condition to prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is established despite the fact that the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is established, the main CPU 201 does not cause the shift to the C time-saving gaming state. to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

In addition, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is determined in response to the selection symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see "Number of times of shortening" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied. The C time-saving specified number of times, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time-saving final variation"). It may be when it is done, or it may be when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time-saving gaming state may be between when the C time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this C time-saving final variation is completed.

In addition, the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In addition, the time saving performance of two time saving game states out of the A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state is the same, and the time saving performance of these two time saving game states and the other one time saving game state You may make it differ from time saving performance. Furthermore, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

In addition, in addition to the above, for the end condition of the A time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state, and the end condition of the C time saving game state, for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times Alternatively, the fact that the number of small hits has reached a specified number of times, that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, or that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 146 may be included. good.

[1-4-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the type of time saving and the normal symbol hit acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4) It is a table that is referred to when determining the "normal symbol win" or "losing" by lottery based on the random number value for determination (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 described later).

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value. In the normal symbol hit determination table, for each type of time saving, the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined as "normal symbol hit" and the normal symbol per determination value data corresponding to this The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol determined to be “losing” and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto are defined.

In the present embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), the main CPU201, if the random number for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 79, " "Normal symbol hit" is determined, and the hit/lose determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 98 as "normal symbol hit", and sets the hit/lose determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 judges "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

Thus, in the present embodiment, among the non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 17 selectivity (approximate)) is the highest. Therefore, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is "big hit", and after the big-hit game state based on this "big hit", the A time-saving game state (for example, selection symbol command "z6", "z13"), the normal symbol winning probability is changed to a higher probability.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 17) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 17) is also the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The normal symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 99. , "fz0" is selected as a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, and select "fz2" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz5" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 17) and determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 18), a so-called two-stage lottery is performed to determine the selection symbol command at the normal symbol hit time based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. is not limited to For example, a so-called one-step lottery is performed to determine the winning/losing of the normal symbols and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbols based on the extracted random number for determining the winning of the normal symbols and the random number of the symbols of the normal symbols. may

[1-4-10. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to a normal per symbol select symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 which is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 of FIG. 54 described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It is decided that there is no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the normal winning symbol is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2500 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2500 msec.

Further, when the selected symbol command at the time of the normal winning symbol is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 3000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, no wait time, no second release.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second open time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, second open time 2500 msec.

Thus, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) open pattern is non- Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the most advantageous degree becomes a disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140B when the normal electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is a non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the C time saving game state, the degree of advantage is the most advantageous mode.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol win" is the normal symbol hit determination in the C time saving game state Although the degree of advantage is the same as that of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "normal pattern hit", the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 20 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (that is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 54 described later). It is referred to when The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4), normal Determine the variation pattern of the design. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 300000 msec, regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99. The variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In addition, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In this way, the variable display time of normal symbols per one variable display is A The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state is the shortest. Therefore, the A time saving game state is the shortest time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released among the non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state.

Also, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time saving game state, but it is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Time saving number of times set at time saving hit]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol win determination process is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time saving times set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode for the time-saving win to the special symbol display unit, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving game state, and continues to control to the high-accuracy game state. By the way, for example, like a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, there is known a game machine that turns off a variable probability flag from ON when variable display of special symbols is executed over a specified number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol performed in the final game as a high probability game state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability variation flag. When the processing for deriving the mode is performed later, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode for the time-saving win.

[1-5-2. Overlap of time-saving game state]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state overlap. When the time saving game state overlaps in this way, the time saving game state may be overlapped and executed, or the time saving game state may not be overlapped (that is, the overlap of the time saving game state may be ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the condition for ending the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game state overlaps, the case where the time-saving game state is overlapped and the case where the time-saving game state is not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. When executing the time-saving game state repeatedly]
When the time-saving game state is overlapped and the time-saving game state is executed repeatedly, the time-saving win is won in any one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state C. There are cases where the C time saving game state is overlapped and executed, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the B time saving game state is overlapped and executed.

[1-5-2-1-1. When executing C time-saving game state overlaid on one time-saving game state]
When "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 displays the time saving hit in the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state, and adopts as the number of times of time-savings the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed before the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the remaining number of time-savings in the A time-saving gaming state is greater than the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 is the A time-saving game. While maintaining the time-saving performance in the game state, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state is exhausted unless a ``big hit'' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 200 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of the time, although the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, the time saving number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win the "time saving hit" in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state, the appearance of the time saving number and time saving performance , It is the same as the case where the A time-saving game state is continued without winning the "time-saving hit".

On the other hand, for example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving win" is won, and the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving win" is less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the number of times of time-saving set based on the 'time-saving win' is completed unless a 'big win' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 20 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of times, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of times of the time saving game state A, after that, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, special symbols over 30 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

[1-5-2-1-2. When the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the ceiling final variation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. , Unless a "jackpot" is derived, control to the time-saving game state is performed until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the B time saving prescribed number of times is 200 times, the C time saving game state While maintaining the time-saving performance, the number of times of time-saving from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. is.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the B time saving specified number of times is greater than the time saving remaining number of times in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. At the same time, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is completed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed as the B time saving game state is 300 times. , While maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state, the number of time saving times from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special design is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, while maintaining the time reduction performance of the C time reduction game state, the special design over 280 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

When the variable display of the special symbols ends in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 . That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the losing display mode is derived. . When the small-hit display mode is derived, the game is controlled to the small-hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag turned on even during the small-hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final fluctuation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final fluctuation, the conditions for transition to the B time saving game state and the transition conditions to the C time saving game state are A case where it is established will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and when the result of the special symbol win determination process is Different control can be executed in the case where the control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after being led to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 .

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. It is already controlled to the B time-saving game state at the time of being done. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless a “jackpot” is derived, the larger one of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the time saving number of times in the C time saving game state is consumed. Control to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At the time when it is done, it is not yet controlled to the B time saving game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the C time saving game state, and unless a “jackpot” is derived, the larger one of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the time saving number of times in the C time saving game state is consumed. Control to the time-saving game state.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination processing in the ceiling final change is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and B time saving game state. It is controlled to a big hit game state without controlling also.

[1-5-3. If you do not repeat the time-saving game state]
As a case where the time saving game state is not executed repeatedly even though the time saving game state overlaps, in one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the time saving game state is per time saving. A case of ignoring this even if winning and not repeatedly executing the C time saving game state, and a case of ignoring this even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and not repeatedly executing the B time saving game state. There is.

[1-5-3-1. If you do not run the C time-saving game state overlaid on one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display units 163 and 164 as described above. , derives the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving gaming state based on the “time-saving hit” unless the last special symbol is variablely displayed in one time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving final variation”). The game is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to one time saving game state (excluding the time saving final variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when "time saving hit" is won in the time saving final variation in one time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the one time saving gaming state is displayed before the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different control can be executed in the case of ending and in the case of ending one time-saving gaming state when the display mode for time-saving per is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. - 特許庁

First, when one time-saving gaming state ends before the time-saving winning display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the time-saving winning display mode, and then enters the C time-saving gaming state. Start controlling.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the time-saving per display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving per display mode and the end of one time-saving gaming state When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode for time saving is performed prior to the end process of one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode for the time saving game prior to the ending process of the time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode of the time saving per is performed after the end process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance of the one time saving game state, but sets the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the one time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the one time-saving gaming state is unprocessed at the time when the display mode for the time-saving winning is derived, If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. If you do not run the B time-saving game state overlaid on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the ceiling final variation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination processing in the final ceiling change is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "losing", the main CPU 201 completes the time saving remaining number of times in the C time saving game state. Control to the C time saving game state until it is done.

However, when the remaining time saving count in the C time saving game state is 0 in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed prior to the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and controls to the B time saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed after the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state without controlling to the B time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the C time-saving gaming state is not processed at the time when the B time-saving gaming state is to be started, and the C time-saving gaming state is terminated. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving game state after the start processing of the B time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time saving game state.

In the final ceiling change, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C short game state and starts control of the big win game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 63. FIG.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
Next, main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. 21 to 24 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power failure signal is at High level (S11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when S11 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the ON/OFF states of backup clear switch 176 and setting key 174 are stored in the activation control flag area in main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, that it is normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is turned off. If one of them is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO determination in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170 . As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

At S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203, the current activation state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a clearing process (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) of a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, an initial setting process is performed according to the current activation state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). The details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 . After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26 .

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a special symbol jackpot determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Also, this processing is performed using an area (outside area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, processing of S37 ~ S44) relating to the game control described later, for example, 6 msec interruption prohibited section (processing section of S26 ~ S35) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, the setting process of the display data output to each display part (for example, 1st special design display part 163, 2nd special design display part 164 etc.) of the LED unit 160 is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the restoration from power failure (when S52 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clear (NO determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag indicates setting change or setting confirmation (YES determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, special symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is kept for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect. The main special symbol will be explained in the sub-control process which will be described later.

At S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S71.

When it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (when S72 determines NO), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process is moved to S73. For example, NO determination is made in S72 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (when S72 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

At S73, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

At S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

At S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S74.

When it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (when S75 determines NO), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process is moved to S76. For example, NO determination is made in S75 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S75 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (when S75 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

At S76, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

At S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S78.

At S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S77.

When it is determined in S78 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S78), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (when S78 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S79.

At S79, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

At S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S81.

At S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S80.

When it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (when S81 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process, and shifts the process to the main control main process (Fig. 21 to 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the timing for starting variable display of the first special symbol is reached (when S81 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed, and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S71 to S82) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[1-6-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S73, S76, S79 and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

It should be noted that, for example, when the special symbol management process is invoked and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is processed, and the special symbol management process is S76 or S76 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S82, the first special symbol is processed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 28 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S91), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S91 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

At S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S93 based on the control state number read out in the process of S92.

At S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S93 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S94 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

At S95, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S95 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

At S96, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S96 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

At S97, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S98 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 27). It should be noted that the main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 when the special symbol management process is called at S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 when the special symbol management process is called at S76, and returns the process to S77 when the special symbol management process is called at S79. If so, the process returns to S80, and if called in S82, the special symbol control process also ends.

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S93 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

If it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S101), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S101 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S102.

At S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is OFF. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is determined as YES (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, is ON (NO determination in S102 ), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, that it is on in S102 (NO determination in S102), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 causes the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S102 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination process is performed using a special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a time saving hit, and turns on the small winning flag when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S105. The time-saving winning flag is turned off when shifting to the C time-saving game state, the small winning flag is turned off when the small winning game state is started, and the big winning flag is turned off when the big winning game state is started.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S104), first, a determination process of whether or not a big hit is performed, and when it is determined in this process that it is not a big hit, a determination process of whether or not a small hit is performed, If it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and if it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined that it is a loss.

At S105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104) (for example, a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. After executing the process of S105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of the winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a winning (a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S106, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104), the random number for reach determination or/and the random number for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 15(A)). In the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state) where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start ( A special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S108.

At S108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S107) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S109.

At S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 28 S94) is performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S110.

At S110, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S111.

At S111, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S111) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S112)) is interrupt prohibited. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. 30 and 31 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S94 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S94 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S121 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

At S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S122.

If it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (if S123 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S123 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124.

At S124, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 28) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S125.

At S125, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S126.

At S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a small win.

In S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is not a small hit (when S127 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S127 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a small hit (when S127 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S128.

At S128, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

At S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a big win.

In S129, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 of FIG. 29) is not a big hit (when S129 determines NO), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S129 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a big hit (when S129 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

At S130, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S131.

At S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S131).

If it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if determined as NO in S131), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and changes the processing to special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (when S131 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S134.

At S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the winning flag of the other special symbol to a losing flag and sets it. By performing this processing, when the result of the hit determination processing for the special symbol to be processed (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S135.

At S135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S136.

At S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S137.

At S137, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process of S137, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S138.

At S138, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S139.

At S139, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. be. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S95 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S95 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

If it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S141), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 28). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S141 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S142, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S142), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S143. On the other hand, when it is determined in S142 that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the big win (if YES in S142), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S143, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a failure (NO determination in S143), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S144.

At S144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in S143, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (when S143 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the big-hit game control process or the small-hit game control process. In this processing, signals to be output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S145, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S146. Signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the jackpot game control process of S145, the main CPU 201 also performs processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (eg, the big winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151) (S147), the external terminal board 184 Big hit signal set processing (S148), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), game state designation parameter setting processing (S150), and transmission reservation processing for the big hit start display command (S151 ), etc. In addition, by performing the process (S149) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 28 S96) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 32 and 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving management process (S161). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S162.

At S162, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

At S163, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S164). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S164, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management processing]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 . FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S161 during the special symbol game ending processing (see FIG. 34) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S171). The details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S171, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing (S172). The details of this counter determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 at S171 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 35) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S181). The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

At S182, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing (S182). The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the special management process (see FIG. 51).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S181 during the counter update process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are superimposed and executed when a plurality of time saving game states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S191). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. In addition, when shifting to the high certainty gaming state, the probability variation flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state.

When the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state or/and C time saving game state is satisfied, a time saving counter for the time saving game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, the time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time saving game state is terminated when the time saving counter reaches 0, but this is not the only method. Instead, an addition system may be adopted in which the time saving counter is added when the variable display of special symbols is completed, and the time saving game state is ended when the time saving counter reaches the set time saving number.

In S191, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and that the time saving counter is greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S191), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process, and the process is Return to the counter update process (FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S192). After executing the process of S192, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S<b>193 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S193 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

Time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are superimposed and executed. In the present embodiment, the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the previously executed time saving game state, "time saving mode=3" is set. Further, when the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the time-saving game state that is being executed first, the "time-saving mode=2" is set.

In S193, if the time saving mode is not equal to 3 (NO determination in S193), that is, if the C time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C short working hours counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S195, if the time saving mode is not equal to 2 (NO determination in S195), that is, if the B time saving game state is not repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process, and changes the process to the counter update process. (See FIG. 36).

In S196, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 36).

In addition, although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S194, or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S196, the main CPU 201 Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are overlapped and executed, not only two time-saving game states are overlapped, but three or more time-saving game states may be overlapped and executed. In this case, since the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time saving game states overlap is the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S182 during the counter update process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S201). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the variable probability flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The ceiling counter value is stored in the main RAM 203 .

In addition, the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko game machine as a transition condition to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. You may make it process.

In S201, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if the determination in S201 is NO), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and shifts the process to the counter update process ( 36). When the ceiling counter update process ends, the counter update process also ends, so the main CPU 201 returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 35).

In S201, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (YES in S201), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process, and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 36) and the time saving management process (see FIG. 35).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 39, counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S172 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 35) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S211). The details of this time saving shift determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40 . After executing the process of S211, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing (S212). The details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 . After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S<b>213 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than one.

When it is determined in S213 that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S213), that is, when the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S213 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S213), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

At S215, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S216) of the time saving transition command. In addition, the time-saving transition command transmitted in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S216, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 35). When the counter determination process ends, the time saving management process also ends, so the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34).

[1-6-15. Time reduction shift determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the time reduction transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S211 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 39) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S221).

In S221, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S221), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and the process is changed to a counter determination process ( 39). That is, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S221 that the variable probability flag is off (when S221 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

When it is determined in S222 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S222), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S222 that the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (YES in S222), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S223, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S224, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S226, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

[1-6-16. Time reduction transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S212 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 39) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S232).

In S232, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S232), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition processing, and the processing is changed to the counter determination processing (Fig. 39). By doing so, when the probability variation flag is ON, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S232 that the variable probability flag is off (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is not ON (NO in S233), that is, if the ceiling flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is ON (determination of YES in S233), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, setting the time reduction mode to 2, and time reduction performance are determined. After executing the process of S235, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 17). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessories 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 18) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 19). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (FIG. 20).

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S236, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is not ON (when S236 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and the process is changed to the counter determination process. (See FIG. 39).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S236 that the time saving hit flag is ON (YES in S236), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the C time saving counter, setting the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance and the like are determined. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

In addition, the number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 14). Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 17). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessories 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 18) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 19). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (FIG. 20).

In S238, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42 . After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 39).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting processing]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 . FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S238 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 41) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S241).

When it is determined in S241 that the time saving flag is ON (when S241 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S242.

If S241 is YES determination, the probability variation flag is off, for example, when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving gaming state is being executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value case), or when the C time-saving game state is executed in a state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first (when winning the “time-saving hit”) is equivalent. do.

It should be noted that, although not shown, when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed in a state where the C time-saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode=2" and determines in S235. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode=3". Along with this, the C time saving counter determined in S237 is set.

When it is determined in S241 that the time saving flag is not ON (NO determination in S241), that is, when the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S244.

In S242, the main CPU 201 compares the current time saving counter (remaining time saving number of times in the time saving game state previously executed) with the new number of time saving times (the number of time saving times determined in S235 or S237), and compares the current time saving counter. It is determined whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of times of time saving.

In S242, if it is determined that the current time saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time saving times (NO determination in S242), that is, if the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of time saving times, the main CPU 201, the time saving The setting process is ended, and the process is returned to the time saving shift process (see FIG. 41).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S242 that the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time saving (when S242 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where it is, the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter (that is, the number of remaining time-savings) and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S243) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter.

In addition, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or the state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first , the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state. That is, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier is changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, or the time-saving game corresponding to the larger one of the current time-saving counter and the new time-saving number of times It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

It should be noted that, as described above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). Winning probability of "per symbol", variable display time of normal symbol, or/and opening pattern of normal electric accessory 146 (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.).

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is, if S241 is NO determination, that is, if it is executed by shifting from the non-time-saving gaming state to the B time-saving gaming state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state It is a process that is performed when it is executed by shifting to (when it is elected to "time saving"). In this process, the time saving frequency and the time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S235) or the C time saving control mode determination process (S237) are set. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 41).

Thus, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine that includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation The result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs the process of shifting to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small win game state. do it.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change ends. However, it is not limited to this, and based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, the transition processing to the B time saving game state may be performed. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, B time saving game It is preferable to perform state transition processing. This is because, when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made, during the variable display of one of the special patterns as the final ceiling change, the other special pattern is variable. This is because, when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbols cannot receive the benefit of the B time-saving game state, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. By performing the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state based on the start of the variable display of the special design as the final ceiling variation, the variable display of the special design, which is the final ceiling variation, is particularly long variation (for example, in FIG. 15 Even if the shown long fluctuation AC), it is possible to avoid the delay in starting the B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, when the ceiling flag is on, the state is shifted to the B time saving game state, and when the time saving hit flag is on, the C time saving game state is entered. Although it is made to shift, it is not limited to this, and it is determined that the transition to the time saving game state is performed using a flag common to the case of moving to the B time saving game state and the case of moving to the C time saving game state. good too.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the B time saving control mode determination process (S235) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. (See S233 to S237 in FIG. 41), but it is not limited to this. For example, the C time reduction control mode determination process (S237) as a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state is prioritized over the B time reduction control mode determination process (S235) as a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state. You can also use

In addition, in the ceiling counter updating process described above with reference to FIG. 38, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S201 of FIG. 38), the ceiling counter is not updated. can't For example, in a ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability drop lottery, even if the variable probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is not performed, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state may be performed. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time-saving gaming state only when "ceiling counter=ceiling value", but shifts to the B time-saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value. processing will be performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), so the ceiling value is 319×2.5 to 319 It is preferably within the range of x3.0 (times).

In addition, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state, is up to a prescribed multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by a specified number (for example, the denominator of the jackpot probability of 3. up to 8 times). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), both the prescribed number of B time reduction and the prescribed number of C time reduction are approximately 1212 (319 × 3.8) is preferably set as the upper limit. In addition, it is not essential to set the upper limit of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the upper limit of the C time saving prescribed number of times to the same value.

By the way, as in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above , Time saving per probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number (eg, 3.0) regardless of the set value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ according to the set value, and there is a risk that the set value will be seen through by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the ceiling value is determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modified example related to time saving management processing]
In the above-described time-saving management process (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of the present embodiment") described in the first pachinko game machine with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 38) is It is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbols is terminated). Further, the processing related to the transition to the B time saving game state is given priority over the processing related to the transition to the C time saving game state. However, the time saving management process can be performed in various variations without being limited to these. Below, the modification concerning time saving management processing is demonstrated.

In the modification described below, the execution timing of the update process of the ceiling counter, the processing at the time of transition such as the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the transition to the C time saving game state, and the B time saving game state Whether or not the transition flag and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are common flags used in common will be described. In addition, the execution timing of the update process of the ceiling counter in the time saving management process of the present embodiment described above is as follows.
・Execution timing of update processing of ceiling counter: When fluctuation stops ・Processing at the time of transition: B time saving game state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving game state and C time saving game state transition flag: Separate

Further, below, representative examples of various modifications related to the time-saving management process will be described. It is not limited to modified examples.

[1-6-18-1. First modification]
A first modification is as follows. Below, processing different from the time saving management processing of the present embodiment will be described.
・Execution timing of update processing of ceiling counter: When fluctuation starts ・Processing at the time of transition: B time saving game state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving game state and C time saving game state transition flag: Separate

In the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), and the B time saving control mode determination which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state This is an example in which the process (see S235 in FIG. 41) is performed with priority over the C time saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state. Other processes in the first modified example are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first modification. In addition, in FIG. 44, even if the timing to process differs from the time-saving management process of a present Example about the same process as the time-saving management process of a present Example, the same step number shall be attached|subjected.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this first modification, the main CPU 201 performs the ceiling counter update process (S182), for example, the special symbol variable display time setting process (S108), and the special symbol control state number. This is performed between the process of setting to 1 (S109).

The ceiling counter processing of S182 performed between S108 and S109 is the same as the ceiling counter processing described above with reference to FIG. 38, and thus description thereof is omitted.

In addition, the main CPU 201 also performs a time saving transition determination process (S211) after the ceiling counter update process (S182) ends.

The time-saving transition determination process (S211) performed after the ceiling counter update process (S182) ends is the same as the ceiling counter process described above with reference to FIG. 40, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this first modification, the B time reduction control mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the B time reduction gaming state, is a process related to the transition to the C time reduction gaming state. This is performed with priority over the control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), but since the process for this is the same as in FIG. 41, the description is omitted.

It should be noted that, among the time saving management process of the present embodiment, other processes excluding the ceiling counter process (S182) and the time saving transition determination process (S211) can be executed in the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 34). . In this case, among the time-saving transition processing (see FIG. 41), the processing related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, S235 and S238 accompanying this) is a special symbol variable display start processing (for example, shown in FIG. 44 After the end of the time saving transition determination process (S211)), the process related to the transition to the C time saving game state (for example, S236 and S238 accompanying this) is performed in the special symbol game end process (Fig. 34) may

In addition, in this first modification, the ceiling counter update process (S182) is performed between the special symbol variable display time setting process (S108) and the process of setting the special symbol control state number to 1 (S109). Although it is performed, it is not limited to this, and may be performed at any timing as long as the special symbol variable display start process is in progress. However, as shown in FIG. 44, the ceiling counter update process (S182) may be executed prior to the special symbol win determination process (S104), or the special symbol win determination process (S104) may be executed first. ) may be executed after

In addition, in this first modification, when the transition condition to the B time reduction gaming state is established (when S222 in FIG. 46 is YES determination), and when the transition condition to the C time reduction gaming state is established (special symbol When the result of the hit determination process (for example, see S104 in FIG. 44) is a time-saving hit), the main CPU 201 is common to the case of shifting to the B time-saving gaming state and the case of shifting to the C time-saving gaming state. Set on the time-saving transition flag used for

[1-6-18-2. Second modification]
A second modification is as follows.
・Execution timing of update processing of ceiling counter: When fluctuation starts ・Processing at the time of transition: C time saving game state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving game state and C time saving game state transition flag: Separate

In the second modification, similar to the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started). However, in this second modification, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state, is replaced with the B time-saving control, which is a process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. This is different from the first modified example in that it takes precedence over the mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41). Other processes in the second modified example are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the second modified example. In addition, in FIG. 45, even if the timing to process differs from the time-saving management process of a present Example about the same process as the time-saving management process of a present Example, the same step number shall be attached|subjected.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the time saving transition process of the second modified example, when S232 is YES, the main CPU 201 gives priority to the processes of S236 and S237 over the processes of S233 and S235. By doing so, not only when only the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied among the transition conditions to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, but also the B time reduction game state Even when both the conditions for transition to the C state and the conditions for the transition to the C time reduction game state are established, the transition to the C time reduction game state is prioritized over the transition to the B time reduction game state. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-3. Third modification]
A third modification is as follows.
・ Execution timing of ceiling counter update processing: At the start of fluctuation ・ Processing at the time of transition: B time saving game state priority ・ Transition flag to B time saving game state and transition flag to C time saving game state: Common

In the third modification, similar to the first modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started). However, in the third modification, using a common flag in the case of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state, in that the time-saving transition processing is performed, the first modification and different. In addition, in this third modification, the B time reduction control mode determination process (S235 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state, is replaced with the C time reduction control, which is a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state. This is performed with priority over the mode determination process (see S237 in FIG. 41), and this point is the same as in the first modification. Other processes in the third modified example are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Drawing 46 is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving shift judging processing in the 3rd modification. Moreover, FIG. 47 is a flowchart which shows an example of the time reduction transition process in a 3rd modification. In addition, in FIG.46 and FIG.47, even if the timing to process differs from the time-saving management process of a present Example about the process same as the time-saving management process of a present Example, the same step number shall be attached|subjected.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the time reduction transition determination process of the third modification, the main CPU 201 sets the time reduction transition flag to ON after performing the process of S224 (S225). As described above, this time saving transition flag is a flag commonly used when moving to the B time saving game state and when moving to the C time saving game state. Therefore, in the third modification, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving shift flag to ON even when the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 44, for example) is a time saving win.

After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

Note that the processing of S224 and the processing of S226 are both the same as the processing of S224 and the processing of S226 described above with reference to FIG. 40, so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the time saving transition process of the third modification, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving transition flag is ON (S231).

In S231, if it is determined that the time saving transition flag is not ON (NO determination in S231), that is, if the time saving transition flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and the process is changed to the counter determination process. (See FIG. 39).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S231 that the time saving transition flag is ON (when S231 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off.

In S232, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO in S232), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S232 that the variable probability flag is off (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is not ON (NO determination in S233), that is, if the ceiling flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 skips the processing of S236 shown in FIG. , S237. It is not necessary to go through the process of S236 shown in FIG. 41, when the time saving transition flag is on (S231 is YES determination) and the ceiling flag is not on (S233 is NO determination), C time saving transition This is to show that the condition is satisfied (that is, the time saving per flag is on).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is ON (determined as YES in S233), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S235 as in FIG.

B time-saving control mode determination processing (S235) and C time-saving control mode determination processing (S237) are both B time-saving control mode determination processing (S235) and C time-saving control mode determination processing (S237) in FIG. , the description is omitted.

After executing the process of S235, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238. Similarly, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238 after executing the process of S237.

In addition, since the time saving setting process of S238 is the same as that of S238 of FIG. 41, description is abbreviate|omitted. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239.

In S239, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving shift flag. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 39).

Thus, in the third modification, when the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is established (when S222 in FIG. 46 is YES determination), and when the transitioning condition to the C time-saving gaming state is established (special symbol When the result of the hit determination process (for example, see S104 in FIG. 44) is a time saving hit), it is commonly used in the case of moving to the B time saving game state and the case of moving to the C time saving game state. A time saving transition flag is set to ON. Therefore, the main CPU 201 can execute the C time saving control mode determination process (S237), which is the process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state, without executing the process of S236 shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47 , in the time saving transition process of the third modified example, when S232 is determined as YES, the main CPU 201 gives priority to the process of S235 over the process of S237. By doing so, not only when only the condition for transition to the B time reduction game state is established among the conditions for the transition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, but also the B time reduction game state Even when both the conditions for transitioning to and the conditions for transitioning to the C time saving game state are satisfied, the transition to the B time saving game state is given priority over the transition to the C time saving game state. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-4. Fourth modification]
A fourth modification is as follows.
・Execution timing of update processing of ceiling counter: When fluctuation starts ・Processing at the time of transition: C time saving game state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving game state and C time saving game state transition flag: common

In the fourth modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), and when moving to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state It is the same as the 3rd modification in that time saving transition processing is performed using a flag common to the case of transitioning to . However, in this fourth modification, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state, is replaced with the B time-saving control, which is a process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. This differs from the third modified example in that it is performed with priority over the mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41). Other processes in the fourth modified example are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the fourth modified example. In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the working hours management process of the present embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the working hours management process of the present embodiment. Also, the points different from FIG. 47 will be mainly described below.

Moreover, since it is the same process as FIG. 46 about time reduction shift determination processing, description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the time saving transition process of the fourth modification, when it is determined in S232 that the variable probability flag is off (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON. In addition, as described above, this time saving hit flag is set to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is a time saving hit. be.

In S236, when it determines with a time saving hit flag not being ON (when S236 is NO determination), ie, when a time saving hit flag is OFF, main CPU201 moves a process to S235.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S236 that the time saving hit flag is ON (when S236 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

Thus, in the time saving transition process of the fourth modification, when S232 is determined as YES, the main CPU 201 gives priority to the process of S237 over the process of S235. By doing so, not only when only the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied among the transition conditions to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, but also the B time reduction game state Even when both the conditions for transition to the C state and the conditions for the transition to the C time reduction game state are established, the transition to the C time reduction game state is prioritized over the transition to the B time reduction game state. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-5. Fifth Modification]
A fifth modification is as follows.
・Execution timing of update processing of ceiling counter: When fluctuation stops ・Processing at the time of transition: C time saving game state priority ・Transition flag to B time saving game state and C time saving game state transition flag: Separate

The fifth modification is similar to the time saving management process of the present embodiment in that the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbols is terminated). However, in this fifth modification, the C time reduction control mode determination process (S237 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state, is replaced with the B time reduction control, which is a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state. It differs from the working hours management process of the present embodiment in that it takes precedence over the mode determination process (see S235 in FIG. 41). Other processes in the fifth modified example are the same as the time saving management process of the present embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the fifth modified example. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the time saving management process of the present embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the time saving management process of the present embodiment. 41 will be described below, and other descriptions will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the time saving transition process of the fifth modification, when it is determined in S232 that the variable probability flag is off (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON. In addition, as described above, this time saving hit flag is set to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is a time saving hit. be.

In S236, when it determines with a time saving hit flag not being ON (when S236 is NO determination), ie, when a time saving hit flag is OFF, main CPU201 moves a process to S233.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S236 that the time saving hit flag is ON (YES in S236), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

Thus, in the time-saving transition process of the fifth modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started), and when S232 determines YES, the main CPU 201 gives priority to the processing of S236 and S237 over the processing of S233 and S235. By doing so, not only when only the transition condition to the C time reduction game state is satisfied among the transition conditions to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state, but also the B time reduction game state Even when both the conditions for transition to the C state and the conditions for the transition to the C time reduction game state are established, the transition to the C time reduction game state is prioritized over the transition to the B time reduction game state. becomes possible.

[1-6-18-6. Sixth Modification]
A sixth modification is as follows. Below, processing different from the time saving management processing of the present embodiment will be described.
・ Timing of update processing of ceiling counter: When fluctuation stops ・ Processing at the time of transition: After confirming that “time saving hit” has not been won, transition to B time saving game state

The sixth modification is similar to the time saving management process of the present embodiment in that the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol game end process (that is, when the variable display of the special symbols is terminated). However, in this sixth modification, when the condition for transition to the B time saving game state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 confirms that the condition for transition to the C time saving game state is not satisfied, and then performs the B time saving game. It differs from the time saving management process of the present embodiment in that the B time saving control mode determination process (see 235 in FIG. 41), which is a process related to transition to the state, is executed. In the following, the points different from FIG. 41 will be mainly described, and since the others are the same as the working hours management process of the present embodiment, the description will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the sixth modified example. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the working hours management process of the present embodiment even if the processing timing is different from the working hours management process of the present embodiment. Also, the points different from FIG. 41 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the time-saving transition process of the sixth modification, in S232, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (S232 determines YES), the main CPU201 ends the time-saving transition process, The processing is returned to the counter determination processing (see FIG. 39).

In S233, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

When it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is ON (when S233 determines YES), the main CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S234.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S233 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S233), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S236.

In S234, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is off. In addition, as described above, this time saving hit flag is set to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is a time saving hit. be.

In 234, when the time saving hit flag is off (S234 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S235.

In S236, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S236, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is not ON (NO determination in S236), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 39).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S236 that the time saving hit flag is ON (YES in S236), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

Thus, in the time saving transition process of the sixth modification, the ceiling counter update process is executed in the special symbol variable display start process (that is, when the special symbol variable display is started), and the main CPU 201 shifts to the B time saving gaming state. Even if the transition condition is satisfied (even if S233 is YES determination), after confirming that the transition condition to the C time saving game state is not satisfied (S234 is YES determination) , B time reduction control mode determination processing (S235) is executed.

[1-6-18-7. Seventh Modification]
In addition, in the time saving counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 37 and the first modification to the sixth modification described above, when the time saving game state overlaps, when a plurality of time saving game states are overlapped and executed explained the processing of However, when the time-saving game state overlaps, it is not always essential to overlap and execute a plurality of time-saving game states. When a plurality of time-saving gaming states are not executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 201 may execute the processing shown in FIG. 43 .

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a modification of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S181 during the counter update process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko game machine. In addition, in FIG. 43, the same step number shall be attached|subjected about the same process as the time saving counter update process of FIG.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S191). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

In S191, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S191), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process, and the process is Return to the counter update process (FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

At S192, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S192). After executing the process of S192, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 36).

[1-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S96 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of a big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S96 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S96 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S251 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

At S252, the main CPU 201 loads the value of the counter value of the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151) is the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 opened in the big winning game state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit big winning opening 151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S253 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254.

At S254, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S254) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 28 S98) is performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

At S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S256). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

Returning to S253, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

At S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

At S258, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. The big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

At S259, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning openings (large winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning), maximum opening time of big winning opening, maximum number of winning openings to big winning opening, winning of big winning opening The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the big winning game control process, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 151 for small winnings when executing the small winning game control process. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 131 and the big winning opening 151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S260, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating open/close control data for the big winning openings (big winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

At S261, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S261) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S97 in FIG. 28) is performed. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

At S262, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S263, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

[1-7-1. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S97 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S97 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S271 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning the big winning openings (big winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 152 for small winning (see FIG. 6) etc.) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (if YES determination in S272) ), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S259 in FIG. 51) has passed.

When it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) has not elapsed (NO determination in S273), the main CPU 201 determines that the big winning opening has not occurred. The mouth opening control process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) has passed (if YES in S273), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning openings (big winning big winning opening 131, small winning big winning opening 151). After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

At S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S96 in FIG. 28) is performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

At S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

It should be noted that when this jackpot end process is called at S98 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S98 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S281), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 27). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S281 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

At S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, set or reset the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.), and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, pattern fixed number counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened) counter, big winning opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) is set or reset. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S282). In addition, when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high-probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is on. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

At S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 34 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing, terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 28), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 27). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24) will be described.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 54 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S291 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

At S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S292). After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S293 based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

At S293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process, and the normal symbol hit determination process. 146 opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting processing is performed. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S295.

At S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S296.

At S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the normal symbol per end process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

In this embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination random number is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 255, for example, and 0 to 255 is used as the normal symbol hit determination value data. Since the normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data with respect to the total random number of the winning determination random numbers of the normal symbols, the winning probability of the normal symbol is, for example, 255/256 in this embodiment. This normal per symbol probability is the same or substantially the same when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time such as 600 sec in a game state in which the time saving control is not executed, whereas in the game state in which the time saving control is executed a relatively short time such as 1 sec. only run. Thus, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 55, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S<b>302 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power interruption detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S<b>303 , the main CPU 201 determines whether power failure is detected.

If it is determined in S303 that the power failure has not been detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that power failure has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

At S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, power failure recovery, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (when S315 determines NO), the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. Details of the setting control process (S316) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

If the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (when S315 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot judgment random number counters, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

At S322, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 57, the setting control process performed at S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 57, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (when S331 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S332). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the setting confirmation (when S333 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S333), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337. .

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, the currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

At S336, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or startup initial setting process (S25) is subordinated. It is sent to the control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 58, the setting change process performed at S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S<b>342 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 57).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 59, the setting confirmation process performed at S333 in the setting control process (see FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 58).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S351 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing (S352). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 57).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 60, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 58) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also carried out as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 25) when none of the recovery from power failure, setting change, and setting confirmation is performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, the area in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "backup area") is cleared (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 56). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 . That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 57). After executing the processing of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is entered. After executing the RAM setting process (S371) at power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S372), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is ON (when S372 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability variation notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 57). After executing the processing of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 201 executes start-up winning detection processing (step S381). After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374. The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning hole passage detection processing (step S382). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S383). In the big winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set when winning the big winning opening 131 or the big winning opening 151 for the small winning. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passing detection processing (step S384). In the ball passage detection process, based on the fact that the passage gate switch 127 has detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126, various random numbers for normal symbols (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted. . After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting entrance winning detection process]
FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 63, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 121 (step S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in step S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in step S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the first special symbol symbol random number, the first special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols acquired based on the winning of the first start port 120 is less than four. The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, if it is the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (YES in step S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

At S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

At S395, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch determination processing. This process is a process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbols, performing the hit determination process, etc., using the random number value acquired in S392 prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 29). It also determines whether or not the prefetch flag is set.

It should be noted that the look-ahead determination process may be performed at any time between the acquisition of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the hit determination process for the special symbol, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. Considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect before and after the process of S395, for example, it is preferable to perform the process before and after. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

At S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol (step S397). The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information to increase the number of reserved first special symbols by 1, the variation pattern information of the first special symbol, etc., and the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

At step S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not game balls have been detected by the second starting switches 141A and 141B (step S398).

When it is determined that the game ball has not been detected by the second starting opening switches 141A and 141B (NO determination in step S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process, and switches the process to switch input detection. Return to the process (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the second starter switches 141A and 141B (YES in step S398), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the second special symbol jackpot determination random number, the second special symbol symbol random number, the second special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols acquired based on the winning of the second starting ports 140A and 140B is less than four.

In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B until the starting condition is satisfied. It has a special symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). be. The main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, when the upper limit is 4 (NO determination in step S400), the main CPU 201 ends the starting entrance winning detection process, and switches the process to switch input detection. Return to the process (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (YES in step S400), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting ports 140A and 140B in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

At S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol (step S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, the variation pattern information of the second special symbol, etc., and the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 terminates the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 62).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

Note that the initialization process (S501) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the effect mode of the look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as "pre-read effect mode") is determined, or the special symbol variation of this time (hereinafter referred to as "the variation") is determined. ) corresponding to the sub-variation production pattern (production mode performed by 301 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol) is determined.

The look-ahead effect is performed using a pending image displayed on the display device 7, for example. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status. The look-ahead performance modes include a big win look-ahead performance mode indicating that there is a possibility of winning a big win, a time-saving look-ahead mode indicating that there is a possibility of winning a time-saving win, and a big win and a time-saving win. It includes a common look-ahead performance mode in which although there is a possibility that one of them has been won, the winning type (big win or short-time win) is not specified. A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described later.

The determination of the effect mode of the variation is performed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, for example, the determination process of the effect mode that suggests a big hit, the determination process of the effect mode that suggests a small hit, and the "time saving hit". A process of determining the suggested effect mode and the like are performed. Furthermore, the processing of determining the production mode of the B time-saving game state transition production, which suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, for example, the production mode of the countdown production, or the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, etc. Performs determination processing of various presentation modes related to progress.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, generates various requests (for example, a drawing request) for operating various effect devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, and character requests). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 . The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 . Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role product request to the role product control circuit 307 . Based on the message (character request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the character control circuit 307 controls all or part of the character that constitutes the performance character group 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6). Drive control is performed to operate the performance drive motor (not shown). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

Although the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the game state in which the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode (high accuracy short-time game state, high The second special symbol is used as the main special symbol in the non-probable time-saving gaming state and low-probability time-saving gaming state). Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect. In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-probability short-time game state, instead of the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, which is the main special design, other effects An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of times of time saving until the time saving game state ends) may be displayed.

[1-9. Specific example of effect mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs effect mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 64) based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. FIG.

Sub CPU301, as one of the various processes performed in the effect mode determination process, for example, effect pattern of the display effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "sub-fluctuation effect pattern"), a look-ahead effect pattern etc.

The sub-fluctuation production pattern is a production showing that the degree of expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special design is maintained or increased with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special design to the stop of the special design. Patterns include, for example, variation patterns of decorative designs, character effects, and the like.

For the look-ahead effect pattern, after winning the starting port 120, the starting information such as various random numbers acquired based on this winning is provided to the special symbol hit determination process (that is, the variable display of the special symbol is started). It is an effect pattern that maintains or changes the look-ahead effect mode that is displayed in the form of a pending image that indicates that the start information is suspended, for example, until the start information is suspended.

[1-9-1. Sub-fluctuation effect pattern decision processing]
First, the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table for low start stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. Although the program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table for high start, the description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table for low start in FIG. , determines a sub-variation effect pattern (indicated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 65) to be displayed on the display device 7. FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, time-saving hit system reach, big hit system reach, and common reach are prepared as sub-variation performance patterns.

The time-saving winning type ready-to-win is a ready-to-win effect indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving winning as a result of the special symbol winning determination processing (see S104 in FIG. 29), and the possibility of a time-saving winning can also be seen from the appearance. It is a reach production mode that can grasp. For the time saving per system reach, for example, a time saving per system reach A, a time saving per system reach B and a time saving per system reach C are prepared. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a loss or a big hit, but is a time-saving hit fixed reach that is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). ). This time-saving hit type reach A is not a prefetch target sub-variation production pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a pre-read sub-variation production pattern. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C are the same or substantially the same in appearance appearance. However, the time saving hit system reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-fluctuation effect pattern, while the time-saving hit system reach C is a look-ahead target sub-fluctuation effect pattern (see "look-ahead flag" column in FIG. 15).

The big win system ready-to-win is a ready-to-win performance showing the possibility of a big win as a result of the special pattern win determination processing, and is a ready-to-win performance mode in which the possibility of a big win can be comprehended from the appearance. For example, a big-hit reach A, a big-hit reach B, and a big-hit reach C are prepared as the big-hit reach. The jackpot system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or "a time-saving hit", but is a big-hit determination reach that is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15 reference). This big hit type ready-to-win A is not a prefetch target sub-fluctuation effect pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a prefetch-type sub-fluctuation effect pattern. The big-hit reach B and the big-hit reach C have the same or substantially the same performance mode in appearance. However, the big-hit ready-to-win B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead, while the big-hit ready-to-win C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead (refer to the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).

The common reach is a reach performance indicating that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short time hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a short time hit or a big hit. It is a ready-to-win effect mode in which it is difficult to grasp whether there is. For the common reach, for example, a common reach A, a common reach B, a common reach C, a common reach D, and a common reach E are prepared. The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance mode. Further, the common reach D is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the big hit system reach C. In addition, common reach A and common reach B are not prefetch target sub-variation effect patterns, while common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are pre-read target sub-variation effect patterns ("Prefetch in FIG. 15 flags column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub fluctuation effect pattern.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process will be described.

The work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes a first special symbol start storage area (0) provided in the main RAM 203, a first special symbol start storage area (1), a first special symbol start storage area (2), a first 1 special symbol start storage area (3) and 1st special symbol start storage area (4) as areas corresponding to each, first sub reservation area (0), first sub reservation area (1), first sub A reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3) and a first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), various Hold information is stored. In addition, information corresponding to the variation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the information corresponding to these pieces of information is stored in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening winning of this time.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. As areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second sub-reserving area (0), the second sub-reserving area (1), the second sub-reserving area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3) and a second sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, but it is not limited to this, and other game states (eg, low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state, high-probability non-short-time game state, etc. ).

The look-ahead effect is performed using a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 . In the display area of the display device 7, the 0th area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0), the first reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (1), the first A second reservation area corresponding to the sub reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (4) are provided. there is

The form of the pending image in which the look-ahead performance is executed includes a big win-type look-ahead performance form showing the possibility of a big win, a time -saving look-ahead performance form showing the possibility of a time-saving win, and a big win and time-saving. A common hit look-ahead effect form that indicates that there is a possibility of any hit is included.

In addition, the look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead effect type pattern that changes the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process (whether it is a time-saving hit or a big hit) and the result of the special symbol hit determination process. It includes a look-ahead effect pattern that changes the expected value for being (big hit or time saving hit).

The look-ahead effect type pattern is a effect pattern that changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win look-ahead effect form to a big win system look-ahead effect form.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect pattern is a effect pattern that changes the form of the pending image from a form with a relatively low expected value to a form with a relatively high expected value.

[1-9-2-1. Various tables used for look-ahead effect pattern determination processing]
First, various tables used in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG. 66 to 69 are examples of tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the look-ahead effect pattern determination process is a process executed by the sub CPU 301 as one of various processes performed in the effect mode determination process.

FIG. 66 is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table. Also, FIG. 67 is an example of a look-ahead effect type pattern determination table for low start.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the look-ahead effect is performed only in the normal game state in which the left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table of FIG. 66 and the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table of FIG. are not stored in the program ROM 302 . However, when performing a look-ahead effect in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table for high start and the look-ahead effect type determination table for high start are also stored in the program ROM 302. remembered.

As shown in the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table in FIG. determined by The pending number here includes start information to be prefetched. That is, when the starting information acquired based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is withheld, the number of reservations after the reservation corresponds to the number of reservations shown in FIG.

For example, if the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead effect type pattern number is determined to be "3". is determined to be "22".

When the sub-fluctuation effect pattern number is determined, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table of FIG. 66 is referenced to determine the look-ahead effect type pattern number.

Next, the look-ahead effect type pattern is determined, for example, based on the look-ahead effect type pattern number and the effect selection random number 1, as shown in the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table for low start in FIG. . In addition, in FIG. 67, the look-ahead effect type pattern number is illustrated as "table number" for convenience. The effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value acquired by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

For example, if the prefetch effect type pattern number is "3" and the acquired effect selection random number 1 is "77", the prefetch effect type pattern is determined to be "08H". , and the obtained effect selection random number 1 is "77", it is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (corresponding to reservation) in FIG. 67 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively.

In addition, "A" shown in each column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. The above is also a production form that can grasp that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit.

In addition, "B" shown in each column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. , It is a production form that can grasp that there is a possibility of a big hit.

In addition, "C" shown in each column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 67 is a common system prefetch effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is possible for both time saving hits and big hits. In terms of appearance, it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility of a short-time hit or a big hit.

For example, when the prefetch effect type pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common system prefetch effect form is displayed in the third reservation area, the common system prefetch effect form is displayed in the second reservation area, and from the second reservation area When shifting to the first reservation area, the common system prefetch performance form is changed to the time reduction winning system prefetch performance form, and the time reduction winning system prefetch performance form is displayed in the first reservation area.

Further, when the prefetch effect type pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common prefetch effect form is displayed in the third reservation area, and when shifting from the third reserve area to the second reserve area, the common prefetch effect form to a big-hit type look-ahead performance mode, and the big-hit type look-ahead performance mode is displayed in the first reservation area.

That is, the look-ahead effect type pattern includes the following patterns a) to d), as shown in FIG. The pattern of changing from the big hit type look-ahead performance form to the time saving type look-ahead performance form and the pattern of changing from the time saving type look-ahead performance form to the big and short winning look-ahead performance form are not included in the look-ahead performance type pattern.
B) A time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect pattern is displayed at the time of suspension, and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect pattern continues without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, look-ahead effect type pattern “09H ”).
b) A jackpot type prefetch effect pattern (for example, prefetch effect type pattern "17H") in which the big hit type prefetch effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big win system prefetch effect form continues without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, prefetch effect type pattern "17H") .
c) A common win-type look-ahead effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect type pattern “24H”) that changes to a time-saving win-type look-ahead effect form after a common win-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of suspension.
d) A common win-type look-ahead effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect type pattern “12H”) that is displayed in a common-type look-ahead effect form at the time of suspension and then changes to a big win-type look-ahead effect form.

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 66), and determines the look-ahead effect type pattern number based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations. Then, the sub CPU 301 determines a look-ahead effect type pattern based on the determined look-ahead effect type pattern number and the random number value 1 for effect selection.

In addition, FIG. 68 is an example of a hit look-ahead performance pattern table when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit". Also, FIG. 69 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern table when losing when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is losing.

By the way, for example, the look-ahead effect form represented in the form of a pending image differs in effect form according to the expected value for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

For example, for "time saving per", for example, the expected value is changed by changing the shape of the pending image, which is usually represented by a triangle, such as "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star". can be expressed. In this case, the expected value is lowest when the retained image is a rectangle and highest when it is a star.

As for the big hit, for example, the change in the expected value can be expressed by changing the color of the pending image, which is normally represented in white, to "blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow". . In this case, the expected value is lowest if the pending image is blue and highest if the pending image is a rainbow.

Although the details will be described later, for the common hit look-ahead effect form that indicates the possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit, the pending image is, for example, a color that indicates the expected value level for the big hit and You may make it represent both with the shape which shows an expectation value level, and may make it represent with the exclusive common hit look-ahead presentation form.

The reserved image as a prefetch effect mode can change from a relatively low expected effect mode to a relatively high expected value mode, but the expected value is relatively high from the relatively high expected value mode It is preferable not to change to a low production mode. Also, when changing the presentation form of the hold image, it is not necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow". , for example, "pentagon→circle" or "yellow→rainbow". Also, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the lowest expected value, such as a square or blue, but may be, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (response to reservation) in FIG. 68 indicate the first to fourth reservation areas, respectively, as in FIG.

"0" to "5" shown as data in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 68 and/or the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. It shows the For example, the above "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". "Hexagon" and "green" above correspond to "3", "circle" and "red" above correspond to "4", and "star" and "rainbow" above correspond to "5". Equivalent to

Hereinafter, "1" to "5" shown as data in the column of remarks (on hold) in FIG. 68 and/or in the column of remarks (on hold) in FIG. called.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the prefetch effect pattern is, as shown in the hit prefetch effect pattern table in FIG. It is determined based on a random value of 2. Similarly, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the look-ahead effect pattern is, as shown in the look-ahead effect pattern table for loss in FIG. determined based on The effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value acquired by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command is received. In addition, in FIGS. 68 and 69, the look-ahead effect pattern is illustrated as "pre-read effect pattern command" for convenience. Also, in FIGS. 68 and 69, only the case where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" is illustrated, and the illustration when the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for the sake of convenience.

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be "43H". For example, when the prefetch effect pattern is determined to be "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, and the expected value level is changed from "2" to "2" when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area. 3", and when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the expected value level changes from "3" to "5".

Further, for example, if the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". . For example, when the prefetch effect pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reservation area, and from the second reservation area to the first reservation area When shifting, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prefetch effect pattern table for winning (see FIG. 68) or the prefetch effect pattern table for losing (see FIG. 69), based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, A look-ahead performance pattern is determined based on the performance pattern. Then, the sub CPU 301 determines a look-ahead effect type pattern based on the determined look-ahead effect type pattern number and the random number value 1 for effect selection.

It should be noted that the look-ahead effect type pattern shown in FIG. 67 is a pattern in which the hit type can change due to the change in the shape of the pending image when the pending shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the variation ends). In addition, the timing at which the form of the pending image changes is not limited to when the pending shift shifts, and may be during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In this way, according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect is a big hit look-ahead effect indicating the expected value for the big hit, a time-saving look-ahead effect indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit, and a hit (big hit or time-saving hit ) is configured to be able to execute one of the common look-ahead effects showing the expected value for ). Then, when the common winning look-ahead performance form is executed, the player can be entertained by whether it will change to the big-hit look-ahead performance form or the time-saving look-ahead look-ahead performance form. can be increased.

In addition, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the suspension is shifted (when the variable display of the special pattern of the variation is completed), hit (big hit or time saving hit) by the form change of the pending image. This is a pattern in which the expected value level can change. However, the timing at which the look-ahead effect form changes is not limited to when the hold shifts, and may be during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Also, regarding the form of the pending image performed as the look-ahead effect (that is, the form of the pending image displayed within the range of the second sub-reserving area (4) to the second sub-reserving area (1)), the starting ports 410 and 140A , 140B, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbols of the variation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

By the way, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern (for example, see "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 65) in which the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect is executed, and the variation pattern in which the big hit system look-ahead effect is performed (for example, in FIG. 65 (See "06H" and "11H"), the probability of being determined to the variation pattern in which the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect is executed is higher (for example, see FIG. 15). That is, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is higher in the execution ratio of the time-saving winning-type look-ahead effect than the execution ratio of the big win-type look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance and enhance interest compared to the conventional pachinko game machine in which only the big-hit look-ahead performance was performed out of the time-saving winning-type look-ahead performance and the big-hit look-ahead performance. It becomes possible.

In addition, instead of making the execution ratio of the time-saving prefetch effect higher than the execution ratio of the big hit system prefetch effect, the execution ratio of the big hit system prefetch effect is made higher than the execution ratio of the time-saving hit system prefetch effect. You may When the look-ahead performance is executed, the expected value for the big win is higher than the expected value for the time-saving win, so even in such a case, it is possible to increase the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, it is possible to win "time-saving hit" in the special symbol hit determination process (see FIG. 10). However, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability short-time game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state is "time saving hit", when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the A time saving game state, and for the A time saving game state In any case where the C time saving game state is not repeatedly executed, the possibility of increasing the time saving number of times is low. Therefore, by minimizing the player's knowledge of the possibility of winning the "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving win" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead performance from being performed in the low-probability short-time game state, and the look-ahead performance may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability short-time game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, time-saving hit system reach, big hit system reach, or common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to FIGS. 15 and 65 to 67, the sub CPU 301 executes the time saving hit system reach as the sub fluctuation effect pattern when executing the time saving system look-ahead effect pattern, Do not execute jackpot reach. Further, when the sub CPU 301 executes the big-hit type look-ahead performance pattern, it executes the big-hit type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-type ready-to-win.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes a time-saving winning type look-ahead effect pattern or a common winning-type look-ahead effect pattern, it can execute time-saving winning type reach as a sub-fluctuation effect pattern. However, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving winning system ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern when the big hit system look-ahead performance pattern is executed.

In addition, a big hit system look-ahead effect pattern (for example, look-ahead effect type pattern "37H"), a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect pattern (e.g., look-ahead effect type pattern "29H"), and a common hit system look-ahead effect pattern (e.g., look-ahead effect pattern "27H") is executed, the sub CPU 301 executes common reach (for example, sub-variation production pattern "0AH", "0BH") as a sub-variation production pattern. good too.

Moreover, after executing the time-saving winning system reach and clearly showing the loss in the time-saving winning system reach, a performance pattern may be provided in which the big winning system is executed. In this case, since the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end whether or not the jackpot-type ready-to-win with a high profit rate will be executed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, when common reach E, which is a common effect, is executed, common After the same performance as the reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the same performance as the big hit system reach C. On the other hand, when no common effect is executed, the game does not shift to the big win system reach C. Similarly, when the common ready-to-reach E, which is a common effect, is executed in the target variation, after the same effect as the common ready-to-reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the same effect as the short-time winning system ready-to-reach C. On the other hand, when the common performance is not executed at all, it does not shift to the time saving winning system reach C.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 will be described with reference to the tables shown in FIGS. FIG. 70 is an example of a flow chart showing a prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As shown in FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not it has received a winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 301 terminates the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch target suspension is not at the current time, that is, whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed for the current suspension. When there are a plurality of suspensions, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of suspended images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one suspended image.

If the prefetch effect is being executed for the current hold (NO determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not being executed for the current hold (YES determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation pattern information received by the winning command is for prefetching.

If the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not the prefetch target (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received by the winning command is to be prefetched (YES determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling price and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number (for example, 4 or 8) that can be held. This processing is for avoiding the transition to the B time-saving game state before execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the suspension of the read-ahead performance despite the execution of the read-ahead performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number that can be held, but the invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the target of prefetching. If there is (when S3003 is YES determination), it may be determined whether or not the number is greater than the pending number including the prefetch target. The ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as commands, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201 .

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect type pattern number determination processing. In this process, the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see FIG. 66) is referenced to determine the look-ahead effect type pattern number. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table (FIG. 67) is referenced to determine the look-ahead effect type pattern. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "time saving win" or a "big win". In this process, the result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined based on the variation pattern information received in the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by transmitting special symbol winning/losing information from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301, it is possible to determine a "time-saving win" or a "big win".

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a hit look-ahead effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead effect pattern table (FIG. 68) is referred to when winning, and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined.

In addition, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing when losing. In this process, the look-ahead effect pattern table (FIG. 69) is referred to when losing, and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "big hit look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit, has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 Do not execute look-ahead effects. Even in a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect when a big hit look-ahead effect has already been performed.

For example, there are a plurality of holds including a first hold and a second hold in which variable display of special symbols is started after the first hold, and in the first hold, a jackpot-type look-ahead production pattern ( For example, when the prefetching effect type pattern "17H" in FIG. 67) is being executed, even if the prefetching effect is executed in the second suspension, the prefetching effect in the second suspension does not make sense. there is a possibility. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and is controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state is terminated, the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state, for example, the "time-saving win" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving win", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, when the big win look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to carry out the look-ahead performance for the suspension that is executed after the suspension in which the big win look-ahead performance is executed.

Even if the first suspension is the suspension of the big win (the suspension from which the big win is derived), if the look-ahead performance is not executed for the first suspension, the look-ahead performance is executed in the second suspension. may or may not be executed.

In addition, even when a fake big hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern “53H” in FIG. 67) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to run the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if the time-saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect type pattern "05H" in FIG. 67) is executed in the first suspension, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second suspension. good too. This is because, even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine including a small win as a result of the special pattern win determination processing, even when the small win look-ahead performance is executed in the first suspension, the big win look-ahead performance or the time-saving hit look-ahead is performed in the second suspension. You may perform a performance. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is executed in the first reservation, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be performed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when the start information is suspended by winning the first start opening 120 during the execution of the jackpot-type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this suspension.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as “specific suspension” in the paragraph), and whether the look-ahead effect is executed or not performed for this specific suspension, the sub CPU 301 will be executed after the jackpot game state ends. , If it is not in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, a low-probability short-time game state), the jackpot display mode is derived, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific suspension after the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as "specific suspension" in the paragraph), even if this specific suspension is a suspension of "time saving hit", the main CPU 201, after the jackpot gaming state is over, will play a C time saving game based on "time saving hit". It may not be controlled by the state. For example, when the time-saving gaming state overlaps, it is a specification that does not execute multiple time-saving gaming states, and if it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead effect]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute a look-ahead effect using a pending image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

[1-10-1. Concrete example of big hit type look-ahead production form]
FIGS. 71(a) to 71(f) are examples of the read-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big-hit-type read-ahead effect patterns showing the possibility of a big win change. It is a figure which shows a process. 71(a) to 71(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H" or "78H" in FIG. The look-ahead effect pattern is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(f), in the display area 7a of the display device 7, a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas indicating whether reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Also, the 0th area 410 is an area indicating that information corresponding to the change is stored in the first sub-holding area (0).

In this embodiment, if any of the first sub-holding areas (1) to (4) holds hold information, the sub CPU 301 stores the holding information corresponding to the first sub-holding area where the hold information is stored. Areas 411 to 414 are displayed as reserved images indicated by triangles (hereinafter simply referred to as "held images"). Further, when the reservation information is not stored in the sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301 displays only the frame of the reservation area without displaying the reservation image.

In FIG. 71(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving areas (1) to (3) and no pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (4).

In FIG. 71(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 71(a). This indicates that the reservation information is newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 71(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved images shown in the first to fourth reserved areas 411 to 414 differently according to the expected value for the big hit. In this embodiment, except for the rainbow, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 71(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first to third reserved areas 411 to 413 is white, and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is blue ( Expected value level "1").

FIG. 71(c) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 71(b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , a change from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reservation area 413 .

FIG. 71(d) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 71(c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 71(e) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 71(d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 71(f) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 71(e), and the color of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the pending image indicating the expected value for the big hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the variation ends). You may change during the variable display of the special pattern of a fluctuation|variation.

[1-10-2. Concrete example of time-saving hit system look-ahead production form]
Figure 72 (a) ~ Figure 72 (f) is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit system It is a figure which shows the process which changes. 72(a) to 72(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in FIG. The look-ahead effect pattern is omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 72(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 72(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 72(a). Sub CPU301, as described above, displays the form (for example, shape) of the pending image shown in the first to fourth pending areas 411 to 414 differently depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big win is represented by the color of the pending image, and the expected value for the time saving win is represented by the shape of the pending image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 72(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first to third reserved areas 411 to 413 is a triangle, and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is a square ( Expected value level "1").

FIG. 72(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413. FIG.

FIG. 72(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412. FIG.

FIG. 72(e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 72(f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 72(e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

It should be noted that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for the time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star", for example, change to "pentagon → circle" You may let

In addition, the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for the time saving per (expected value level) is not necessarily changed when the pending shifts (when the variable display of the special pattern of the variation ends), for example, You may change during the variable display of the special design of the said fluctuation|variation.

[1-10-3. Specific example of common look-ahead effect form]
FIGS. 73(a) to 73(f) are examples of the look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which a pending|holding image changes from the look-ahead production form to a big-hit type look-ahead production form. The changes in the common win look-ahead presentation form include those in which the expected value of the win changes and those in which it is clear whether the type of win is a big win or a short-time win. 73(a) to 73(f) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. It corresponds to "43H".

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit as a common hit look-ahead production form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit It represents

In FIG. 73 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 73(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 73(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). . In this embodiment, if the look-ahead effect is not executed or if the expected value for winning is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow The expected value for short hits increases in the order of "star".

In this embodiment, in FIG. 73(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 412 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle, and the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 73(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 73(b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 73(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 73(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , When shifted to the first reservation area 411, from the green hexagon (common prefetch effect form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit prefetch effect form of expected value level "5") It is an image showing that it has changed.

That is, the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 73 (b) and FIG. 3 (c), whether the form of the pending image is a form showing the expected value for the big hit or a form showing the expected value for the time saving hit, the pending image It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 73(d), the form of the pending image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

Thus, in this embodiment, according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect is a big-hit look-ahead effect showing the expected value for the big hit, a time-saving look-ahead effect showing the expected value for the time-saving hit, and a hit. It is configured to be able to execute one of the common look-ahead effects showing the expected value for (jackpot or time-saving hit). Then, when the common winning look-ahead performance form is executed, the player can be entertained by whether it will change to the big-hit look-ahead performance form or the time-saving look-ahead look-ahead performance form. can be increased.

In addition, the form of the pending image showing the expected value for time saving does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star” Instead, for example, it may be changed to “yellow pentagon (common hit look-ahead production form) → red triangle (jackpot system look-ahead production form)”, or “green hexagon (common hit look-ahead production form) → triangle It may be changed to "star (time-saving hit system look-ahead production form)". In addition, it is not always necessary to start the form of the pending image showing the expected value for the win from the blue square with the lowest expected value, and for example, it may be started from the red circle.

In addition, the form of the hold image indicating the expected value for the hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the hold shifts (when the variable display of the special symbol of the variation ends), for example, the special symbol of the variation It may be changed during variable display.

[1-10-4. Modified example of common look-ahead effect form]
In addition, the common hit look-ahead production form indicating that there is a possibility for both the jackpot and the time saving hit is necessarily in the form of both the color indicating the expected value for the jackpot and the shape indicating the expected value for the time saving hit Not limited. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form may be provided. When a dedicated common hit look-ahead production form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both the big hit and the time-saving hit, and since the expected value of each is unknown, expectations are expected for future changes in the production mode. It becomes possible to play the game with feeling, and the interest can be improved.

FIGS. 74(a) to 74(f) show an example of a prefetch effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a pending image is changed from a dedicated common win prefetch effect form to a big hit prefetch effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. 74(a) to 74(f) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. It corresponds to "31H".

Also, FIGS. 75(a) to 75(f) are an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from a dedicated common hit look-ahead effect form to a time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a process of changing a reserved image; 75(a) to 75(f) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H" or "63H" in FIG. It corresponds to "31H" in FIG.

In Figure 74 (a) and Figure 75 (a), a normal pending image is displayed in the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412, the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third pending area 413 and the No reserved image is displayed in the 4 reserved area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 74(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 74(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 75(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 75(a).

In both FIG. 74(b) and FIG. 75(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common prefetch effect form, such as a glittering form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 74(c) is an image in which the pending state is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. This is an image showing that the rendering mode has been shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 75(c) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 75(b), and the dedicated It is an image showing that the common prefetch effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

FIG. 74(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 74(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , when shifted to the first reservation area 411, it is an image showing that the dedicated common system look-ahead effect mode has changed to a red triangle (big hit expected value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 75(d) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 75(c), and in FIG. When the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it is an image showing that it has changed from the dedicated common system look-ahead effect form to a white circle (expected value level "4" per time saving).

In this way, even when the look-ahead performance form is represented by the dedicated common hit look-ahead performance form, the dedicated common hit look-ahead performance form can be changed to either the big hit look-ahead performance form or the time-saving hit look-ahead performance form. It is possible to make the player have interest in seeing how things are changing, and to increase interest in the game.

[1-11. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), since hitting to the right is a regular game mode, the game to the second start port 140A, 140B A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting opening, the first special symbol is in any one of the normal game state, the high probability short working hours game state and the low certainty short working hours game state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed one.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency in which the second start opening 140B is in the open state in the high-probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state Therefore, if the small-hit large winning opening 151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win the small-hitting big winning opening 151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win the second starting port 140A. When the game ball wins in the second starting ports 140A and 140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximate) Not only the display mode is derived, but also super-speed fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 15 (B)). The winning frequency of the game ball into the big winning opening 151 for winning is increased compared with other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability short working hours game state, low probability short working hours game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high accuracy time saving game state, low accuracy time saving game state), the second start port 140B is opened by executing the electric sapo control, and is struck to the right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b end up winning the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 107a enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. Of the game balls distributed to the path 107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. Thus, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) to be paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passage gate 126 and the normal symbol hit is displayed in a stop display mode. When pulled out, the normal electric accessory 146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small winning big winning opening 151 is opened by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 140B. However, in the normal game state, since the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 15A), it is assumed that the second start ports 140A and 140B are used for the game. Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[1-12. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8 ”, “prize information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 76 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 76, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 77 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 77, a payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the big winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big winning or big winning opening 151 for small winning (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes are awarded. When the ball is paid out and the game ball wins the starting port (first starting port 120 or second starting port 140A (both see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out, and the general winning port When a game ball wins at 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for, for example, 120 msec at the timing when the tenth prize ball payout detection switch is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Information 1” signal is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal each time 10 prize balls are dispensed or outputting it for 120 msec is just an example, and the output timing and output time of the "prize ball information 1" signal can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 78 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko game machine. FIG. 78 is a table showing release triggers at , output times of "security" signals (illustrated as "security signals" in FIG. 78), and remarks;

The outline of errors shown in FIG. 78 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors. For example, errors not shown in FIG. 78 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Errors that are not shown in FIG. 78 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or longer, a big winning opening (big win jackpot) If there is a game ball that has not been ejected inside the winning hole 131 or the big winning hole 151 for small winning (both see FIG. 4), or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, the big winning hole is entered. Examples include abnormal discharge errors, vibration sensor errors when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined period of time, and the like. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening 131 for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big hit game control is finished. In some cases, it is determined as an error when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball in the big winning prize opening 131, or when there is no game ball passing through the specific area. It is preferable to configure to

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection information executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where an abnormal winning error occurs in the big winning opening for big winning.

As shown in FIG. 78, for example, when the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) detects a win before the first big win big win opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened after the initial power is turned on, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) judges that an abnormal winning error has occurred, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for a big win, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a big winning opening abnormal winning error."
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a table showing an example of signals output according to the game state in the first pachinko game machine. In FIG. 79, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 79, in this embodiment, different signals are output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) Signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are outputted during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big win and during the small win).

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (for example, (not shown)) can grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is sent.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state other than). Similarly, the signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), The signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the high-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and the small hit game The signal output during the control process (during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in a pachinko gaming machine to which external information is sent. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small-win game control process different from the signal output when the small-win game control process is not being performed, the small-win game machine to which the external information is transmitted can achieve a small win. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed out of the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko machine differs from the first pachinko machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. . Therefore, the game board unit and electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 81) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (for example, , Hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 81) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

By the way, as a pachinko machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the variable display of is suspended; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is satisfied in the order of winning, including the first starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol are being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, and the starting condition of the second special symbol is the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not in variable display, not in a jackpot game state, etc., and when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, etc.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and , that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol, is established when at least all are satisfied, and the starting condition of the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are It is established when at least all of the conditions that variable display is not being performed, that the variable display of the second special pattern is suspended, and that the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the second special pattern are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) as in the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 80 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 1010, a game area 1105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 80, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a main center accessory 1115, first starting port 1120, general prize winning port 1122, passage gate unit 1125, special electric accessory unit 1130, second starting port 1140, and normal electric accessory unit 1145, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 81 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 1120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 81 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 1120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 81 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 81 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 81 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 81 to be described later), which is arranged in the right area 1107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can pass through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 1125 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric role product unit 1130 integrates a big winning hole 1131, a count switch 1132 (see FIG. 81 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning hole 1131, and a special electric role product 1133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107 .

The big winning opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 1131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played in the upper part of the center accessory 1115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 1131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when controlled to a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is detected by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 81 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 81 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the large winning opening 1131 or is easily open, and cannot enter (pass through) a game ball into the large winning opening 1131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. state.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 1140 is arranged in the left region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120). However, the second starting port 1140 is difficult or impossible to win a game ball hit to the left due to, for example, a game nail, etc., so that the game ball hit to the right can win is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, it is not essential to configure the second starting port 1140 as described above, and it may be provided in the right region 1107 so that, for example, a right-handed game ball can win. In addition, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, it is detected by a second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 81 described later). When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 81 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the starting condition is established. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left area 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 1120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole to which a game ball enters, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146 . In the present embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147 called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 81 described later) for operating the general electric movable member 1147 . Ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, ordinary electric movable member 1147, is an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 1140, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 1140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. Note that instead of the general electric movable member 1147, which is a so-called electric chew, for example, a shutter that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction may be employed.

(out port)
The out port 1178 is shot toward the game area 1105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140, the big winning port 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, so as to discharge the game balls flowing down the game area 1105 to the outside of the machine. can be

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 1100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007 and has a group 1058 of performance characters such as movable characters controlled by the sub-control circuit 1300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 81, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 81 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 81, the second pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 1300 , a payout/fire control circuit 1400 , and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 1206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165, a 2 special symbol holding display portion 1166, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuitry 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of, for example, a pachinko game machine with a setting function. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 1200 are a first starter switch 1121, a second starter switch 1141, a passage gate switch 1127, a count switch 1132, a general winning switch 1123, and the like. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 1184, setting key 1174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 1203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. When the notch is provided and the key managed by the person in charge of the game hall is used to rotate the pachinko game machine from the island facility to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 .

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a character control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 . Although not shown in FIG. 81, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role item control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. , a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described. The second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 1201 can progress the game in any one of these game states.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state, the right-handed hit is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a hitting method that is considered to be a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 1007 .

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 82 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random number obtained when the game ball wins in the start ports 1120 and 1140. , a table to be referred to when determining a "big hit" or "losing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery target is "time saving hit", "big hit" and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 1120 or / and When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit" or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random number in the special symbol win determination process. In the special symbol hit determination table, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range of random number values for big hit determination determined as "time saving hit" for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) The relationship between (width) and the corresponding time-saving hit judgment value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as the "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and " The relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is stipulated.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 is determined as "time saving hit", and determines the determination value data as "time saving hit determination value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines "big hit". , and the determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing". , and the determination value data is determined to be "loss determination value data".

Also, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 0 to 409, the main CPU 1201 It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 410 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines "big hit". , and the determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines "losing". , and the determination value data is determined to be "loss determination value data".

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 83 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball wins the starting ports 1120, 1140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 83, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 outputs the selected symbol command as Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 outputs the selected symbol command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA9" as the design designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12) is stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 as in the first pachinko game machine. . The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 (see FIG. 81) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a design command. In addition, as in the first pachinko game machine, the special symbol display units 163 and 164 display the time-saving winning display mode, the big winning display mode, or the losing display mode based on the result of the special symbol winning determination process. derived.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 84 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state in accordance with the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, so the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected pattern command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", since it is not controlled to the big win game state, the mode of the big win game state is not determined.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high-probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In some cases, although the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164, the high-precision game state is continued without controlling to the C time-saving game state. You may do so. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly changed to a special symbol. The information may be led out to display units 1163 and 1164 . Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving hit decision value data is not assigned to the big hit decision random number value, that is, the winning decision process not including the "time saving hit" in the lottery result may be performed. .

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot gaming state, It is decided to set both the flags and to ON, and to set the probability variable number of times to 10000 times. In this case, after the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164, after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 1201 can be controlled to the high-accuracy time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the big win gaming state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the variable probability number and the time saving number are both set to 10000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163, then controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, can control to the high-accuracy short-time game state. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 200 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 300 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 1164, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is also the A time saving game state.

In addition, it is preferable that the time saving performance in the high probability time saving game state is the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 1201 changes the mode of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 84.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Win/lose determination value data is determined based on the random number value (win/lose determination is performed), and win/lose (“time-saving hit”, “big hit” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. Based on the value data, the selected symbol command is determined, and the type of display mode (type of time-saving hit or big hit) derived to the special symbol display portions 1163 and 1164 is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, despite winning the "jackpot", it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of not winning the "jackpot" (the case of winning the "shorter working hours") becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time-saving gaming state higher than the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state You may make it higher than an expected value. Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 85 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the second pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the "remarks" column in FIG. 85 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and determines the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 85, the variation pattern of the special symbols includes the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (hit or lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random number value, or/ And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 1201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

It should be noted that the time-saving per system reach A, B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 012-3), normal symbol A determination table (see FIG. 18), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 19), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 20) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 81) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 53, Fig. 94), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 86, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S1002 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S1004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S1004), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S1004 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 advances the processing to S1005. to

Returning to S1003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S1003 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process of Move to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 1120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second start port 1140 .

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol if the determination is YES in S1003 of the special symbol control process, and the first special symbol if the determination is YES in S1004 of the special symbol control process. It is subject to processing.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 87 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S1011).

If it is determined in S1011 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86). .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S1011 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1013. It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1013 based on the control state number read in the process of S1012.

At S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1014.

At S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1015.

At S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S1015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1016.

At S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S1016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1017.

At S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S1017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this big winning hole opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S1018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 88, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S1021 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.

At S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 82) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. After executing the process of S1023, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

At S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result (for example, a big hit or a loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 83) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1024, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 84) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of winning types, a plurality of losing types may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023), the random number for reach determination or/and the random number for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S1026, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S1027, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

At S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 87 S1014) is performed. After executing the process of S1028, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1029.

At S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1029, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1030.

At S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1030, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1031.

At S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S1030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1031)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

If it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1041), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1041), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S1042, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1043.

At S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1043, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1044.

At S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, the symbol determination number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol determinations (the number of executions of the special symbol game), but for example, the probability variation remaining number and time saving The number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of games, may be managed. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 87). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S1051 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S1052), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 80 for both) via external terminal board 1184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S1053, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 1131 (S1055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S1057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S1058), and transmission reservation processing (S1059) of the big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S1057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 87 S1016) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

Returning to S1052, if it is determined in S1052 that the stopped special symbol is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO in S1052), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1061). The details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko game machine, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1061, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

At S1063, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1064). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87) as described above.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1016 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of a big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S1071 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1072, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S1073 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1077.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S1074) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 87 S1018) is performed. After executing the process of S1074, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

At S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S1076). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S1077, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1078.

At S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 1131, the number of winning balls when winning the large winning opening 1131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 1131 . It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1078, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1079.

At S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process of S1079, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1080.

At S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1080) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S1017 in FIG. 87) is performed. After executing the process of S1080, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1081.

At S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1081, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the big winning hole opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

If it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S1091), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 87).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S1091 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 80) for counting the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

When it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S1092), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S1092 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 1131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 92) has passed.

When it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 87).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 1131 has elapsed (YES in S1093), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

At S<b>1094 , the main CPU 1201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 1131 . After executing the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1095.

At S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1095) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S1016 in FIG. 87) will be performed. After executing the process of S1095, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1096.

At S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1096, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 87) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S1101), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 86).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S1101 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning mouth winning counter, etc.) Set the value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

At S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 91 is performed. After executing the processing of S1103, the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing, terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 87), and returns to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 86). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine is a sequential variation machine that does not variably display the first special symbols and the second special symbols in parallel, but variably displays them in order of winning. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the priority change machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 96) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (for example, , Hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko game machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 95 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 95, the game board unit 2010 is mainly composed of a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and a guide rail 2110, and a guide rail 2110 and a guide rail 2110, center accessory 2115, first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140, general prize winning port 2122, passage gate unit 2125, special electric accessory unit 2130, and ordinary electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 2110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 2006 (see FIG. 96 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 2118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 2120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 96 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win in the first starting port 2120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 96 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 96 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by a general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 96 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 96 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right area 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 96, which will be described later), and is arranged in the right region 2107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 2125, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 2125 may be located in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 96 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that makes it possible.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right region 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a normal electric shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal electric solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 96 to be described later) that operates the normal electric shutter 2147 . The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the normal electric shutter 2147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 2140 or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 2140. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. Attacker count switch 2153, V winning port 2155 through which game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 are V A V winning opening switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball has entered (passed through) a winning opening 2155, and a game ball that has entered the interior of the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning opening 2151 but has not entered the V winning opening 2155. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a V winning. A locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls entered inside the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that the later-described "accessory hit" is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( 96, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and performs the functions of the main CPU 2201. The value of the V Attacker Winning Counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 2152 to open or close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) for opening the opening/closing winning port 2151 has not elapsed. Mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 96) detects that a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V-attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 continues the opening control of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, not limited to this, for example, when controlled to the big win game state through the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a large winning opening A round game may be executed to move 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), the V winning opening and the big hit game The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball enters the V prize opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. enters, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

V-shutter 2158 operates a V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 96, which will be described later) to operate a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through V-winning opening 2155, and a game ball opening to V-winning opening 2155. A constant movement is always performed between the open mode in which the ball can (or easily) pass through. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155 and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 . A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is ejected out of the machine through the loss port 2157 . Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

In addition, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it passes through the losing opening 2157 . In addition, without providing the locking member 2160 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the machines to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 96 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 96, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls a main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game, and effects according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I/O port 2205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 2165, a 2 Special symbol reserved display portion 2166, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, and V shutter solenoid 2159 are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuitry 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starter switch 2121, a second starter switch 2141, a pass gate switch 2127, a big prize draw count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V win drawer switch 2156, and a general switch. A winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 2174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 2203 can be transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the person in charge of the game hall to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 .

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a character control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 . Although not shown in FIG. 96, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data relating to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands transmitted from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display a hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007 .

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 97 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 97, when a game ball wins (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number value. Then, the result of the lottery is determined as "time-saving hit", "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes through) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the lottery result based on the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol big hit determination random number value. , "time saving hit", "jackpot" or "accessory release hit".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120 include "time saving hit", "big hit ” Or the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as “losing”, and the judgment value data corresponding to it (“time saving judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data”) relationship is stipulated. In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, the big hit determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "accessory open hit" The range (width) of the random number for judgment and the relationship between the judgment value data corresponding to it ("time reduction hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "accessory open hit judgment value data") are stipulated. there is

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 98 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball wins the starting ports 2120 and 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 98, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, for example. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 outputs the selected symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory release hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 99 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. In the jackpot type determination table, the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the aspect of the subsequent game state (more specifically, the It is referred to when determining time saving flag and time saving end condition). The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state. "L" shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 99 indicates the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 99 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 and determines not to set the time saving flag to ON. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time saving flag is set on, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory released", if the big win game state is not controlled through the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big win game state. Not only does it not, the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing the control based on the winning of the opening of the role, the game state immediately before the opening of the role is restored.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines whether the jackpot game state mode and the subsequent game state mode are selected. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the aspect of the jackpot game state and the aspect of the subsequent game state as described above Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 99.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 99 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this, different conditions may be used. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B Only one of the time saving game state and the C time saving game state may be different. Also, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. , A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state may be changed only in one of the time saving game state. That is, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to at least one of the A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state, and C time reduction game state. You may make it differ in a game state.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 100 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the column of "remarks" in FIG. 100 is shown for the sake of convenience so that it is easy to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 100, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first start port 2120, and determines the first special symbol variation pattern when the game ball wins the second start port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 100, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the first start port 2120 when the game ball wins. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection acquired when (passing).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 acquires the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the value of the time saving flag, the game ball entering the first start port 2120 (passing ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection obtained when the It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, since hitting to the right is the normal game mode, it is considered that the game ball rarely enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second start port 2140. It is determined based on the obtained random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect obtained when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection acquired when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 17) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 18), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 19), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 20) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 95) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 53, Fig. 111), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 101, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2002), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S2002 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2003), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2004), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2005. to

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S2003 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process of Move to S2005.

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 21 to 24).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S2003 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES, and the first special symbol is processed when S2004 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES. It is subject to processing.

Also, the numbers (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 102 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

At S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The processing of this S2015 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The processing of this S2016 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 . If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 . If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. The processing of this S2020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S2021 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 97) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a prize release hit. In addition, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. Similarly, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 98) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a winning (time-saving winning, big winning, accessor product opening winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 99) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, a prize-opening hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the prize-opening hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and accessory-opening wins. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and/or prize release wins, a plurality of losing types may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 100), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random number or / and effect selection A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 100) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 102) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 102) is performed after the completion of the special symbol variable display end process. becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 102 reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96 for both) via external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058), and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a win, ie, that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol is a winning prize, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the winning prize (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2061. to

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting a winning winning prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing for setting a game state designation parameter (S2065). ), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the per-accessory-per-release start display command. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 102) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). In the third pachinko game machine, which is called a 1-type and 2-type mixture machine, the processing is not exactly the same as the processing described with reference to FIGS. . Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on. In the pachinko game machine of No. 3, it is not controlled to a high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value different in Also, in the first pachinko game machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 40), after determining whether the probability variation flag is off (see S221), the process of S221 is performed. In the pachinko game machine No. 3, since it is not controlled to the high accuracy game state as described above, the processing of S222 is performed without performing the processing of S221. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

At S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102) as described above.

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S2081 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the processing (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 102) can be performed after the V winning device opening preparation processing ends. will be performed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S2091 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 96) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. be done. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 2151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 107) has passed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

At S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V prize detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the interior of the V winning device 2150. The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, V hit signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 96 for both) via external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 99), so that the player can confirm that the jackpot game control process has been executed. You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, the V-per-game control executed by determining that there was a V winning prize detection (S2095 was determined YES) will be started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of operations of the V attacker 2152) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), and the V hit start display command transmission reservation process (S2103). In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that no V winning has been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S2111 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S2113 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". In this way, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 102) is performed after the end of the big winning opening preparation process. It will happen. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S2116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 105 is determined YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the winning prize, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the prize is derived (S2060 in FIG. 105 is determined YES), and the V prize is detected (Fig. 108 S2095 is determined YES), V winning device 2150 (that is, opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as a large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the processing (S2121) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of the preparation processing for opening the large winning opening, the large winning opening opening control processing (see S2019 in FIG. 102). will be performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 102).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when S2131 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 96) that counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 96) is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2132), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 109) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S<b>2134 , the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 . After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 102) is performed again. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 56) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO determination in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 101). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning mouth winning counter, etc.) Set the value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 102), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 101). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described below. This fourth pachinko game machine is a game machine equipped with a small winning rush, and like the first pachinko game machine, the pachinko game machine is capable of variably displaying first special symbols and second special symbols in parallel. is. However, the fourth pachinko game machine is a so-called ST machine that shifts to a normal game state even if it is not controlled to a jackpot game state when it is controlled to a high-precision game state over a specified number of times (for example, 120 times). be.

Hereinafter, in describing the fourth pachinko game machine, the description of points common to the first pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of this fourth pachinko game machine are the same as those of the first pachinko game machine.

Also, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[4-1. Configuration of game board unit]
FIG. 116 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 117 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko game machine. In FIGS. 116 and 117, not only the description but also the illustration of the reference numerals of the configuration common to the first pachinko game machine described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 6 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 116, the first starting port 4120 has a first starting port 4120A and a first starting port 4120B, unlike the first pachinko game machine.

The fourth pachinko game machine includes a first starter switch 4121A (see FIG. 117) that detects the passage of a game ball to the first starter 4120A, and a first starter switch 4121A that detects the passage of a game ball to the first starter 4120B. 1 starting switch 4121B (see FIG. 117).

When the game balls pass through the first starting port 4120A, for example, three game balls are paid out. When the game ball passes through the first starting port 4120B, for example, one game ball is paid out.

The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing.

The first starting port 4120B is arranged, for example, below the first starting port 4120A, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing.

Incidentally, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the normal electric accessory 4146 is arranged, for example, below the first starting port 4120A. Ordinary electric accessory 4146 operates a movable member 4147 called a so-called electric chew, so that the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first start port 4120B is possible or easy, and the first start port 4120B A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize, and a state transition to the closed state are possible. The normal electric accessory 4146 in the fourth pachinko game machine is arranged below the first start port 4120A, and the winning port for which the ease of winning is changed by state transition is the first start port 4120B. Although it differs from the first pachinko game machine in some respects, the rest of the configuration and functions are the same as those of the first pachinko game machine, so the description is omitted here. In FIG. 116, the open state of the movable member 4147 is indicated by a dashed line, and the closed state of the movable member 4147 is indicated by a solid line.

The passage gate 4126 of the passage gate unit 4125 is not arranged in the right area 4107, but is arranged in the left area 4106 so that the left-handed game ball can pass through.

The passage gate 4126 may function as a trigger for activating the character product continuous actuating device in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine. A gate may be placed in the right region 4107 to trigger the activation of .

The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the normal electric accessory 4146, and it is possible to win a game ball regardless of whether it is hit left or right. The special electric accessory unit 4130 has a big winning prize opening 4131 and an opening/closing member 4134 that can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. , the right-handed game ball can win a prize in the big winning opening 4131 for big winning.

In the right region 4107, for example, two upper and lower flow paths 4107a and 4107b are formed as flow paths for a game ball struck to the right. In the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball is distributed to the upper flow path 4107a with a probability of about 1/3, and is configured to be distributed to the lower flow path 4107b with a probability of about 2/3. It is

The second starting port 4140 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 4107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a can win. Passage of the game ball to the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 117). In addition, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls that flow down the upper flow path 4107a will win the second starting port 4140.

As in the first pachinko game machine, the small winning unit 4150 has a large winning opening 4151 for small winning in the right region 4107 . This small winning big winning opening 4151 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 4107b can win a prize. The easiness of winning a prize is configured to be changeable. Incidentally, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole for small hit 4151 is, for example, 10, but is not limited to this.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 4131 for big winning and the big winning opening 4151 for small winning are separately provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 117, the fourth pachinko game machine has a main control circuit 4200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, as in the first pachinko game machine. A circuit 4300 and the like are provided.

[4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 118 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the first start ports 4120A and 4120B are displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started (that is, the first special It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 at maximum) until the symbol hit determination process is performed. Similarly, the various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 4140 are provided to the hit determination process of the second special symbol until the variable display of the second special symbol is started (that is, the second special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4).

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the big hit determination error obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 4120A, 4120B or the second start port 4140. It is a table referred to when determining a "time-saving win", a "minor win", a "big win" or a "loss" by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are "small hit", "big hit", and "losing". However, the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol may include "small hit", and the lottery mode in the hit determination process of the second special symbol may include "time saving hit". .

The random number value for judging a big hit is a random number value used in the process of judging a special symbol as in the case of the first pachinko game machine. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 4201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted big hit determination random number value in the first special symbol win determination process. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

Also, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines “small win”, “big win” or “losing” based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the variable probability flag, the range (width) of the random number value for determining the big hit determined as "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in both the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the probability that the big hit determination value data is extracted when the probability variation flag is off (jackpot probability) is 201 It is 1/200.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU4201, even if the probability variation flag is on, can be determined to be "time saving hit", but instead of this, if the value of the probability variation flag is on, "time saving hit" may be excluded from the lottery targets so as not to be determined as "working time saving".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but for example, in the high-probability-low base state "time-saving hit" is elected. If it is a specification to move to the base state, by not providing "time saving hit" in the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, it is substantially "time saving hit" in the high probability low base state You can choose not to win.

[4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 119 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 (see FIG. 117) provided in the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 4120A, 4120B or the second start port 4140 and the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected pattern command" and the "designated pattern command" that determine the. The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 119, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 determines the symbol random value of the first special symbol. , for example, one of "z0", "z1" and "z2" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs, for example, "z3" or "z4 ”, and select “zA2” or “zA3” as the design designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs a selected symbol command such as "z5 ”, and select “zA4” as the design designation command.

Also, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs a selected symbol command, for example, " "z6" is selected, and "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs, for example, "z7" or "z8" as the selected symbol command according to the symbol random number value of the second special symbol. ”, and select “zA6” or “zA7” as the design designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs a selected symbol command, for example, "z9 ”, and select “zA8” as the design designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the fourth pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 displays the first special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol stops. Part 4163 or second special symbol display portion 4164 (see FIG. 117) special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12) referred to when determining the special symbol stop mode according to the selected symbol command is stored.

[4-4. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 120 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine. In the fourth pachinko game machine, the game state is a low-probability low base state (normal game state), a low-probability high-base state (low-probability short-time game state), a high-probability high-base state (high-probability short-time game state), and It is controlled to one of the high-probability low base state (high-probability non-time-saving game state). Among these game states, in the low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, and high-probability-high base state, left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and the winning of the game ball to the first start ports 4120A and 4120B The game progresses based on this. In the high-probability-low base state, hitting to the right is the regular game mode, and the game progresses based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4140. - 特許庁

The winning type determination table is a winning game state mode and/or according to a selected symbol command determined corresponding to a special symbol random number value and a game state when the special symbol winning determination process is performed. and is referred to when determining the mode of the subsequent game state. The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 120 shows the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) or the mode of the smaller winning game state (more specifically, the number of times of opening). Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

(In case of short working hours)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving game state is determined as follows.

In the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", for example, the main CPU 4201 turns on only the time saving flag out of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Decide to set it to In addition, set the number of times of time saving to 1 time (if the selected pattern command is "z0"), 6 times (if the selected pattern command is "z1"), or 12 times (if the selected pattern command is "z2") decide to When the display mode per time saving is derived to the 1st special design display part 4163, it becomes possible to shift to the C time saving game state.

In addition, in the high-probability high base state or the high-probability low base state, even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. Therefore, in the high-probability-low base state or the high-probability-low base state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 does not shift to the C time saving gaming state, high Continue the low base state. In addition, in the high-probability-high base state or the high-probability-low base state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may not include "time saving hit".

(When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the A time-saving game state are determined as follows.

In the low-probability-low base state or high-probability-low base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 , as a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the variable probability flag out of the variable probability flag and the short time flag is set to ON, and the number of variable probability is set to 120. Decide to set the times. In this case, after the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, it controls to the big win game state, and after finishing this big win game state, it is possible to control to the high probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low-probability-high base state or high-probability-high base state, if the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high-probability big hit), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and determines to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is determined to set the probability variable number of times to 120 times and the time saving number of times to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, the main CPU 4201 controls to the big win game state, and after finishing this big win game state, it becomes controllable to the high probability/high base state.

In addition, in the low-probability base state, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 determines the winning game state. As a mode, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are not set to ON. In this case, after the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 4201 can control to the low probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, or high-probability-low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time-reduction flag to ON among the variable probability flag and the time-reduction flag as the mode of the subsequent game state. to decide. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 4201 can be controlled to the low probability high base state. Become.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit)
In the low-probability-low base state or high-probability-low base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 , as a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the variable probability flag out of the variable probability flag and the short time flag is set to ON, and the number of variable probability is set to 120. Decide to set the times. In this case, after the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, it controls to the big win game state, and after finishing this big win game state, it is possible to control to the high probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low probability high base state or high probability high base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high probability big hit), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and determines to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is determined to set the probability variable number of times to 120 times and the time saving number of times to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, the main CPU 4201 controls to the big win game state, and after finishing this big win game state, it becomes controllable to the high probability/high base state.

Also, in the low-probability-low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 will be in the winning gaming state. As a mode, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are not set to ON. In this case, after the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it can be controlled to the low probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, or high-probability-low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time-saving flag of the variable probability flag and the time-saving flag to ON as the mode of the subsequent game state. to decide. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, then controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 4201 can be controlled to the low probability high base state. Become.

(In the case of a small hit)
If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "small hit" (selected symbol command is "z6"), low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state, and high probability low In any of the base states, the main CPU 4201 determines the number of openings of the small winning big winning port 4151 (see FIG. 116) to be one as the mode of the small winning gaming state. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described small winning display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, then controls the small winning game state, and after the small winning game state ends, controls the small winning game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

(In case of loss)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z5" and "z9"), the main CPU 4201 determines the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent game state. None of the aspects of That is, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 4201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure It is illustrated at 120 .

[4-5. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start or the special symbol variation pattern table for high start. Since the special symbol variation pattern table for low start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 15, the description thereof is omitted. Similarly, since the variation pattern table of special symbols for high start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 16, description thereof is omitted.

In addition, in the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start. Determine the variation pattern of the special design. On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state in which right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

That is, in the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state, the operating frequency of the normal electric accessory 4146 is increased, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the first start port 4120B is increased. However, even in the low-probability-high base state or high-probability-high base state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start. Therefore, even if the game ball wins the second start port 4140 by hitting right in the low probability base state or the high probability base state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 15 ), the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time of approximately 600000 msec. In this regard, in the low probability high base state and high probability high base state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 140B is increased, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 16) is shown. This is different from the first pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short period of time such as 1000 msec, for example.

[4-6. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 121 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the normal symbol hit determination random value acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 116). It is a table referred to when determining "normal design per" or "losing" by lottery.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 extracts random numbers for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol win determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value. In the normal design hit determination table, the range (width) of the normal design hit determination random number value determined as "normal design hit" for each state (on / off) of the time saving flag and the normal design corresponding to this The relationship with hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random number value of normal symbols determined to be "losing" and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto are defined.

For example, in the low-base state (low-probability-low base state, high-probability-low base state) in which the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 4201 determines that the random number for the hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 94. In this case, it is determined as "normal design hit", and the hit-lose determination value data is determined as "normal design hit determination value data". In addition, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 95 to 98, the main CPU 4201 judges as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Also, for example, in the high-base state (low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state) in which the time-saving flag is on, the main CPU 4201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number is any of 0 to 98. In the case of , it is determined as "normal design hit", and the hit/lose determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". In addition, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 4201 judges as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

[4-7. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 122 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 4) and the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit" to be attached. "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The normal symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). In addition, in this embodiment, there is one type per normal symbol, but a plurality of types may be provided.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 122, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in the low base state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of normal symbol hit determination processing, the main CPU 4201, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 99, "fz0" is selected as a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the high base state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201, regardless of whether the normal symbol random number value is 0 to 99, "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

[4-8. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 123 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116), according to the normal per symbol selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Referenced when making decisions.

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz0", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116), to the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the ordinary electric accessory 4146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 116), to the first opening time of 2000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In this embodiment, there are two opening patterns for the normal electric accessory 4146, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, more opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be provided, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the time-saving game state, for example. In addition, a plurality of types of selected symbol commands may be further provided at the time of normal symbol winning, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the types of the selected symbol commands at the time of normal symbol winning, for example. Furthermore, according to the type of the time-saving gaming state and the type of the normal symbol-per-time selection symbol command, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined.

[4-9. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 124 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 4201 changes the normal symbol based on the state (on/off) of the time saving flag and the random number value for normal symbol effect selection acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 116). determine the pattern. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 124, in the low base state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500000 msec, regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99.

Also, in the high base state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are two patterns of the variable display time of normal symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, more patterns of variable display time of normal symbols may be provided, and the pattern of variable display time of normal symbols may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state, for example. In addition, a plurality of types of selected symbol commands may be provided at the time of normal winning, and the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbols may be determined according to the type of the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbols, for example. Furthermore, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbols may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state and the type of the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbols.
[4-10. Game flow]
FIG. 125 is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine.

First, the initial state at the time of shipment or after the RAM is cleared is the low-probability base state. The flow of the game will be described assuming that the game is started in this low-probability-low base state.

[4-10-1. Game in low probability low base state]
As described above, the low-probability-low base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the low-probability-low base state, the game is played so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first start ports 4120A and 4120B. Since the electric sapo control is not executed in the low probability base state, most of the games are based on the winning of the first start port 4120A. When a game ball wins in the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs hit determination processing for the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then ends the low probability low base state. and move to the low definite high base state. The winning probability of "time saving hit" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. 1, 6, or 12 times as appropriate.

Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", as shown in FIG. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 201 controls the big win game state over four rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Move to high probability low base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "big win" and the type of big win is a low-probability big win, the main CPU 201 controls the big win game state over four rounds, and ends the big win game state. After that, control to the low probability and low base again.

Thus, in the low-probability-low base state, based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, it is configured not to shift to the high-probability-high base state.

[4-10-2. Game in the low certainty base state]
As described above, the low probability high base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the low probability height base state, the game is played so that the game balls shot toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first start ports 4120A and 4120B. Especially in the low certainty high base state, since the electric support control is executed, most of the games are based on the winning of the first start port 4120B. When a game ball wins in the first start openings 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs hit determination processing for the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then continues the low probability high base state. do. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low certainty-high base state is C time-saving gaming state. In addition, the winning probability of "time reduction hit" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. It should be noted that, if elected in the "time saving hit" in the low probability high base state, the time saving gaming state will overlap unless the time saving final variation. In this case, the concept of the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability-high base state (that is, the number of times of time saving) is as described above in the column of "duplication of time saving gaming state". For example, if the time-saving gaming state is superimposed and executed, the main CPU 4201 has the higher number of the time-saving remaining times in the low probability high base state and the time-saving number of times set based on the "time-saving hit". Continue the low-definite-high base state until the number of time reductions on the other side is digested. On the other hand, if the time-saving gaming state is not superimposed, the main CPU 4201 continues the low-probability-high base state until the remaining number of time-savings in the low-probability-high base state is exhausted.

Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", as shown in FIG. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 201 controls the big win game state over four rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Move to high accuracy high base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "big win" and the type of big win is a low-probability big win, the main CPU 201 controls the big win game state over four rounds, and ends the big win game state. After that, control to the low probability height base again. It should be noted that the type of time-saving gaming state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the set number of time reductions is completed without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 terminates the low-probability-high base state and shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

Acquired based on the winning probability of "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the number of time saving times set when winning "time saving hit", and the winning of the game ball to the first start port 4120A, 4120B Considering the number of random numbers that can be reserved, among the low probability base state, low probability base state, high probability base state and high probability base state, the retention rate of the low probability base state is the highest. get higher

[4-10-3. Game in high accuracy high base state]
As described above, the high-probability-high base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the high-probability-high base state, the game is played so that the game ball shot toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first start ports 4120A and 4120B. In particular, since electric sapo control is executed in a high-probability-high-base state, most of the games are based on winnings to the first starting port 4120B. When a game ball wins in the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs hit determination processing for the first special symbol.

In the high probability high base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, The high probability high base state up to now is continued without activating the new C time-saving game state. Therefore, the time saving game state does not overlap. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 forces the "time saving hit" to lose, and the display mode of losing is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. may be made.

When the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 119, 87% is a high probability big hit (selected symbol command is "z3"), The selected pattern command is "z4").

When the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Control to the high-precision high-base state again. In addition, the type of the time saving game state in this high probability high base state is the A time saving game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "big win" and the type of big win is a low-probability big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and ends the big win game state. After that, move to the low probability high base state. It should be noted that the type of time-saving gaming state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the set number of times of time saving is consumed without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 terminates the high-probability/high-base state and shifts to the high-probability/low-base state. In this embodiment, when the high-probability jackpot is won in the low-probability-high base state, and when the high-probability-high base state is elected in the high-probability-high base state, control is performed to the high-probability-high base state. In this case, the set number of times of time saving is 50 times. On the other hand, the set probability variation number is 120 times. Therefore, the number of probability variations remaining after the number of times of time saving is digested (for example, 70 times in this embodiment) will be controlled to the high-probability-low base state.

[4-10-4. Game in high accuracy and low base state]
As described above, the high-probability-low base state is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal. Therefore, in the high-probability-low base state, the game is played so that the game ball shot toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the second start port 4140 . When the game ball wins in the second starting port 4140, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the second special symbol.

In the hit determination process of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 118, there is no chance of winning the "time saving hit". In addition, assuming that the first special symbol hit determination process is performed by the game ball winning the first start port 4120A, 4120B, and the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". Also, the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving win" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, but continues the high probability low base state without activating the C time saving gaming state. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 forces the "time saving hit" to lose, and the display mode of losing is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. may be made.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", as shown in FIG. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z8").

If the result of the second special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 10 rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Control to high probability low base state again. That is, the high probability low base state is looped.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state over 10 rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, shift to a low-probability base.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "small win", as shown in FIG. 119, the small win big winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 116) is opened once. The probability of winning a "small hit" is, for example, approximately 1/1.1, as shown in FIG. Although not shown, the opening time of the small winning big winning opening 4151 in this case is, for example, 1800 msec.

In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, as described above, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start. Therefore, considering the probability of being distributed to the upper flow path 4107a (see FIG. 116) and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 4151 (see FIG. 116) for small hits, etc. Hitting to the right in the low-probability base state results in a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out per unit time is greater than 1. That is, in the high-probability-low base state, the so-called possession balls of the player can increase as the game progresses. In addition, as described above, if it is a specification that shifts to a high-probability high-base state when winning "time-saving hit" in a high-probability-low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time-saving hit By not providing ", it is possible to avoid winning substantially "time saving hit" in the high-probability-low base state.

On the other hand, in the low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, and high-probability-high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, a prize number of balls, etc.) is less than 1. That is, in these game states (low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state), the so-called holding ball of the player decreases according to the progress of the game. In these game states, even if the game is played in an irregular game mode (for example, hitting to the right) and the game ball wins the second start port 4140, the special symbol variation pattern table for low start is referred to. Since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by the number, there is no profit for the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the so-called ST machine that shifts to the normal game state when controlled to the high certainty game state over the specified number of times (for example, 120 times) was explained as an example, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol It may be possible to further increase the number of additional balls to be put out during the small winning rush by controlling the game to a high-probability gaming state until the result of the winning judgment processing becomes a big win.

[4-11. Control by sub-control circuit]
A sub CPU 4301 of the sub control circuit 4300 controls an effect image displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 via the display control circuit 4304 . In this fourth pachinko game machine, the sub CPU 4301 displays the same or substantially the same effect image in the display area of the display device 4007 in the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state. control so that By doing so, it is displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 which of the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state is controlled by the control by the main CPU 4201 It is possible to make it difficult to grasp from the appearance from the effect image.

In particular, in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit when the variable probability flag is on (for example, 1/200) and the probability of a big hit when the probability variable flag is off (for example, 201 minutes) are almost the same probability. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel the difference in the odds of winning the jackpot.

According to such a fourth pachinko game machine, the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state are set as relatively disadvantageous game states for the player, and the high-probability-low base state is set. A game state that is relatively advantageous for the player can be created. In particular, in the high-probability-low base state, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player increases the so-called possession balls by a small hit rush.

Further, in the case of the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the most disadvantageous game state among the plurality of game states has the highest retention rate. On the other hand, in the fourth pachinko game machine, among the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state, and high probability low base state, the probability variable flag is off and the electric support control Although the low-probability low base state in which the game is not executed is the most disadvantageous to the player, the stay rate is the highest in the low-probability high base state.

In addition, in the low-probability-low base state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit and the type of the jackpot is a high-probability big hit, the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state , and the high-probability-low base state, which is the most advantageous. Moreover, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the probability that the type of the big hit will be a high probability big hit is a high probability of about 87%. However, it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the low-probability-low base state, the "time-saving hit" is won in about 1/6, and the number of time-savings set in that case is in the range of 1 to 12 times, so the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability The main focus is on the gameplay of going back and forth between the high base state. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the player can proceed with the game in anticipation of transition to a low-probability-low base state in which the high-probability-low base state is ensured, thereby increasing interest. Become.

It should be noted that the sub-CPU 301 preferably performs a look-ahead effect in the above-described fourth pachinko game machine as well. An effect example of the look-ahead effect performed in the fourth pachinko game machine will be described later in association with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine was explained as an example of a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine. is not limited to For example, like the second pachinko machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them may be variably displayed. As with the third pachinko game machine, it may be applied to a pachinko game machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine.

[4-12. Example of look-ahead effect and variation pattern effect]
Next, in the fourth pachinko game machine, an example of the look-ahead effect performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 will be described in association with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation. The look-ahead effect performed in the display area 7a and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation are controlled by the sub CPU 301 via the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).

FIG. 126 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a diagram showing a process in which the pending image changes to 1, and then a big hit system ready-to-win is performed as a sub-fluctuation effect pattern. 126(a) to 126(f) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. It corresponds to "48H" in FIG. Also, as can be seen by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12), the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see FIG. 66), and the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table (see FIG. 67), The look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of a big hit are "15H" and "35H", and the look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of a loss are "51H" and "71H".

In FIG. 126 (a), in the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, a normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and in the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In this fourth pachinko game machine, the pending image is represented by an egg-like egg image in order to associate it with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation. Then, the color of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the big win, and the pattern density of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the time saving win.

In FIG. 126(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 126(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 413 is in the common hit look-ahead effect form and has the expected value level "2".

FIG. 126(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126(b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while the common system look-ahead effect form is maintained when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 126(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 126(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , is an image showing that, when shifted to the first reservation area 411, the common look-ahead performance form of expected value level "3" is changed to the big hit look-ahead performance form of expected value level "4".

FIG. 126(e) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that it has been shifted to the 0th area 410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 126(f) is an image showing that the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 126(f), when the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 hatches, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a big hit ready-to-win game. On the other hand, if the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a ready-to-win, and a losing image is displayed.

FIGS. 127(a) to (e) show that the egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 of FIG. 126(f) has hatched, and thus the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation has developed into a jackpot ready-to-win game. is an image showing.

FIG. 127(a) is an image showing that the decorative design corresponding to the main special design (here, the first special design) is variably displayed. FIG. 127(b) is an image showing that the decorative symbol has stopped at the ready-to-win symbol. FIG. 127(c) is a reach effect displayed with an image showing that the bird hatched from the egg in the 0th region 410 of FIG. 126(f) grows up and flaps its wings in the sky. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 126(c) is a ready-to-win effect with a relatively high expected value for a big win among a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 126(c) is performed, the interest of the player is heightened. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(d), when a big win image indicating that the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win is displayed, the game is controlled to a big win game state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126(e), when a loss image indicating that the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss is displayed, the current special symbol game ends.

FIG. 128 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a diagram showing a process in which the pending image is changed to a form, and then a time saving per performance is performed as a sub-fluctuation performance pattern. 128(a) to 128(f) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. It corresponds to "42H" in FIG. Also, as can be seen by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12), the look-ahead effect type pattern number determination table (see FIG. 66), and the look-ahead effect type pattern determination table (see FIG. 67), The look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of winning time are "07H" and "27H", and the look-ahead effect type patterns in the case of loss are "43H" and "63H".

In FIG. 128 (a), in the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, a normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and in the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 128(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 128(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 413 is in the common hit look-ahead effect form and has the expected value level "2".

FIG. 128(c) is an image in which suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128(b), and the form of the suspension image displayed in the third suspension area 413 in FIG. , the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while the common system look-ahead effect form is maintained when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 128(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 128(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , is an image showing that, when shifted to the first reservation area 411, the common look-ahead performance form of expected value level "3" is changed to the time saving look-ahead performance form of expected value level "4". Note that the egg image shown in FIG. 128(d) is an alligator egg image.

FIG. 128(e) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that it has been shifted to the 0th area 410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 128(f) is an image showing that the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 128(f), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 hatches, the variation production pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time saving winning production. On the other hand, if the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 does not hatch, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a time-saving winning system performance, and a losing image is displayed.

In addition, in the description referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (FIG. 12), when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it was explained that a time saving hit system reach is performed. In this fourth pachinko game machine, in place of the time-reduction winning type reach, the time-reduction winning performance with high expected value of the time-reduction winning is performed although the reach is not displayed so as to be easily distinguished from the big win.

129(a) to (e), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 410 of FIG. 128(f) is hatched, the variation production pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time-saving winning production. It is an image showing that

FIG. 129(a) is an image showing that the decorative pattern corresponding to the main special pattern (here, the first special pattern) is variably displayed, and an image of three crocodiles walking is shown. FIG. 129(b) is an image showing that the left decorative symbol has stopped at "5". In this embodiment, normally (other than the time-saving performance) the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, right, and middle, but when the time-saving performance develops, the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, middle, and right. It shall be. FIG. 129(c) is a diagram showing that the decorative pattern inside has stopped at "0". After that, as shown in FIG. 129(d), when the right decorative symbol stops at "G", it is clearly shown that the 50-game C time-saving game state is entered. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129(e), when the right decorative symbol stops at "X", it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, and the current special symbol game ends. do.

126(f) and 128(f), the images of hatching eggs are both displayed in the 0th region 410, but instead of this, for example, as shown in FIG. If the image hatching is displayed in the approximate center of the display area 7a of the display device 7, the variation production pattern corresponding to the variation may develop into a jackpot reach or a time-saving winning production. It is possible to clearly inform the player and increase interest.

[5. Fifth pachinko machine]
The fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the time saving management process (see FIGS. 34 to 42) of S161 described in the first pachinko game machine is also performed. Descriptions of the same configuration and functions as those of the first pachinko machine will be omitted. However, in explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals as those of the first pachinko game machine are used.

Further, the fifth pachinko game machine is controlled to a high-probability game state until the variation display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) after the jackpot game state ends, and the result of the special lottery is "big hit". It is a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine that is controlled to a low probability game state after the special symbols are varied and displayed a predetermined number of times (50 times) without becoming. In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the probability variation flag is set to ON until the jackpot game state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times) after the so-called first hit, and the jackpot game state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times). It is a pachinko game machine with a so-called limiter, in which the variable probability flag is set to OFF when it is done.

The fifth pachinko game machine has the same game board unit 10 (see FIG. 4) as the first pachinko game machine. As a result, when the special electric accessory 133 (the special electric shutter 134) is driven to open, the game ball can (or easily) enter the big winning opening 131 for a big hit, and if it is in an open state, the right region 107 flows down. Almost all of the game balls enter the big winning opening 131 for big winning. In the closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 131 for big win, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 does not enter the big winning hole 131 for big win and is further downstream. It flows down toward the normal electric accessory 146 on the side and the second starting port 140B.

If it is in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 131 for a big hit, and in an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 140B, Almost all of the game balls flowing down the right region 107 win the second starting port 140B. When both the big winning opening 131 for big winning and the second starting opening 140B are in a closed state, the game ball flowing down the right side region 107 is a big winning for small winning if the big winning opening for small winning 151 is open. Win 151 mouths. If all of the big winning opening 131 for big winning, the second starting opening 140B and the big winning opening 151 for small winning are closed, the majority (at least half or more) of the game balls flowing down the right area 107 are second It is configured to win at the starting port 140A.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, the main CPU 201 reserves up to four normal symbol starting information (random number for normal symbol per hit determination and normal symbol variation pattern determination random number). In addition, the main CPU 201 reserves up to four first special symbol starting information (random number for judging a big hit or random number of symbols) when a game ball wins in the first starting port 120. Even when a game ball wins in the starting port 140A or the second starting port 140B, up to four pieces of starting information (random number for judging a big hit or random number of symbols) of the second special symbol are reserved.

[5-1. Basic specifications of the pachinko machine related to the fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 136. FIG. Each table shown in FIGS. 131 to 136 is stored in the main ROM 202. FIG.

[5-1-1. Hit random number judgment table]
FIG. 131 is an example of the hit random number determination table of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 131, when the first special lottery is held, it is determined as a "big win" or "losing". Also, when the second special lottery is conducted, it is determined as a "big win", a "minor win", or a "loss". In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 202, the value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= OFF)" or For each "1 (=on)"), the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "big hit" or "losing", and the judgment value data corresponding to it ("big hit judging value data", "losing judgment value data"). In addition, as the data used in the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 140A or the second starting port 140B, the probability variable flag value ("0 (= OFF)" or "1 (= ON )”), the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as “big hit”, “small hit” or “losing”, and the judgment value data corresponding to it (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit judgment value data” and “loss judgment value data”).

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the total random number of the jackpot determination random numbers is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The big-hit probability is determined by the number of big-hit determination value data with respect to the total random numbers for big-hit determination, and the small-hit probability is determined by the number of small-hit determination value data with respect to the total random numbers for big-hit determination. It should be noted that the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probabilities and minor hit probabilities are shown as selection rates in FIG.

Although not shown in FIG. 131, the big win probability and the small win probability may differ for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[5-1-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 132 is an example of a special symbol determination table for pachinko gaming machines according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 132, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 120 or the second start port 140A, 140B. It is a table referred to for determining the "selected symbol command at the time of winning" and the "designated symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the random number value and the aforementioned determination value data. For example, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data" and the symbol random number value is "77", the selection symbol command at the time of winning is "z2", The "symbol designating command" is determined to be "zA4".

[5-1-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 133 is an example of a pachinko game machine jackpot type determination table relating to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 133, the jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type (the number of rounds, the probability variation flag) based on the above-described winning selection symbol command. For example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10" and the probability variation flag is set to ON.

Even if the selection pattern command at the time of winning is any of "z0" to "z2", if the big win game state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the probability is changed after the big win game state is completed. A flag is set to ON. However, after the first big win game state is over, the second special lottery is conducted because the game is played with the right hand. In this second special lottery, 10 rounds are performed with a probability of 10% when the big win is won. , with a 90% chance of being decided in two rounds.

Further, even if the winning selection symbol command is any one of "z0" to "z2", the electric sapo control is not executed (the number of times of the electric sapo is 0). That is, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth pachinko game machine is a game machine in which electric support control is not executed, but it is not limited to this. The electric support control is a control that enables (or facilitates) winning of game balls into the second starting port 140B. At least one of the number of times the normal electric accessory 146 is opened, the normal symbol fluctuation time, and the normal symbol per probability. It is control to change one or more so that winning to the second starting port 140B is possible (or easy). Therefore, when the electric support control is executed, the frequency of enabling (or facilitating) winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140B is increased.

[5-1-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 134 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start ports 140A, 140B. to decide.

As shown in FIG. 134, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the state of the probability variation flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the first start port 120 It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins the prize. In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is a loss, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the state of the variable probability flag, the random number for reach determination extracted when the game ball wins the first start port 120, and the effect It is determined based on random numbers for selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the state of the variable probability flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball is in the second start port 140A, 140B. It is determined based on the effect selection random number extracted when the prize is won. In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed for a long period of time, such as approximately 600000msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, reach during probability variation. One of the effects D to F is determined.

Even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the state of the variable probability flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball wins in the second start ports 140A and 140B. It is determined based on the effect selection random number extracted when the In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed for a long period of time, such as approximately 600000 msec. If the probability variation flag is ON, the variation time is It is determined to be a super speed variation in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed only for a very short time such as 1000 msec.

When the result of the second special lottery is a loss, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the state of the variable probability flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and when the game ball wins the second start port 140A, 140B It is determined based on the extracted reach determination random number (only when the probability variation flag is ON) and the effect selection random number. Especially if the probability variation flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed for a long period of time such as approximately 600000msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation is in progress. Although it may be determined to be a ready-to-win effect, most of the time, it is determined to be a super-speed variation in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec.

Since the special symbol variation time corresponds to the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 simultaneously determines the special symbol variation time and the special symbol variation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect contents (for example, the variation pattern of decorative symbols) displayed on the display device 7 (eg, liquid crystal display device) by the sub-control circuit 300 (sub CPU 301).

134 is for the sake of convenience, and the sub-CPU 301 displays the effect image (for example, a decorative pattern) on the display device 7 via the display control circuit 304. variation mode) and the contents of the sound (for example, the variation sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 32 via the sound control circuit 305 by the sub CPU 301 .

Although not shown in FIG. 134, the variation pattern (variation time) of the determined special symbol may be varied by changing the random number range for effect selection for each set value.

The variation time of the special symbol shown in FIG. 134 is an example, and any variation time can be appropriately set as the variation time of the special symbol according to the result of the special lottery. For example, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON, and the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to have the same fluctuation time (for example, 4500 ms). Further, it may be configured such that the variation time of the special symbol is the longest (for example, 299500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is OFF. In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON, the variation time of the special symbol may be set to a short time (for example, 2000 ms). In addition, the second special lottery result is a 2R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON, the special symbol variation time (for example, 4500 ms), and the second special lottery result is a 10R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON. The fluctuation time (for example, 29500 ms) of special symbols in a certain case is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time (for example, 2000 ms) of special symbols when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON. You may In addition, the variation time of the special symbol may be set to the shortest time (for example, 500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit and the probability variation flag is ON.

[5-1-5. Random number judgment table per normal symbol]
FIG. 135 is an example of a random number determination table per normal symbol of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 135, when the normal lottery is performed, it is determined as "normal symbol winning" or "losing". In the normal symbol per random number determination table stored in the main ROM 202, "normal symbol win" or "loss" is determined as data used in the normal lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126. The range (width) of the normal symbol per determination random number and the corresponding determination value data ("normal per symbol determination value data", "losing determination value data") are defined.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the total random number of the random numbers for normal per symbol determination is 1,024. That is, the random number for determining the normal per symbol is generated in the range (width) of 0-1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The normal per symbol probability is determined by the number of normal per symbol determination value data for the range of normal per symbol determination random numbers. In addition, the range (width) of the random numbers for normal per symbol determination may be changed as appropriate. The probability per normal symbol is shown as a selection rate in FIG. That is, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the result of the ordinary lottery is "losing" at a rate of about 1 out of 43 times. Of course, the selection rate shown in FIG. 135 is not limited to this, but it is preferable that the result of the ordinary lottery is "lost" about 30 to 50 times.

[5-1-6. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 136 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern by using the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol win, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (01H) with a variation time of 500 msec.

Further, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "losing", the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol differs in fluctuation time based on the random number for determining the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126. One of a plurality of variation patterns (02H to 05H) is determined. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is "losing" and the random number for determining the normal symbol variation pattern is a specific random number (98, 99), the normal symbol variation display is performed for an extremely long time, for example, 600000 msec. determined by the pattern.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 136, the random number range for normal symbol variation pattern determination is changed for each set value, and the probability that the above specific pattern is determined is higher in the high setting than in the low setting. Variation patterns of normal symbols determined for each set value may be different.

[5-2. Game flow]
A description will be given of the subsequent flow of the game when the game is started in the normal game state in which the variable probability flag is OFF. In addition, in the normal game state, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 134), the second special symbol variation pattern differs from the first special symbol variation pattern in that the variation time is extremely long. One of the variations A to C is determined. Therefore, in the normal game state, a general player plays the game with a left hand. When a game is played left-handed, the game ball shot toward the game area 105 can enter the first starting hole 120 instead of the second starting holes 140A and 140B.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 conducts a first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery is a "big win" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the winning random number determination table (see FIG. 131).

Even when the player hits to the right in the normal game state, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the passage gate 126 and the result of the normal symbol hit is obtained, the normal electric accessory 146 is activated. Although there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the second start port 140B after opening, only one prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the second start port 140B. Also, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140A without opening the normal electric accessory 146, only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball entering the second starting port 140A. Furthermore, when the game ball wins in the second start openings 140A and 140B, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in one of the long fluctuations A to C with an extremely long fluctuation time, so the big winning opening 151 for small wins is opened. The frequency of opening is extremely low. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when a game ball enters the second starting ports 140A, 140B. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 120 is approximately 10000 msec. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, the probability that the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol (the probability of opening the normal electric accessory 146) is high (see FIG. 135), and the normal lottery result is the normal symbol. Since the pattern variation time is relatively short (see FIG. 136), when the player hits to the right, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened to a considerable degree. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 126 has a high possibility of winning the second starting port 140B, and even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, it is distributed downstream of the second starting port 140B. A situation in which a game ball flows into the large winning hole 151 for a small hit is less likely to occur. Further, even if the result of the normal lottery is a loss in the normal game state and the normal electric accessory 146 is not opened, the variation time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small win. Since the length is extremely long, it is difficult to obtain a ball with a small hit.

The big winning opening opened at the time of the big win and the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning may be different big winning openings or may be the same big winning opening. Further, it is possible to appropriately design the arrangement positions of the big winning opening that opens when a big win and the big winning opening that opens when a small win occurs. For example, the big winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 146, and the big winning opening opened at the time of a big hit may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory 146.例文帳に追加Also, both the big winning opening opened at the time of the big win and the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 146 . Also, a large winning opening (also used as a large winning opening) opened at the time of a big win or a small win may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 146 . In addition, in the present embodiment, a game ball that did not enter the big winning opening that opens at the time of the small hit, a game ball that did not enter the big winning opening that opens at the time of the big winning, and a game ball that did not enter the second start opening 140B. A second starting port 140A (a starting port for special figure 2 in which normal electric accessories are not provided) is provided in which game balls or the like that were not there can win. The position of the second starting port 140A is downstream of the normal electric accessory 146 and downstream (lower) than the big winning port that opens when a small hit is made, or when the normal electric role 146 and a small hit are opened. It is possible to assume a gap between the big winning opening and the like. Even when such a second starting opening 140A is provided, it may be used both as a big winning opening opened at the time of a big win and a big winning opening opened at the time of a small winning. In addition, in a mode in which the big winning opening opened at the time of the big win is provided downstream from the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning, the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning and the opening at the time of the big winning. It is possible to assume a case where the second start opening 140A is arranged between the big winning opening and the case where the second starting opening 140A is arranged downstream of the big winning opening opened at the time of a big hit. is. In addition, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the special figure 2 starting port (second starting port 140B) is provided as the starting port provided with the normal electric accessory. As a starting port provided with, a starting port for special figure 1 may be arranged. For example, separately from the first starting port 120A (starting port for special figure 1 where normal electric accessories are not provided), first starting port 120B (starting for special figure 1 where normal electric accessories are provided) mouth) may be provided.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 132) to determine the winning selection symbol command. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 133), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined hit selection symbol command, and controls the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, since the big winning opening 131 for big winning is arranged in the right side area 107, in the big winning game state, the game is played with the right hand.

Next, the game state after the so-called first-hit-based jackpot game state is completed will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the electric sapo control is not executed, and when the so-called first-hit-based big-hit game state ends, the probability variation flag is always set to ON, so that the first-hit-based big-hit game state ends. After that, the main CPU 201 controls to the high-probability-low base state. In this high-probability-low base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-speed variation with a variation time of, for example, 1000 msec, which is extremely short. (See FIG. 134), and the game is played with the right hand.

In the high probability low base state after the end of the big win game state based on the first win, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super speed change with a high probability and the small win is derived, so that the big win for the small win. The mouth 151 is repeatedly opened at an extremely high frequency compared to the normal game state. However, when the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol per pattern, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern with a variation time of 500 msec. In addition, most of the right-handed game balls pass through the passage gate 126 and continuously hit normal symbols, so that the normal electric accessory 146 and the normal electric shutter 147 are almost fully opened. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high-probability-low base state is the normal symbol hit, all or substantially all of the game balls hit to the right win the second start hole 140B, so even if the small win big prize hole Even if 151 is opened at a high frequency, winning to the small winning big winning opening 151 is inhibited. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B is one as described above.

On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10000 msec, 20000 msec, 30000 msec and 600000 msec. The main CPU 201 stops the variable display of the normal symbols and performs the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 146 and the normal electric shutter 147 based on the derivation of the mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols, so that the normal symbols are displayed variably. When the normal symbol hit is not derived even if the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, the normal electric accessory 146 is not opened. Therefore, while the normal electric accessory 146 is closed, the winning to the small winning big winning opening 151 is not hindered, and most of the game balls hit to the right win the small winning big winning opening 151.例文帳に追加Become. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small-hit big prize-winning hole 151 is 10 as described above. Therefore, in a high-probability-low base state in which the result of the normal lottery can be determined to be a normal loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the increased speed of output balls increases as the fluctuation time of the normal symbols increases.

Thus, in the fifth pachinko game machine, until the jackpot game state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the normal symbol with a longer fluctuation time. It is a game property such as whether it is possible to draw a fluctuation pattern of

In such a fifth pachinko game machine, there is a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never normal losing during one high-probability-low base state, or the result of the normal lottery is normal losing only once. Even if the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 10000msec, or if the result of the normal lottery is normal twice and the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 600000msec both times, there are various patterns. can occur.

Therefore, according to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, a simple configuration is provided in which a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times of the normal symbols are provided, and the state is different from the big win game state. To provide an unprecedented new game property that makes it possible to realize an advantageous game state (high-probability-low base state) in various payout increasing patterns as a high-probability-low base state advantageous to a player. becomes possible, and interest can be enhanced.

Also, when the result of the normal lottery in the high-probability-low base state is normal loss, the sub CPU 301 that receives the normal symbol variation pattern command preferably executes an effect based on the normal symbol variation time. That is, when the fluctuation time of the normal design is 10000 msec, when it is 20000 msec, when it is 30000 msec, and when it is 600000 msec, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained is different. Then, an effect may be executed in which the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained) can be grasped. For example, when the variation time of the normal symbols is 10000 msec, an effect such as "Per 1 round!" is 30000 msec, a performance such as ``3 round win!'' is executed, and when the normal pattern variation time is 600000 msec, a performance such as ``super hit'' is executed. In this way, when an advantageous game state is executed in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time may exceed 1, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , it is possible to increase interest.

The effects executed by the sub CPU 301 include the display effect displayed on the display device 7 via the display control circuit 304, the sound effect output from the speaker 32 via the audio control circuit 305, and the LED control circuit 306. At least one or more of the light emission effect of the LED group 46 executed via the control circuit 307 and the action effect of the performance accessory group 58 executed via the character control circuit 307 corresponds.

By the way, in the high-probability-low base state, if the result of the normal lottery is normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600000 msec, before the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends, for example, the second special lottery It is possible that the result is a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, since the time during which the jackpot game state is controlled is approximately 180000 to 300000 msec, even after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible that the fluctuation display of the normal symbols with the fluctuation time of 600000 msec continues without ending. can occur. As described above, since the normal electric accessory 146 is not opened while the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the normal electric accessory 146 does not hinder the winning of the small winning big prize opening 151, and the player is hit to the right. Most of the game balls that have been played will win a prize in the big prize opening 151 for a small hit. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, even if the big winning game state is controlled before the fluctuation display of the normal symbols ends, the normal winning game state is finished when the big winning game state ends. If the variation display of the symbols continues without stopping, even if the result of the ordinary lottery does not become ``normal loss'' in the game state after the big win game state ends, the advantageous game state is immediately established after the big win game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game even while it is controlled in the jackpot game state. For example, when the variation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, and after the variation of the normal symbols is started, for example, the jackpot game state of 300000 msec is started, approximately 300000 msec after the jackpot game state ends is for the small win. It is possible to win as many prizes as possible to the big prize opening 151 and to increase interest.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the variation time of the normal symbols is digested even during the big win game state and the small win game state, but during the big win game state and the small win game state, It may be configured so that the variation time of normal symbols is not digested (the elapse of the variation time is stopped). For example, when the fluctuation time of the normal design is determined to be 600000 msec, and when the big hit game state starts at the time when 300000 msec has passed since the start of the normal design fluctuation, after the big hit game state ends, it lasts for 300000 msec. (During the jackpot game state, the remaining time of the normal symbol variation does not decrease).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the electric sapo control is not executed, but the present invention is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which the electric sapo control is executed in the game state after the jackpot game state is finished. be able to. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, even though the electric support control is executed in the game state after the big win game state is finished, It is possible to cause most of the right-handed game balls to win the big winning opening 151 for small winning.

<Transition flow of production mode>
FIG. 137(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the production mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 137(b) is a table summarizing transition conditions of the production mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 300 manages the performance mode (sub-game state) as shown in FIG. 137(a). As production modes, a normal mode, a first hit mode, a variable probability mode, and a bonus mode are provided.

Specifically, with reference to FIGS. 137(a) and 137(b), when the jackpot game state starts in the normal mode, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the production mode from the normal mode to the first hit mode. (See transition condition (1)).

When the big hit game state ends in the first hit mode, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the first hit mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (2)). When the special symbol variation display (special symbol variation) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the variable probability mode, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the production mode from the variable probability mode to the normal mode (see transition condition (3)). .

When the jackpot gaming state starts in the variable probability mode, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode (see transition condition (4)). Also, in the variable probability mode, when the variable display of normal symbols (normal symbol loss length variation) by the variable pattern “05H” (see FIG. 136) starts, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode. (Refer to transition condition (4)).

When the normal symbol losing length variation ends in the bonus mode, the sub-control circuit 300 shifts the effect mode from the bonus mode to the probability variable mode (see transition condition (5)). Further, when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first hit is less than a predetermined number (five times) (if the limiter is not reached), the sub-control circuit 300 , the performance mode is shifted from the bonus mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (5)). When the big hit game state ends in the bonus mode, if the normal symbol losing length variation is being executed, the bonus mode is maintained, and when the normal symbol losing length variation ends in the bonus mode, it is in the big winning game state. If so, the bonus mode may be maintained.

When the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first win is a predetermined number (five times) (if the limiter is reached), the sub-control circuit 300 enters the bonus mode. to the normal mode (see transition condition (6)).

It should be noted that the normal mode is a production mode that is controlled in the normal game state. In the normal mode, the sub-control circuit 300 manages the performance stage. As production stages, a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage are provided. Each production stage will be described in detail later.

Also, although not shown, a special effect mode may be provided as a normal mode (an effect mode controlled in the normal game state). The special performance mode can be a performance mode that is controlled from the end of the bonus mode until the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

<Lottery processing for first production stage notice content>
FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the lottery process for the first effect stage announcement content related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

138 shows the lottery process for the notice content of the first production stage, in the first production stage (see FIG. 137(a)), after the game ball has entered the first start hole 120, the special symbol variation related to the start prize is displayed. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when starting. In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

In the first effect stage announcement content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a pseudo continuous stage effect outline lottery process (step S9001). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine the outline of the effect performed during the special symbol variation related to the first start opening win based on the sub variation pattern. Although the details will be described later, the sub CPU 301 sets a sub-fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation related to the first start opening prize before the first effect stage notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 138 is started. have decided. The sub-fluctuation pattern contains information about the pseudo-continuous performance.

The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect in which the decorative symbols are displayed as if they were stopped (temporary stop display) during the period from when the special symbols were variably displayed based on one starting memory until when they were finally displayed as fixed symbols. . The state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative pattern is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the display is completely stopped. In this specification, the pseudo-continuation effect may be simply referred to as "pseudo-continuation", and the effect in which the pseudo-continuation does not occur may be referred to as "no pseudo-continuation". As the pseudo-continuous effect in this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs once and a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs twice are provided. A pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop indication occurs once is called "pseudo 2", and a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop indication occurs twice is called "pseudo 3".

In the "pseudo 2", after the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed). The symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In "pseudo 3", the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, and the second time after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed). is generated, and after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed from the temporary stopped display state (the third pseudo-variable display is performed), the decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed. The stage until the first temporary stop display occurs is called "pseudo 1", and the stage from the start of the second pseudo fluctuation display to the second temporary stop display is called "pseudo 2”, and the stage after the start of the third pseudo-variation display is sometimes called “pseudo 3”. In addition, in the effect of "no simulation", the process from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the stop display of the decorative symbols may be referred to as "simulation 1".

The sub-fluctuation pattern includes, as information related to the pseudo-continuous effect, information indicating whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect occurs, information indicating the number of occurrences of the temporary stop display state of the decorative pattern (to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect progresses), and , contains information indicating the outline of the production performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous production. For example, "pseudo 1" is a 20-second production, "pseudo 2" is a 16-second production, and sub-fluctuation pattern containing information that develops after reach is established in "pseudo 3" and leads to the latter half of super reach has been determined, in the process of step S9001, the sub CPU 301 determines, in "pseudo 1" (while the decorative pattern is fluctuating for 20 seconds) via what kind of effect, "Bell", which will be described later. The outline of the production, such as whether to stop the icon, or through what kind of production to stop the "watermelon" icon described later in "pseudo 2" (while the decorative pattern is fluctuating for 16 seconds) decide. As a result, the outline of the effect in each stage and final variation in the pseudo-run is determined.

For example, [24] 10-second reach (bonus) pattern and [24] 6-second effect (bonus) pattern are provided as a general framework of effects performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous effect. [24] In the 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, after 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative design (restart), it has become tenpai, and 24 seconds have passed since 22 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative design (restart). Icons are displayed for a period of time, and after that, for four seconds, an advance notice occurs after icons stop (see, for example, effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" shown in FIG. 144). [24] In the 6-second production (bonus) pattern, after the production starts 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern fluctuation, the production is successful, and 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern fluctuation. The icon is displayed for a period of 24 seconds from the elapsed time, and the notice after the icon is stopped is generated for 4 seconds thereafter (see, for example, effect number "76" shown in FIG. 150).

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes effect intensity lottery processing (step S9002). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the intensity of effect in each stage of the pseudo-run based on the sub-fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "no pseudo" is determined, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect intensity for pseudo-1, and the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo-2" is determined. If it is, the effect intensity for the pseudo 1 and the effect intensity for the pseudo 2 are determined, and if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 3" is determined, the effect intensity for the pseudo 1, the pseudo 2 and the effect intensity for Pseudo 3 are determined. The effect intensity is an index indicating the degree of expectation of the effect performed in each stage of the pseudo-run. Levels 1 to 7 are provided as the intensity of the effect, and the higher the level, the easier it is to perform the effect with a high expectation of a big hit. The effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2 is set to be higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 1, and the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 3 is set to be higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2. is set to

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9003). When determining that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9004). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes the notice content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9005). The preliminary announcement lottery process for pseudo 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 139 .

When it is determined in step S9004 that the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9005, the sub CPU 301 executes the notice content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9006). The preliminary announcement content lottery process for pseudo 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 140 .

When it is determined in step S9003 that the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the processing of step S9006, the sub CPU 301 executes pseudo-1 preliminary announcement lottery processing (step S9007). The preliminary announcement lottery process for pseudo 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 141 . After executing the process of step S9007, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 139 is a process performed in the pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 301 determines the pseudo 3 change main notice content based on the pseudo 3 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 3) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 138 (step S9011). ). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the type of the big hit notice effect to be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect and the content of the big win notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random value. In this embodiment, as the jackpot preview effects that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3", multiple types of jackpot preview effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, fourth notice effect, etc.) ) is provided. In addition, a plurality of performance contents are provided as the contents of each jackpot announcement performance. For example, as the content of the first notice effect, first notice effect content A, first notice effect content B, first notice effect content C, first notice effect content D, etc. are provided. The first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described in detail later.

In the processing of step S9011, the sub CPU 301 determines one big hit notice effect (for example, first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of jackpot notice effects as pseudo three-variation main notice contents, and also determines the jackpot notice effect. One effect content (for example, first notice effect content A) is determined as the content. After that, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

In addition, in the pseudo 3 announcement content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 138), prior to performing the pseudo 3 change main announcement content lottery process shown in FIG. good too. In the ready-to-win effect, decorative patterns are displayed in a ready-to-win mode (decorative pattern located on the left side (left decorative pattern), decorative pattern located on the right side (right decorative pattern), and decorative pattern located in the center (middle decorative pattern ), two decorative patterns are statically displayed in the same pattern, and the remaining one decorative pattern is variably displayed). In this case, in the processing of step S9011, the sub CPU 301 may determine the content of an effect whose effect time is shorter than the time from when the variable display of decorative symbols is started (restarted) until reach is established. For example, in the case where there is a production content that can be completed within 10 seconds and a production content that requires 10 seconds or more to complete, from the start (restart) of the variable display of decorative patterns to the establishment of ready-to-win. When the ready-to-win effect is determined such that the time of is 10 seconds, it may be possible to determine the effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds as the pseudo 3-variation main notice content. .

<Pseudo 2 change main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo-2 change main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 140 is a process performed in the pseudo-2 change main notice content lottery process (see step S9006 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 2 change main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 2 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 2) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9021). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the type of big hit notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect and the content of the big win notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random value. In this embodiment, as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 2", the same kind of jackpot notice effect as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 3" (first notice effect, second notice effect, 3rd notice effect, 4th notice effect, etc.) are provided. In addition, as the content of each big hit notice performance, the same content as the content of the big win notice performance that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9021, the sub CPU 301 selects one jackpot preview effect (for example, first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of jackpot preview effects as pseudo two-variation main notice contents (provisional), and selects the jackpot preview effect. One effect content (for example, first notice effect content B) is selected as the content of the notice effect. It should be noted that the pseudo 2 change main notice content (temporary) selected here is provisional, and the pseudo 2 change main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9024).

Next, the sub CPU 301 judges whether or not the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (temporary) is a specific jackpot notice effect (step S9022). The specific big hit notice effect is a big hit notice effect in which the effect performed at each stage of the pseudo-continuation has a story, and as the stage of the pseudo-continuation progresses, a predetermined story develops. be. For example, the first announcement effect, which is one of the specific jackpot announcement effects, is an effect in which the characters have a conversation, and the lines of the characters uttered at each stage of the pseudo-run are associated with each other. For example, the content of the conversation in "pseudo 3" is based on the content of the conversation in "pseudo 2". ing. In addition, the conversation content is set as an index indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. In this embodiment, a fifth notice effect is provided in addition to the first notice effect as the specific big hit notice effect. On the other hand, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect do not correspond to the specific big hit notice effect.

When the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 301 selects the big hit notice selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of effect is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect (see step S9011 in FIG. 139) determined as the content of pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice (step S9023). In this process, for example, the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2nd variation main notice content (provisional) and the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 3rd change main notice content are both the first notice effect. If there is, the sub CPU 301 assumes that these types are the same. On the other hand, one of the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (provisional) and the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 3-variation main notice content is the first notice effect If the other one is the fifth foretelling effect, the sub CPU 301 considers that these types are different. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 selects the big hit notice effect as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional). is not the same as the type of the big-hit announcement effect determined as the contents of the pseudo 3-variation main announcement.

When the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 3 change main notice content, the sub CPU 301 performs pseudo 2. The change main notice content (temporary) is replaced with other effect content, and the effect content after replacement is determined as the formal pseudo second change change main notice content (step S9024).

In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect content after replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Although not shown, in the conversation content replacement table, for each presentation content (conversation content) before replacement, the presentation content after replacement (already Conversation contents that can be selected for the determined pseudo three-variable main announcement contents) are defined. As a result, for example, in a situation where the first notice effect is determined as the pseudo 3 change main notice content, when the first notice effect is selected as the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional), in the "pseudo 2" So that the conversation content does not feel uncomfortable with the conversation content in "pseudo 3" (for example, the expectation level of the conversation content in "pseudo 2" is higher than the expectation level of the conversation content in "pseudo 3" ) can be adjusted. In addition, in the processing of step S9024, the sub CPU 301 maintains the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional) for the type of the big hit notice effect, and only the content of the big hit notice effect. Replace.

If it is determined in step S9022 that the type of jackpot announcement effect selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (provisional) is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or in step S9023, it is selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (provisional). If the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined is not the same as the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined as the pseudo 3-variation main notice content, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (temporary ) is determined as the formal pseudo 2-fluctuation main notice content (step S9025).

After executing the process of step S9024 or step S9025, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 141 is a process performed in the pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery process (see step S9007 in FIG. 138).

In the pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 1 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 1) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9031). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the type of jackpot announcement effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "no pseudo" effect, and the jackpot announcement. Decide on the content of the presentation. In this embodiment, as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 1", the jackpot notice effect of the same kind as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 3" (first notice effect, second notice effect, 3rd notice effect, 4th notice effect, etc.) are provided. In addition, as the content of each big hit notice performance, the same content as the content of the big win notice performance that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the processing of step S9031, the sub CPU 301 selects one big hit notice effect (for example, first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of jackpot notice effects as pseudo one-variation main notice content (provisional), and selects the big hit notice effect. One effect content (for example, first notice effect content C) is selected as the content of the notice effect. It should be noted that the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) selected here is provisional, and the pseudo 1 change main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see steps S9034 and S9036). ).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the type of the big hit announcement effect selected as the pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content (provisional) is a specific big hit announcement effect (step S9032). As described above, in this embodiment, the first notice effect and the fifth notice effect are provided as the specific big hit notice effect.

When the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variation main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 301 selects the big hit notice selected as the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of effect is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect (see steps S9024 and S9025 in FIG. 140) determined as the content of pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice (step S9033). In this process, when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur (when the process of step S9006 in FIG. 138 is not executed), the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of the jackpot announcement effect selected as the pseudo 1 fluctuation main announcement content (provisional) is , is not the same as the type of the big hit announcement effect determined as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main announcement content.

When judging that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 2 change main notice content, the sub CPU 301 performs the pseudo 1 change. The change main notice content (temporary) is replaced with other effect content, and the effect content after replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 change change main notice content (step S9034). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect content after replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided as the main notice content replacement table. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined is the content of the pseudo second change main notice. In addition, in the processing of step S9034, the sub CPU 301 maintains the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the simulated 1-variable main notice content (temporary) for the type of the big hit notice effect, while maintaining only the content of the big hit notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined in step S9033 that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1st fluctuation main notice content (provisional) is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect decided as the pseudo 2nd change main notice content, the sub CPU 301 Whether or not the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1st fluctuation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3rd change main notice content (see step S9011 in FIG. 139) is determined (step S9035). In this process, if the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur or if the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. It is determined that the type of the big hit notice performance selected as (temporary) is not the same as the type of the big hit notice performance determined as the pseudo three-variation main notice content.

When judging that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the big win notice effect decided as the pseudo 3 change main notice content, the sub CPU 301 performs the pseudo 1 change. The change main notice content (temporary) is replaced with other effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo-1 change main notice content (step S9036). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect content after replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided as the main notice content replacement table. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined is the content of the pseudo 3-variable main notice. In addition, in the processing of step S9036, the sub CPU 301 maintains the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (temporary), and only the content of the big hit notice effect. Replace.

If it is determined that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) in step S9032 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or in step S9035 it is selected as the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) If the sub CPU 301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined is not the same as the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined as the pseudo 3-variation main notice content, the sub CPU 301 selects the pseudo 1-variation main notice content (temporary ) is determined as the formal pseudo 2-fluctuation main notice content (step S9037).

After executing the process of step S9034, step S9036, or step S9037, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Big hit notice production (only for the first production stage)>
As described using FIGS. 138 to 141, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are respectively stages of “pseudo 1” to “pseudo 3”. can occur in For example, the first notice effect occurs in all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", the second notice effect occurs in all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and the "pseudo 1” to “pseudo 3”, the third notice effect occurs at all stages of “pseudo 1” to “pseudo 3”, or the fourth notice effect occurs at all stages of “pseudo 1” to “pseudo 3”, “pseudo 1” and “ The first notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 2", the second notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 3", or the second notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 1" and "Pseudo 2", and the third notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 3". Effects occur, the first notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 1", the third notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3", the first notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 1", and " A second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2", and a third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3".

In this way, the type of the big-hit advance notice effect performed in each stage of "pseudo-1" to "pseudo-3" is determined independently of the type of the big-hit advance notice effect performed in the other stages. However, when the first notice effect is performed over multiple stages, the content of the conversation that occurs in these first notice effects should not be uncomfortable (see step S9024 in FIG. 140 and steps S9034 and S9036 in FIG. 141).

Here, in this embodiment, an icon may be displayed when the stages of the pseudo-continuous effect progress. For example, when the “bell” icon is displayed in “pseudo 1”, the transition to “pseudo 2” occurs, when the “watermelon” icon is displayed in “pseudo 2”, the transition to “pseudo 3” occurs, and the “pseudo 2” transitions to “pseudo 3”. 3", when the "cherry" icon is displayed, the game shifts to super reach (a reach with a relatively high expectation of a big hit). Based on the above, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described below.

<First notice production>
FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first notice effect. FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first notice effect.

The first notice effect shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b) is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

The effect corresponding to the effect number "1" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as the conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. After being displayed at 7, it is a production that fades out. The effect corresponding to the effect number "2" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as a conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 7, and from 6.5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation, the speech of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the second stage, and then , It is a production that fades out. The effect corresponding to the effect number "3" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as the conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 7, and from the time point of 6.5 seconds to the time of 10 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, a speech of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the second stage, and is decorated. During the period from 10 seconds to 13.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the pattern variation, a dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 as a conversation for the third stage, and then faded out. be.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "4" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as a conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 7.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and then the conversation for the second stage or the As a conversation for the third stage, the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device 7, and the effects are faded out. The button image is an image imitating the effect button 54 . The button effective time is set from the point of 8 seconds to the point of 10 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. When the production button 54 is operated during the button valid time, a predetermined character is displayed as the conversation for the second stage or the conversation for the third stage for 3.5 seconds from the time the production button 54 is operated. may be displayed on the display device 7. Also, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button effective time, the speech of a predetermined character may not be displayed on the display device 7 .

The effect corresponding to the effect number "5" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as a conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 7.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from 10 seconds to 13 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. It is a performance. The button effective time is set from the point of 8 seconds to the point of 10 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. When the production button 54 is operated during the button valid time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 7 from the time the production button 54 is operated. At this time, regardless of the timing at which the production button 54 is operated, the icon may be displayed on the display device 7 until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. Further, even when the production button 54 is not operated during the button effective time, the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the point of 10 seconds to the point of 12 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. You may do so. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later.

A plurality of dialogue contents (lines) are provided for each of the conversation for the first stage, the conversation for the second stage, and the conversation for the third stage, and one conversation contents is selected. Each conversation content is associated with a predetermined character color, and displayed on the display device 7 in the corresponding character color. The character color is associated with the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, when a pseudo-run occurs, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when no pseudo-run occurs, and the fact that the conversation content is displayed in purple suggests that a pseudo-run will occur. . In addition, when super reach (SP) occurs, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when super reach does not occur. high expectations). Also, the fact that the content of the conversation is displayed in gold suggests that the probability of a big hit is very high (the degree of expectation is higher than that in red). In addition, the fact that the content of the conversation is displayed in rainbow color suggests that the big win (the occurrence of the premium SP) has been confirmed (the degree of expectation is higher than that of gold). As for the conversation for the first stage, the content of the conversation is displayed in one of the default colors, purple, red, and gold. As the conversation for the second stage, the default color, purple, and red , and gold, and the conversation for the third row is displayed in one of red, gold, and rainbow colors.

As icons that can be displayed in the first notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon (a "premium" icon), and a second specific icon are provided. In this embodiment, the "Bell" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "Pseudo 1", and when the "Bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1", it shifts to "Pseudo 2". The "watermelon" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 2", and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3". The "cherry" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it shifts to a predetermined super reach. The first specific icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the first specific icon is displayed, it shifts to the first specific super reach (premier SP). The second specific icon is an icon that can be displayed in any stage of "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the second specific icon is displayed, the game shifts to the second specific super reach.

<Second notice performance>
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the flow of the second advance notice effect. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a time chart of the second advance notice effect. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the relationship between the second notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The second notice effect shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

The effect corresponding to the effect number "11" is that after 1.5 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation and 3 seconds have passed, after a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7, It is a production that becomes a fade-out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "12", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating counterclockwise. This is an effect in which the item is displayed on the display device 7 from the point in time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the point in time when 7.5 seconds have elapsed. Items that can be displayed here include items that suggest that at least reach will occur, items that suggest that at least super reach will occur, items that at least suggest that certain super reach will occur, fake items, etc. can be mentioned.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the point of 1.5 seconds to the point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates counterclockwise from the point of time when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the point of time when 6 seconds have elapsed, and 6 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. An image indicating the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 7 for a period of 8 seconds from the time point, and the mission is displayed from a time point of 8 seconds to a time point of 19 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 7, and an image corresponding to the fact that the result of the mission is a failure is displayed from the point in time of 19 seconds to the point of 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. This is an effect in which the image is displayed on the device 7, and then the display device 7 is wiped to return to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates to the left from the time point of 3 seconds to the time of 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation, and 6 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. An image indicating the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 7 for a period of 8 seconds from the time point, and the mission is displayed from a time point of 8 seconds to a time point of 19 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 7, and an image corresponding to the success of the mission is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. It is an effect in which the icon is displayed on the device 7, and thereafter, the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from 22 seconds to 24 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative symbols. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later. It should be noted that during the execution of the mission, a reward (icon) that will be given when the mission is successful is suggested, and the icon will be displayed when the mission is successful.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "15" is that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the point of 1.5 seconds to the point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 7 is displayed as if it is rotating clockwise, and 4 from the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 3. This is an effect in which a reliability-related item is displayed on the display device 7 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variably displayed from the point in time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the point in time when 10 seconds have elapsed. As reliability items, a plurality of items with different levels of expectation for big wins (for example, a first item with a low level of expectation for big wins, a second item with medium levels of expectation for big wins, and a third item with high levels of expectation for big wins). etc.) are provided. For example, the first item is likely to be selected in the case of a loss, and the third item is likely to be selected in the case of a big hit. The degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by displaying one of these items.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "16", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 7 is displayed in a manner rotating clockwise, and 4 from the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. As a result of the roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variably displayed from the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, an icon suggestive item is displayed on the display device 7, and thereafter, from the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from 10 seconds to 12 seconds. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later.

As the icon suggesting items, there are provided a "bell" icon suggesting stop item, a "watermelon" icon suggesting stop item, a "cherry" icon suggesting stop item, a first specific icon stop suggesting item, and a second specific icon stopping suggesting item. It is When the "bell" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "bell" icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "watermelon" icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the "cherry" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "cherry" icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the first specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first specific icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the second specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the second specific icon is displayed immediately afterward.

As icons that can be displayed in the second notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, a second specific icon, and a third specific icon are provided. . The "bell" icon, the "watermelon" icon, the "cherry" icon, the first specific icon, and the second specific icon are icons that can be displayed in the first notice effect as well, and these icons are as described above. is. In addition to these icons, a third specific icon can be displayed in the second advance notice effect. The third specific icon is an icon that can be displayed in any stage of "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the third specific icon is displayed, the game moves to the third specific super reach.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "17" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 rotates to the right from 3 seconds to 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13" except that The effect corresponding to the effect number "18" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 rotates to the right from 3 seconds to 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “14” except that

The effect corresponding to the effect number "19" is that a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates upward from the point in time when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the point in time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. From the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, the display device 7 displays an image related to a battle effect in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other, and 12 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative symbols. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the fact that the result of the battle effect is a failure is displayed on the display device 7 over the elapsed seconds.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "20", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the point of 1.5 seconds to the point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates upward for a period of 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. From the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, the display device 7 displays an image related to a battle effect in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other, and 12 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative symbols. An image corresponding to the fact that the result of the battle production is successful is displayed on the display device 7 over a period of seconds, and then from the point of 12 seconds to the point of 14 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. This is an effect in which the reliability items described above are displayed on the display device 7 .

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "21", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 and the decorative pattern is displayed for 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates upward for a period of 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. From the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, the display device 7 displays an image related to a battle effect in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other, and 12 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative symbols. An image corresponding to the fact that the result of the battle production is successful is displayed on the display device 7 over a period of seconds, and over a period of 12 seconds to 14 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. , the above-mentioned icon-suggestion type item is displayed on the display device 7, and thereafter, the icon corresponding to the icon-suggestion type item is displayed on the display device for a period of 14 seconds to 16 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. This is the effect displayed in 7. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "22" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 rotates upward from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “13” except that The effect corresponding to the effect number "23" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 rotates upward from the point of 3 seconds to the point of 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “14” except that

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "24", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the point of 1.5 seconds to the point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates downward from the time point of 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern From 5 seconds to 9 seconds, the display device 7 displays an image of the start of the continuous hit effect, and from 9 seconds to 15 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern variation (effect button 54), the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and the result of the continuous hitting effect is failure from the point of time of 15 seconds to the point of time of 18 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image corresponding to what has happened is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display to return to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "25", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 7 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 7 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates downward from 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, and 4 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern From 5 seconds to 9 seconds, the display device 7 displays an image of the start of the continuous hit effect, and from 9 seconds to 15 seconds after the start (resume) of the decorative pattern variation (effect button 54), the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and the result of the continuous hitting effect is successful from the time point of 15 seconds to the time point of 18 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image corresponding to the event is displayed on the display device 7, and thereafter, the icon is displayed on the display device 7 from the point of 18 seconds to the point of 20 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. be. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later. It should be noted that during execution of the repeated hitting effect, a reward (icon) given when the repeated hitting effect is successful is indicated, and the icon is definitely displayed when the repeated hitting effect succeeds.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "26" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 rotates downward from the point of 3 seconds to the point of 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13" except that The effect corresponding to the effect number "27" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 7 rotates downward from the point of 3 seconds to the point of 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “14” except that

FIG. 145(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "24" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to effect number "24" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of decorative symbols is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 145(a), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 18 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start (restart), and then for 2 seconds. It stops over and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, when the second notice effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, it appears to the player that the decorative symbols are stopped. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "24" is performed.

FIG. 145(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "25" and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to the effect number "25" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of decorative symbols is 20 seconds. Figure 145
In the example shown in (b), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation until 20 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start (restart). Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "25" is performed.

FIG. 145(c) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The effects corresponding to the effect numbers '13', '17', '22', and '26' may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 145(c), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 22 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start (restart), and then for 2 seconds. It stops over and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, when the second notice effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, it appears to the player that the decorative symbols are stopped. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for performing effects corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26".

FIG. 145(d) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The effects corresponding to the effect numbers '14', '18', '23', and '27' may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 145(d), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation until 24 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start (restart). . Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for performing effects corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27".

<3rd notice production>
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the flow of the third advance notice effect. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a time chart of the third advance notice effect. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third advance notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The third notice effect shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

Effects corresponding to effect numbers "41" and "42" can occur only in "pseudo 1". Effects corresponding to effect numbers "43" to "48" can occur only in "pseudo 2". Effects corresponding to effect numbers "49" to "52" can occur only in "pseudo 3". As icons that can be displayed in the third advance notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. Note that the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed in the third advance notice effect.

In "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3", an enemy attack effect is performed. In the enemy attack presentation, three numerical patterns are repeatedly changed and stopped, and every time a continuous dot is stopped and displayed, the friend character attacks the enemy character. Continuing dots (combination of three number patterns) are “1.2.2”, “2.3.3”, “3.4.4”, “4.5.5”, “5.6”.・6”, “6.7.7” and “7.1.1” are provided. When a friendly character attacks an enemy character, the enemy character's physical strength gauge decreases. A health gauge indicates the availability of an icon. When the enemy character falls in conjunction with the encouragement of whether or not the icon will stop (icon stop incentive), a situation such as icon acquisition or tenpai (expansion to SP) is given to the player. . In addition, when the enemy character is defeated, a predetermined character may be displayed, and the color of the character indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “41” is a effect that fades out after the image related to the third notice effect, title completion, is displayed on the display device 7 . In the effect corresponding to the effect number "42", after the image related to the title completion prompt of the third notice effect is displayed on the display device 7, the image corresponding to the success of the title completion effect is displayed on the display device 7. After that, the “bell” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7 . When the "bell" icon is displayed (the "bell" icon is acquired), after that, after the icon is stopped, the announcement is made.

Four timings are provided as the timings at which the urge to complete the title may occur. Specifically, when an image related to the title completion prompt is displayed on the display device 7 after one second has passed since the start of the variation of the decorative symbols (timing 1), and when five seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the title completion prompt is displayed. is displayed on the display device 7 (timing 2), and when an image regarding title completion is displayed on the display device 7 after 9 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 3), A case (timing 4) is provided in which an image related to title completion is displayed on the display device 7 after 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. The title completion prompt occurs at one of these four timings.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “43” is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop swaying (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and then the “watermelon” icon is fixed on the display device 7. It is a production that is displayed (stopped). When the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), after that, after the icon is stopped, the advance notice is given. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "44", after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 7 in a stopped state. After that, the display device 7 displays an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time), an image corresponding to the failure of the icon stop prompting is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 performs a wipe display. It is a production that returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "45", after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 7 in a stopped state. After that, an image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7 , and then the “watermelon” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7 . When the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), after that, after the icon is stopped, the advance notice is given. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "46", after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and further, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 7 in a stopped state. After that, an image related to the icon stop ticking (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop ticking (third time) is displayed. An image is displayed on the device 7, corresponding to the failure of the icon stop prompting, is displayed on the display device 7, and then the display device 7 becomes a wipe display to return to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "47", after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 7 in a stopped state. After that, an image related to the icon stop ticking (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop ticking (third time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 7 , and then the “watermelon” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7 . When the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), after that, after the icon is stopped, the advance notice is given. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "48", after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 7 in a stopped state. After that, an image related to the icon stop ticking (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop ticking (third time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 7, after that, the number pattern is displayed on the display device 7 in a tenpai manner, and after a predetermined connecting effect, the third specific super reach (first half) is produced.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “49” is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop swaying (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and then the “cherry” icon is fixed on the display device 7. It is a production that is displayed (stopped). When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon has been acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "50", after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 7 in a stopped state. After that, an image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 7 , and then the “cherry” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7 . When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon has been acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "51", after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, the display device 7 stops displaying the continuous result. After that, an image related to the icon stop ticking (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop ticking (third time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 7 , and then the “cherry” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 7 . When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon has been acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given. In the effect corresponding to the effect number “52”, after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 7 in a stopped state. After that, an image related to the icon stop ticking (second time) is displayed on the display device 7, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the icon stop ticking (third time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 7, after that, the number pattern is displayed on the display device 7 in a tenpai mode, and after a predetermined connecting effect, the effect develops into the third specific super reach (second half).

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “49” to “52”, the images related to the icon stop prompt (first time), the icon stop prompt (second time), and the icon stop prompt (third time) are displayed on the display device 7. , the button image is also displayed on the display device 7 together. Thereby, the operation of the production button 54 is accepted. When the button image is displayed, a predetermined button effective time (for example, 2 seconds during which the image related to the icon stop prompting is displayed, see FIG. 147) is set. When the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, the display following the icon stop swaying at the time the effect button 54 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button effective time has not expired) (display of a "cherry" icon, display of consecutive numbers, or display of tenpai numbers). On the other hand, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends), the display following the icon stop prompt (icon display, continuation Display of the outcome, or Tenpa display of number patterns) is performed. Such a button image is not displayed in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48". That is, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48", even if the effect button 54 is operated while the image related to the icon stop swaying is being displayed, the operation is triggered (the icon (before the 2-second period during which the image related to the stop prompt expires), the display following the icon stop prompt (display of the "cherry" icon, display of continuous numbers, or display of tenpai with numeric patterns) is performed. no. Also, when the enemy attack production starts, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by operating a predetermined movable accessory. The relationship between the action mode of the movable accessory and the degree of expectation for the big win is the same as the notice after the icon stops, which will be described later.

FIG. 148(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "pseudo 1" is 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148(a), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, after stopping for 1 second, it fluctuates again at high speed. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to effect number "42" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 148(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the ornamental pattern in "pseudo 1" is 16 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over one second, stops for one second, and then fluctuates again at high speed. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to effect number "42" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 148(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, and after decelerating over 1.5 seconds, it fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to effect number "42" (timing 3) is performed.

FIG. 148(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 148(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, and after decelerating over 1.5 seconds, it fluctuates again at high speed. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for one second, swings for one second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for when an effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) is performed.

In addition, "stop" of the decoration pattern in FIG. 148 means a temporary stop display. As described above, the temporary stop display state is a state in which the decorative symbols vibrate or the like, and cannot be said to be a completely stop display state.

<Fourth notice production>
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the flow of the fourth advance notice effect. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth advance notice effect. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the relationship between the fourth advance notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The fourth advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)).

Effects corresponding to effect numbers "71" and "72" can occur only in "pseudo 1". Effects corresponding to effect numbers "73" to "77" can occur in "pseudo 2" or "pseudo 3". As icons that can be displayed in the fourth advance notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. Note that the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed in the fourth advance notice effect.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "71", the "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern, and the image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" pattern becomes a tenpai (four-pattern tenpai fanning) is displayed. After being displayed on the display device 7, an image corresponding to the failure of the 4-pattern tenpai-fighting is displayed on the display device 7, and the display device 7 becomes a wipe display to return to the normal background. In the production corresponding to the production number "72", the "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern, and an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" pattern will become a tenpai (four-pattern tenpai fanning) is displayed on the display device 7. After that, an image corresponding to the success of the 4-symbol Tenpai-fighting is displayed on the display device 7, an image of normal reach in the dedicated background state after the success is displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed in 7. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

Two timings are provided as timings at which the 4-symbol Tenpai swing can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the 4-pattern tenpai is displayed on the display device 7 from 3.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative design (timing 1), and from the time of 7 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative design A case (timing 2) in which an image related to the 4-pattern tenpai-flashing is displayed on the display device 7 is provided. The 4-symbol Tenpai sway occurs at one of these two timings.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "73" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 7 and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The effect corresponding to the effect number "74" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to the tilt of whether or not the "7" pattern will become a tenpai (7 pattern tenpai tilt) and an image of the "7" pattern sliding are displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is an effect displayed on the display device 7 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "75" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to the influence of whether or not the "7" symbol will become a tenpai (7 symbol tenpai influence) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" The display device 7 displays an image related to the influence of whether or not the pattern will become Tenpai (4-symbol Tenpai influence) and the image of the "4" symbol sliding, and the image of whether the "7" symbol will become Tenpai ( An image related to the 7 symbol tenpai sway) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 7, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "76" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to the influence of whether or not the "7" symbol will become a tenpai (7 symbol tenpai influence) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" The display device 7 displays an image related to the influence of whether or not the symbol will become Tenpai (4-symbol Tenpai influence) and the image in which the "4" symbol slides, and the image of whether or not the "7" symbol becomes Tenpai ( An image related to the 7 symbol tenpai swaying) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to the swaying which of the '4' symbol and the '7' symbol is the tenpai. is displayed on the display device 7 and then the icon is displayed on the display device 7 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "77" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to the influence of whether or not the "7" symbol will become a tenpai (7 symbol tenpai influence) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 7, and "4" The display device 7 displays an image related to the influence of whether or not the symbol will become Tenpai (4-symbol Tenpai influence) and the image in which the "4" symbol slides, and the image of whether or not the "7" symbol becomes Tenpai ( An image related to the 7 symbol tenpai swaying) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 7, and an image related to the swaying which of the '4' symbol and the '7' symbol is the tenpai. is displayed on the display device 7, and then either one of the "4" pattern and the "7" pattern is displayed on the display device 7 in a tenpai mode, and develops into the third specific super reach through a predetermined connecting effect. It is a performance to do.

In addition, after the announcement after icon stop is performed via the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” in “Pseudo 1”, the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77” are performed in “Pseudo 2”. In the case of “Pseudo 2”, in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77”, the “4” pattern became tenpai as a result of the effect in “Pseudo 1” before entering the dedicated background state. A later background is displayed. In addition, after the notice is given after stopping the icon via one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "76" in "Pseudo 2", in "Pseudo 3" the effect number "73" is given. ” to “77” are performed, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77” in “Pseudo 3”, before entering the dedicated background state, the effect in “Pseudo 2” As a result, the background is displayed after the "4" pattern has become tenpai.

FIG. 151(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to effect number "71" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of decorative symbols is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 9 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over one second, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 8 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then It fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. As a result, from the player, after the fourth notice effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, the sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern is 8 seconds, which is the same as the default variation. Each decorative design will appear to vary in a manner. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1) is performed. Note that default fluctuations will be described later.

FIG. 151(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbols is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 151(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 2 seconds, stops for 1 second, and shakes for 9 seconds. , Further, it fluctuates at a high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates in 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 22 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over one second, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to 11.5 seconds, shakes for 0.5 seconds, decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, After shaking for 2 seconds, it fluctuates at a high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 151(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to the effect number '72' (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in 'Pseudo 1' is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 151(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 12 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then operates at a speed of one frame feed every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for when an effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 151(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 151(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 8.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then operates at a speed of one frame feed every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) is performed.

<Notice after the icon stops>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the effect content of the notice after icon stop. 153 and 154 are diagrams showing the relationship between the notice after icon stop and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “91” is an effect performed after the “bell” icon or the “watermelon” icon has stopped (deterministically displayed). In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91", the predetermined movable accessory operates in the first mode after the first connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “92” is an effect performed after the “bell” icon or the “watermelon” icon has stopped (deterministically displayed). In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory operates in the second mode after the first connecting effect is performed.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “93” is an effect performed after the “cherry” icon has stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “94” is an effect performed after the first specific icon is stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "94", the third connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “95” is an effect performed after the second specific icon is stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "95", a fourth connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “96” is an effect performed after the third specific icon is stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth transition effect is performed. Predetermined movable accessories do not operate in the post-stop notices of the icons corresponding to the production numbers "93" to "96".

It should be noted that "the icon is stopped (definitely displayed)" means that the icon is stopped and displayed separately from the decorative pattern. As explained in detail in this example, the icon serves as a landmark that indicates the development to the next stage in pseudo-run or super-reach. Therefore, at the time when the icon is stopped and displayed, the result of the big hit determination has not yet been derived, and at that time, at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design fluctuates. It is in the displayed state. In addition, when one icon is statically displayed, it is assumed that the icon will be temporarily displayed before the display is finalized. It clarifies that it is not such a provisional display. "Temporary display" means that the icon is displayed in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that the icon will be displayed as fixed (an effect that encourages the icon to be stopped and displayed) is performed).

FIG. 153(a) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "91", after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights up for 1 second and moves to a predetermined position for 1 second. The accessory operates in the first mode, and then the movable accessory is stored. The first connecting effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (first background image) is displayed on the display device 7 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" occurs due to the display of the "bell" icon in "Pseudo 1", "Pseudo 2" occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. Become. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2" and the notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "91" is generated, "pseudo 3 ”. That is, the motion of the predetermined movable role is performed in the next stage of the pseudo-ream.

FIG. 153(b) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "92" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number “92”, after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination is turned on for 1 second, and then for 2.5 seconds. The movable accessory operates in the second mode, and then the movable accessory is stored. On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" is displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after icon stop. Become. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2" and the notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "92" is generated, "pseudo 3 ”. That is, the motion of the predetermined movable accessory is performed in the next stage of the pseudo-ream.

The predetermined movable accessory is configured to be displaceable among a first state, a second state, and a third state. Specifically, when the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state, it goes through the second state. That is, the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state, and then from the second state to the third state, thereby being displaced from the first state to the third state. Is possible. In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state (displacement of one step). On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state (displacement in two steps). The first state is a state in which a predetermined movable accessory is housed in a predetermined position, and when the notice ends after the icons stop, the predetermined movable accessory returns to the first state.

Further, during the time period during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91". It's been longer than it has been. The time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating corresponds to the degree of expectation for the big win, and the longer the time, the higher the degree of expectation for the big win. The degree of expectation of a big hit is a probability that the result of the judgment of a big hit related to the special symbol change of this time is a big hit, and is an index showing how much a big hit can be expected when the effect is generated. As a result, when the notice after the stop of the icon corresponding to the performance number "92" is generated, the player gets a big hit compared to the case where the notice after the stop of the icon corresponding to the performance number "91" is generated. It can give you a great sense of anticipation.

FIG. 154(a) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "93" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "93", the second transition effect is performed for four seconds. The second connection effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (second background image) is displayed on the display device 7 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the "Cherry" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 3" and the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "93" is generated, a predetermined super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. .

FIG. 154(b) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "94" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "94", the third connecting effect is performed for four seconds. A third transition effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (third background image) is displayed on the display device 7 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "94" is generated by displaying the first specific icon, the first specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops.

FIG. 154(c) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "95" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed for four seconds. A fourth transition effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (fourth background image) is displayed on the display device 7 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after icon stop corresponding to the effect number "95" is generated by displaying the second specific icon, the second specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after icon stop.

FIG. 154(d) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "96" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth transition effect is performed for four seconds. A fifth transition effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (fifth background image) is displayed on the display device 7 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after icon stop corresponding to the performance number "96" is generated by displaying the third specific icon, the third specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after icon stop.

In the first transition effect, the second transition effect, the third transition effect, the fourth transition effect, and the fifth transition effect, different background images (first background image to fifth background image) ) is displayed on the display device 7 . Basically the same transition effect (first transition effect) is performed when the "bell" icon is displayed and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed. A connecting effect (common) and a first connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the post-icon stop notice generated by displaying the 'bell' icon or the 'watermelon' icon in the jackpot notice effects other than the third notice effect, the first connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the third notice effect, the first transition effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the first connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the first connection effect (common). In the third notice effect, a background image different from the usual background image is displayed as the background image for the third notice effect, and the background image exclusively for the third notice effect is also used as the background image displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped. are doing. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the display of the normal background image in the post-icon stop announcement that occurs following the third announcement effect.

Similarly, as the second transition effect, a second transition effect (common) and a second transition effect (dedicated) are provided. In the post-icon stop notice generated by the display of the "cherry" icon in the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the second connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the third notice effect, the second transition effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the second connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the second connection effect (common). As described above, in the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed. As for the connection effect of 5, no effect dedicated to the third notice effect is provided.

In this specification, the “connecting effect” refers to a effect in which a background image is displayed to fill the gap between the end of one effect and the start of another effect. The first transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed. The second transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the "cherry" icon is displayed, the third transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the first specific icon is displayed, and the fourth transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the first specific icon is displayed. A connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively for when the second specific icon is displayed, and a fifth connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively for when the third specific icon is displayed.

Also, the "bell" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), and the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (second half). When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the first connecting effect is performed as a notice after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time is the first connecting effect ( Common) is slightly different from the background image displayed in. Similarly, when the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, a second connecting effect is performed as a notice after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time is the second It is slightly different from the background image displayed in the connection effect (common). In the third specific super reach, a battle between an ally character (first ally character) and an enemy character is performed. When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), the game shifts to the third specific super reach (second half). When the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (second half), the game shifts to a predetermined super reach.

The third specific super reach is a super reach that can occur only in the first production stage (see FIG. 137(a)). On the other hand, the predetermined super reach is a super reach that can occur in any one of the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage. When the "cherry" icon is displayed in the big hit announcement performance, the same super reach (predetermined super reach) is entered regardless of the type of the big win announcement performance. In a predetermined super reach, another ally character participates in the fight against one ally character. Each of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage is associated with a main friendly character (a friendly character that appears frequently). A first teammate character appears, a second teammate character basically appears in the second production stage, and a third teammate character basically appears in the third production stage. For example, the predetermined characters (ally characters) appearing in the above-described first notice effect, second notice effect, and third notice effect are all first friend characters. When a predetermined super reach occurs in the first production stage, the second teammate character participates in the fight against the first teammate character. Further, when predetermined super reach occurs in the second production stage, the third teammate character participates in the fight against the second teammate character, and when predetermined super reach occurs in the third production stage, the third teammate character participates in the battle. The first ally character participates in the battle against the 3 ally characters.

As described above, when the icon is displayed in the big hit announcement effect, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols may or may not be temporarily stopped when progressing from one stage to the next stage in the pseudo continuous effect. If the decorative symbols are not temporarily stopped when progressing from one stage to the next stage in the pseudo-continuous effect, displaying the icon is a condition for progressing to the next stage.

<Specific aspects of jackpot announcement effect>
155 to 157 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the first announcement effect. 158 to 160 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the second advance notice effect. 161 to 164 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the third advance notice effect. 165 to 167 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the fourth advance notice effect. 168 and 169 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the notice after the icon stops. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining examples of icons.

FIG. 155 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 142(a)) corresponding to the effect number "3". In the effect shown in FIG. 155, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155(a)), and then the first teammate character 9002 appears (see FIG. 155(b)). Then, as the conversation for the first stage, the line of the first ally character 9002 ("Is it hot?") is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155(c)), followed by the conversation for the second stage. is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155(d)). It's too hot!" is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 155(e)), and then the decorative pattern 9001 becomes the ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 155(f)).

FIG. 156 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 142(a)) corresponding to the effect number "5". In the effect shown in FIG. 156, first, as the effect in "Pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 156(a)), and then the first teammate character 9002 appears. At the same time, the line of the first ally character 9002 ("Push the button") is displayed on the display device 7 as the conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 156(b)), followed by the button image 9003 on the display device 7. (see FIG. 156(c)), followed by a large display of the “bell” icon confirmation image 9011 on the display device 7 (see FIG. 156(d)), followed by a pseudo consecutive step notification bell image 9021. It is displayed smaller than the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 on the display device 7 (see FIG. 156(e)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 156(f)). The “bell” icon finalized image 9011 is an image corresponding to the final display of the “bell” icon. The pseudo-run stage notification bell image 9021 is an image corresponding to the stage of the pseudo-run being "pseudo 2", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during "pseudo 2".

In FIG. 157, after the effect shown in FIG. 156 is performed in "Pseudo 1", the effect corresponding to effect number "5" is performed in "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3" (see FIG. 142(a)). 3 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the case of FIG. In the production shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 156(f), after transitioning to "pseudo 2", the conversation of the first ally character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown) are performed, followed by "watermelon". The icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157(a)), the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 is displayed on the display device 7, and the transition to "pseudo 3" is performed (see FIG. 157(b) )reference). A “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is an image corresponding to the “watermelon” icon being definitely displayed. The watermelon image 9022 for notification of pseudo consecutive stages is an image corresponding to the fact that the stage of the pseudo consecutive stage is "Pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during "Pseudo 3".

After that, through the conversation of the first teammate character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown), the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157(c)), and the pseudo continuous stage is displayed. An informing cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 157(d)), and the game shifts to a predetermined super reach (not shown). The “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is an image corresponding to the “cherry” icon being definitely displayed. The pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is an image corresponding to the development of super reach in "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 7 during super reach. After that, if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the decoration pattern 9001 is stop-displayed in a mode corresponding to the big win (see FIG. 157(e)), and the game becomes a big win (see FIG. 157(f)).

FIG. 158 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 143) corresponding to the effect number "13". In the effect shown in FIG. 158, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 158(a)), and then the cut of the first teammate character 9002 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 158(a)). (see FIG. 158(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 158(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is displayed as if it is rotating counterclockwise. (Refer to FIG. 158(d)), subsequently, an image relating to the description and start of the mission is displayed on the display device 7 (Refer to FIGS. 158(e) and (f)), after which the result of the mission is a failure. Correspondingly, the decorative pattern 9001 is stop-displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 158(g)).

159 and 160 show an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 143) corresponding to the effect number "16". In the effects shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 159(a)). (see FIG. 159(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 159(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is rotated to the right. (see FIG. 159(d)), followed by a plurality of items (here, "Chance", "CHANCE", "Chansu", "Gekiatsu", "Intense heat", "Iron plate", "NEXT , and the ``Bell'' icon stop suggesting item 9031) is performed (see FIGS. 159(e) to 160(a)). The "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031 is selected (see FIGS. 160(b) and (c)), and then the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 160(d)). Subsequently, a pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 7 in a smaller size than the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 (see FIG. 160(e)). (f)).

FIG. 161 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 146) corresponding to the effect number "41". In the effect shown in FIG. 161, the decorative pattern 9001 first starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 161(a)), and then the title completion image 9004 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 161 ( b)), subsequently, in response to the failure of the title completion prompting image 9004, the title completion prompting image 9004 disappears, and the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the failure (Fig. 161(c) and (d)).

FIG. 162 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 146) corresponding to the effect number "42". In the effect shown in FIG. 162, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162(a)). 7 (see FIG. 162(b)), and subsequently, in response to the success of title completion prompting, a title completion prompting success image 9005 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162(c) )), the decorative pattern 9001 becomes a ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 162(d)), then the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 162(e)), and then, A pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 7 in a size smaller than the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 (see FIG. 162(f)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 162(g)). ).

In FIG. 163, after the effect shown in FIG. 162 is performed in “Pseudo 1”, the effect (see FIG. 146) corresponding to effect number “43” is performed in “Pseudo 2”. 1 shows an example of an image that In the production shown in FIG. 163, after shifting to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 162(g), an enemy character 9006 appears on the display device 7 (see FIG. Every time the eyes (for example, "2, 3, 3") are stopped and displayed, an effect (enemy attack effect) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9006 is performed (FIGS. 163(b) to (d). (see FIG. 163(e) and (f)), followed by the icon stop promotion in which the display of the promotion watermelon image 9007 on the display device 7 becomes larger and larger (see FIGS. 163(e) and (f)), followed by the success of the icon stop promotion. 163(g)), the enemy character 9006 is defeated, and the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 163(g)). 7, it is displayed smaller than the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 (see FIG. 163(h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 164, after the effect shown in FIG. 163 is performed in "pseudo 2", the effect (see FIG. 146) corresponding to the effect number "49" is performed in "pseudo 3" is displayed on the display device 7. 1 shows an example of an image that In the production shown in FIG. 164, after shifting to "pseudo 3", an enemy character 9008 appears on the display device 7 (see FIG. 4”) is stop-displayed, an effect (enemy attack effect) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9008 is performed (see FIGS. 164(b) to (d)). 164(e) and (f)) is performed (see FIGS. 164(e) and (f)). As it falls down, the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 164(g)), and then the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed on the display device 7 on the display device 7 . is displayed smaller than (see FIG. 164(h)), and then transitions to super reach.

Incidentally, when the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third foretelling effect, the third foretelling effect may always be performed in the next pseudo continuous stage. That is, when the "bell" icon is displayed in the effects ("pseudo 1") corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42", the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" is set as the "pseudo 2". You may make it always perform the production|presentation of any of. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 2") corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48", the "pseudo 3" corresponds to the effect numbers "49" to "52". Any one of the effects may be always executed.

FIG. 165 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the effect (see FIG. 149) corresponding to the effect number "72". In the effect shown in FIG. 165, first, as the effect in "Pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 7 (see FIG. 165(a)), and then the left decorative pattern 9001L is "4". The symbols are stopped (see FIGS. 165(b) and (c)), followed by a 4-symbol tenpai fanning in which the display of the "4" symbol as the right decorative symbol 9001R becomes larger and larger (see FIG. 165(d)). , Subsequently, in response to the successful 4-pattern Tenpai fanning, the background (not shown) displayed only when the 4-pattern Tenpai fanning succeeds (background after 4-pattern Tenpai success), and the left decoration A large "4" pattern is displayed as the pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIG. 165(e)), followed by the middle decorative pattern 9001C which becomes a ready-to-win state in which it is horizontally rotated (FIG. 165).
(f)), subsequently, the "bell" icon determination image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 165(g)), and then the pseudo continuous step notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 7 as ""Bell" icon is displayed smaller than the confirmation image 9011 (see FIG. 165(h)), and then shifts to "Pseudo 2". It should be noted that the normal background is displayed on the display device 7 before the background becomes the background after the success of the 4-symbol tenpai (at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 9001).

In FIG. 166, after the effect shown in FIG. 165 is performed in “Pseudo 1”, the effect (see FIG. 149) corresponding to effect number “73” is performed in “Pseudo 2”. 1 shows an example of an image that At the start of the presentation shown in FIG. 166 (when transitioning to "pseudo 2"), it is a specific background. The background may be the same background as the background after successful 4-symbol ten-pai, or may be different from the background after successful 4-symbol ten-pai. The subsequent effects are performed in the dedicated background state. The background in the dedicated background state may be the same background as the background after the success of the 4-pattern tenpai, may be a background different from the background after the success of the 4-pattern tenpai, or may be the same background as the specific background. Alternatively, it may be a background different from the specific background. In the dedicated background state, a 4-symbol tenpai fanning is performed in which the "4" pattern changes at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIGS. 166(a) and (b)). After the display disappears, the “watermelon” icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 166(c)). It is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 166(d)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 167, after the effect shown in FIG. 166 is performed in the “pseudo 2”, the effect (see FIG. 149) corresponding to the effect number “75” is performed in the “pseudo 3” is displayed on the display device 7. 1 shows an example of an image that At the start of the presentation shown in FIG. 167 (when transitioning to "Pseudo 3"), the specific background is set. The subsequent effects are performed in the dedicated background state. In the dedicated background state, a 4-pattern tenpai fanning is performed in which the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R fluctuate at high speed (see FIG. 167(a)), followed by the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern. A 7-pattern tenpai fanning is performed as a pattern 9001R in which the "7" pattern changes at high speed (see FIG. 167(b)), followed by a left decorative pattern 9001L and a right decorative pattern 9001R in which the "4" pattern fluctuates at high speed. A 4-symbol ten-pie fanning is performed (see FIG. 167(c)), followed by a 7-pattern ten-pie fanning in which the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R fluctuate at high speed (Fig. 167(d)). )), and after the display of the “7” pattern disappears, a “cherry” icon determination image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 7 (see FIG. 167(e)), and then a pseudo-continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 7 in a smaller size than the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 (see FIG. 167(f)), after which the transition to super reach occurs.

It should be noted that the modes of the 4-symbol Tenpai-fighting to the 7-symbols Tenpai-fighting are not particularly limited. It is also possible to vibrate the pattern to the "7" pattern.

FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 7 in the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" (see FIG. 152). . FIGS. 168(c) and 168(d) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 7 in the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "92" (see FIG. 152). . In the notice after icon stop shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b), after the “bell” icon confirmation image 9011 (or “watermelon” icon confirmation image 9012) is displayed (see FIG. 168(a)). , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the first mode (see FIG. 168(b)). In the notice after icon stop shown in FIGS. 168(c) and 168(d), after the “watermelon” icon confirmation image 9012 (or “bell” icon confirmation image 9011) is displayed (see FIG. 168(c)). , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the second mode (see FIG. 168(d)). The movable accessory 9041 is an accessory that imitates a predetermined character, and has a first state (stored state), a second state (a state in which the character lowers its arm, see FIG. 168(b)), and a second state. State 3 (state in which the character raises its arm... Fig. 168
(d) reference).

FIG. 169 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 in the post-icon stop announcement (see FIG. 152) corresponding to the effect number “93”. In the notice after icon stop shown in FIG. 169, after the “cherry” icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed
(a)), and the background image 9042 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 169(b)). Thereafter, a predetermined super reach is developed, and a battle between an ally character (for example, the first ally character 9002) and an enemy character 9043 is performed (see FIGS. 169(c) to 169(e)), and the result of the jackpot determination is If it is a big hit, the decoration pattern 9001 is stop-displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 169(f)).

A specific example of the big hit announcement effect has been described above with reference to FIGS. In this example, a case has been described in which predetermined patterns such as the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, and the like are employed as icons. Icons in the present embodiment can appropriately employ icons configured by characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof. For example, FIG. 170(a) shows, as an example of the first specific icon, a first specific icon confirmation image 9014 formed of a pattern including numbers or letters "7" and "PREMIUM". Further, for example, a character image of "NEXT" may be adopted as an icon, and the display of "NEXT" may be used as a trigger to advance to the next stage in the pseudo-continuation.

Further, for example, instead of the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012, and the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013, "X" icons as shown in FIGS. A confirmation image 9051, a "Y" icon confirmation image 9052, and a "Z" icon confirmation image 9053 may be employed. In this manner, as the icon in this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately employ a pattern in which a predetermined character (for example, an English word) is surrounded by a square. In this case, instead of the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023, the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y An image 9062 and a Z image 9063 for pseudo continuous stage notification may be employed (see FIGS. 170(e) and (f)). In FIG. 170(e), the X-image 9061 for pseudo-continuous-stage notification and the Y-image 9062 for pseudo-continuous-stage notification are displayed brightly, while the Z-image for pseudo-continuous-stage notification 9063 is displayed dark. It is shown to be "Pseudo 3". By displaying the "Z" icon confirmation image 9053 in this state, in FIG. All images 9063 are displayed brightly. This would later lead to the development of Super Reach.

In the above description, the display device 7 displays the decorative pattern 9001 in a large size (in the center of the display device 7) or in a small size (in the lower right corner of the display device 7). In this embodiment, while the icon is displayed and before and after the icon is displayed, the larger decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, the smaller decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, or both decorations are displayed. The design 9001 may be configured not to be displayed. Further, when an icon is displayed, a pattern corresponding to the icon may be displayed as a part of the smaller decorative patterns 9001 (for example, a middle decorative pattern 9001C), or a part of the pattern may be displayed. (for example, the middle decorative pattern 9001C) may be displayed in a variable manner (the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R are stopped and displayed), or the left decorative pattern 9001L, the middle decorative pattern 9001C, and the right All of the decorative patterns 9001R may remain displayed in a variable manner.

<Big hit notice production (common to each production stage)>
The first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect described above are the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)). ), it can occur only in the first production stage. On the other hand, the sixth and seventh advance notice effects described below can occur in any of the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage. Further, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are effects that can occur during the pseudo continuous effect, while the sixth to seventh notice effects occur. If you do, the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur. In the following, after explaining the variation patterns of decorative symbols in each production stage, the sixth and seventh advance notice effects will be explained.

<Variation patterns of decorative patterns>
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing variation patterns of decorative symbols in the first production stage. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing variation patterns of decorative symbols in the second production stage. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing variation patterns of decorative symbols in the third production stage.

FIG. 171(a) shows the case where the decorative symbol variation time is 4 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern show the same behavior, respectively, fluctuating at high speed until 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 1 second, stopping for 1 second, The pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 171(b) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 8 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. Become. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 171(c) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 13 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 171(d) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 17 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then determines the pattern. Become. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 172(a) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 4 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5. It will stop for a second, and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 172(b) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 8 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5 It will stop for a second, and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 172(c) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 13 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then slowing down over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5 It stops for seconds, and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 172(d) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5 It stops for seconds, and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 173(a) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 0.5 seconds, and 1 It will stop for a second, and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 173(b) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 8 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 4.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then determines the pattern. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 5.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 1 second, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 173(c) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 13 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for one second, and is finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 9.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 173(d) shows the case where the decorative symbol variation time is 17 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then confirms the pattern. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 15.5 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 13.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

The variation patterns of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 171 to 173 are default variation patterns. The decorative pattern basically fluctuates according to the above fluctuation pattern.

<6th notice performance>
FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the flow of the sixth advance notice effect. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth advance notice effect. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sixth advance notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The sixth notice effect shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 occurs when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)). It is a performance that can be obtained. In the sixth advance notice performance, the first special zone rushing is performed, and when the said stirring is successful, the player enters the first special zone. The first special zone is a pre-stage special zone that develops into the fourth specific super reach.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “101” is a effect of fading out after the first indication (effect for the first stage) occurs. The effect corresponding to the effect number "102" is that after the first sign (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then fades out. It is a performance. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "103", after the first sign (effect for the first step) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second step) occurs, and then the third sign (effect for the second step) occurs. A sign of bullets (effect for the third hit) is generated, and then fades out.

In the production corresponding to the production number "104", after the first indication (effect for the first step) occurs, the second indication (effect for the second step) occurs, and then the third indication (effect for the second step) occurs. A sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) is generated, then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 7, and then the first special zone rushing is failed. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display device 7 . In the effect corresponding to the effect number "105", after the first sign (effect for the first step) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second step) occurs, and then the third sign (effect for the second step) occurs. A bullet sign (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 7, and an image corresponding to the successful first special zone rushing is displayed. An effect is displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 7, and then the player enters the first special zone. After completing the first special zone, the game moves to the fourth specific super reach.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "106", the third sign (effect for the third step) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rush is displayed on the display device 7, and then, This is an effect in which the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the failure of the first special zone rushing. In the effect corresponding to the effect number “107”, the third indication (effect for the third step) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 7, and the first An image corresponding to the successful entry into the special zone is displayed on the display device 7, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 7, and then the player enters the first special zone. After completing the first special zone, the game moves to the fourth specific super reach.

In the first special zone, the screen is switched between the screen corresponding to the first character and the screen corresponding to the second character, and the decoration pattern is tense in either screen. After that, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and develops into the fourth specific super reach, and in the fourth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the character corresponding to the screen on which the tenpai occurred is performed. In addition, in the first sign, the second sign, and the third sign, instead of (or in addition to) generating a predetermined effect, an image related to the impetus for entering the first special zone is displayed. It may be displayed on the display device 7 . In this case, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "106" and "107", the urge to enter the first special zone suddenly occurs without going through the indication. After the game ball wins in the first start port 120, when the look-ahead effect is performed before the special symbol variation related to the start win is started (when the sixth notice effect occurs via the look-ahead effect) , In the sixth notice effect that occurs at the time of the special symbol change, it is possible to always pass through the sign. On the other hand, when the sixth advance notice effect occurs without going through the look-ahead effect, the sign may or may not be passed through in the sixth notice effect occurring at the time of the special symbol variation.

FIG. 176(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "104" and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "104" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 176(a), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over one second. Then, it stops for 1 second, and the pattern is determined.

FIG. 176(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "105" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 176(b), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

FIG. 176(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "106" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "106" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of decorative symbols is 17 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 176(c), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over one second. Then, it stops for 1 second, and the pattern is determined.

FIG. 176(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "107" and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 176(d), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

Here, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106", the image related to the first special zone rush is displayed on the display device 7 after 11 seconds have passed from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the default variation pattern (see FIGS. 171(d) and 173(d)) in the first production stage and the third production stage, the left decorative pattern is decelerated and stopped at the timing. When the decorative pattern stops, a predetermined stop sound (for example, a sound confirming that it is lost) is output from the speaker 32. In addition, if the stop sound is generated, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the result of the urge to enter the first special zone during the urge to enter the first special zone. In view of this point, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" to "106" are performed,
The decorative symbols are varied according to a dedicated variation pattern (a variation pattern in which the decorative symbols are stopped after the end of the first special zone rush) as shown in (a) to (c). As a result, it is possible to avoid spoiling the success or failure of the rush to enter the first special zone through the stop sound of the decorative pattern. Incidentally, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the decorative symbol stop sound can be a sound peculiar to the loss (a sound that can be generated only in the case of a loss).

Such variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176(a) to (c) are adopted when effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage, When the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the default variation patterns (Fig. 172(d) ), the decorative pattern may be varied. In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 172(d), the timing at which the decorative symbols are decelerated and stopped is delayed. Even if the decorative pattern is changed, there is no concern of spoiling as described above. However, even when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the decorative symbols may be varied according to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176(a) to (c).

It should be noted that there is a variation pattern between when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the first effect stage and when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the third effect stage. may be different. For example, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the third effect stage, each decorative pattern is varied at a higher speed than the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 176(a) to (c). The time may be lengthened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the deceleration time may be shortened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Also, in one production stage (for example, the second production stage) among the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage, the sixth advance notice production is not performed during the execution of the look-ahead production. can be configured to In this case, in a production stage other than the one production stage (for example, the first production stage and the third production stage), the sixth advance notice production may be performed even during execution of the look-ahead production. .

<7th notice performance>
FIG. 177(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh advance notice effect. FIG. 177(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh advance notice effect.

The seventh notice effect shown in FIG. 177 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)). be. In the seventh advance notice effect, a temptation to enter the second special zone is performed, and if the temptation is successful, the game enters the second special zone. The second special zone is a special zone before developing into the fifth specific super reach.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” is that after the screen darkens (the screen freezes) as if the display device 7 is turned off, the screen returns from the freeze and enters the second special zone. An image related to the fanning is displayed on the display device 7, a button image is displayed on the display device 7, the operation of the production button 54 is accepted, and then an image corresponding to failure of the fanning to enter the second special zone is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed in 7. After that, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is that after the screen darkens (the screen freezes) as if the display device 7 is turned off, the image related to the second special zone rushing is restored after returning from the freeze. is displayed on the display device 7, the button image is displayed on the display device 7, the operation of the production button 54 is accepted, and then an image corresponding to the success of the second special zone entry impulse (the second special zone entry impulse A success image) is displayed on the display device 7 . When entering the second special zone, the display device 7 displays a scene of defeating a predetermined enemy character after a predetermined ally character appears. After that, it develops into the fifth specific super reach, and in the fifth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the final battle with the enemy character is performed. The fifth specific super reach is the reach with the highest degree of expectation for a big win (excluding the first specific super reach where the big win is confirmed).

Two timings are provided as timings at which screen freezing may occur. Specifically, the case where the screen freezes 6 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1) and the case where the screen freezes 12 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing 2) are provided. It is Screen freezing occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, compared to timing 1, all effects following freezing occur with a delay of 6 seconds.

Further, a predetermined button valid time is set while the button image is being displayed. When the production button 54 is operated during the button valid time, at the time the production button 54 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button valid time has not expired), the second special zone rushing is started. An effect corresponding to failure or success is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends), it is determined that the impetus to enter the second special zone has failed or succeeded. A corresponding performance is performed.

Although not shown, as an effect corresponding to the success of the second special zone entry promotion (second special zone entry promotion success production), a second special zone entry promotion success image (for example, a second special zone entry related to the title In addition to an effect in which an image and an image related to a predetermined icon) are displayed, an effect in which a predetermined decoration lamp (logo lamp) emits light is performed. The logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo cover is provided at a predetermined portion of the game board unit 10 (for example, the upper side of the display device 7) and is made of translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). Further, the logo cover is decorated in the shape of letters (for example, letters displayed as icons) indicating a logo or the like according to the model. A full-color LED is adopted for the logo lamp, and it is possible to emit multiple kinds of colors including red, blue, and green, and it is possible to change the effect color of the logo cover.

It should be noted that the second special zone rushing success effect (e.g., light emission of a logo lamp) is performed for a predetermined time (3 seconds) regardless of whether the effect button 54 is operated or not or when the operation is performed. Even if the performance button 54 is operated during the button effective time, the time is not extended. Since the timing of entering the second special zone (the timing at which a predetermined ally character appears) is fixed (in the case of timing 1 above, when 30 seconds have passed since the start of variation in the decorative pattern, in the case of timing 2 above, the decorative pattern 36 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), if the effect button 54 is operated during the button effective time, there is a gap between the end of the second special zone rush effect success effect and the timing of entering the second special zone. However, the gap time is compensated for by displaying the predetermined icon in a swaying state.

<Stage change>
FIG. 178(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the stage change announcement effect. FIG. 178(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change announcement effect. FIG. 178(c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs.

In this embodiment, in each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage), basically, while the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), Stay. After shifting to one production stage, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), the one production stage can be shifted to another production stage. On the other hand, when the seventh notice effect occurs, even if the number of special symbol variations performed after shifting to one effect stage does not reach the predetermined number (20 times), the effect stage is always performed. A transition occurs.

In this specification, such transition of production stage is also referred to as "stage change". Note that the production stage after the transition is determined randomly by lottery, but the same production stage as the production stage before the transition may be determined as the production stage after the transition. The transition of the production stage (stage change) is a concept that includes such a case.

When a stage change is performed, a stage change announcement effect shown in FIG. 178 is performed. In the effect (stage change notice effect) corresponding to the effect number "131", after the background transition image corresponding to the effect stage after transition is displayed on the display device 7, an image indicating the name of the effect stage after transition is displayed. This effect is displayed on the display device 7 and resets (restores) the display contents of the counter image on the display device 7 .

As background transition images, a first background transition image, a second background transition image, and a third background transition image are provided. The first background transition image is an image suggesting the first effect stage, and when the effect stage after transition is the first effect stage, the first background transition image is displayed. The second background transition image is an image suggesting the second effect stage, and when the effect stage after transition is the second effect stage, the second background transition image is displayed. The third background transition image is an image suggesting the third effect stage, and when the effect stage after transition is the third effect stage, the third background transition image is displayed.

The counter image is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol variations performed after the occurrence of the stage change. When a stage change occurs, "0/20" is displayed as the post-reset counter image. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol variations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of special symbol variations that occurred after the stage change occurred. The counter image is basically constantly (partially (except while it is being done). As the number of special symbol variations after the occurrence of the stage change increases, the counter image changes like "1/20", "2/20", . . . "19/20".

Here, the counter image (0/20) when a stage change occurs is displayed in various colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, iridescent, or gold). In this embodiment, as described in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of different set values (six levels from "1" to "6") are provided for various data related to the pachinko game. White, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow colors correspond to set values 1 to 6, respectively, and are the colors of the counter image (0/20) displayed when a stage change occurs. is the color corresponding to the setting value. As a result, the set value is suggested by the counter image (0/20).

The method of suggesting the set value by the counter image is not limited to this example, and for example, a counter image including numbers (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the set value may be displayed. For example, when the set value is "6", a counter image of "0/66" may be displayed. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the number of times of special symbol fluctuations related to the stage change generation condition is a specified value (20 times), but the number of times of special symbol fluctuations may be determined by lottery. good. On top of that, for example, when the set value is "6", it is possible to configure so that "66" is relatively likely to be determined as the number of times of the special symbol variation.

Also, when the counter image (0/20) at the time of stage change occurrence is displayed in gold, it is confirmed that the player enters the second special zone. In this regard, as the seventh advance notice effect, an effect corresponding to the effect number "121" and an effect corresponding to the effect number "122" are provided. A stage change always occurs in any of these effects. In addition, the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change can be displayed in gold only when the stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the effect number "122". is configured as

Two timings are provided as the start timing of the stage change announcement effect. Specifically, when the background transition image is displayed from the beginning of the decorative pattern fluctuation (timing 1), and when the background transition image is displayed 6 seconds after the decorative pattern fluctuation starts (timing 2). and is provided. The stage change announcement effect occurs at one of these two timings. At the timing 2, all effects occur with a delay of 6 seconds compared to the timing 1. - 特許庁

When a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh advance notice effect, the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed is the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed. corresponds to That is, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 1) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 1) is performed, the effect number "131" An effect corresponding to (timing 1) is performed. On the other hand, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 2) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 2) is performed, the effect number "131" An effect corresponding to (timing 2) is performed.

On the other hand, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a predetermined number (20 times), basically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 1) is performed. done. In this case, the stage change notice effect is performed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. Exceptionally, when the seventh advance notice effect occurs in a special symbol variation (regular number reaching game) in which a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a predetermined number (20 times). , an effect corresponding to the effect number “131” (timing 2) is performed. That is, the following conditions (I) and (II) are provided as conditions for the occurrence of a stage change, and if both conditions are satisfied in the same special symbol variation, 6 seconds from the start of the decorative symbol variation After the passage of time, a stage change announcement effect will be performed.

Condition (I): The number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times) Condition (II): The seventh advance notice production occurs (production number " 121” or “122” is selected)

The fact that the number of special symbol variations has reached the predetermined number (20 times) can be grasped by the player through the counter image, and when the number of special symbol variations reaches the predetermined number (20 times), It is considered highly probable that the player is conscious of the occurrence of the stage change. In this regard, the configuration as described above makes it possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the stage change notice effect is not performed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols in the specified number reaching game. In this case, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed at the timing 2 described above. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of the seventh notice effect (entering the second special zone) after the stage change notice effect is performed.

Further, as described above, the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage are associated with the first teammate character, the second teammate character, and the third teammate character, respectively. . Although not shown, the game board unit 10 is provided with a first character lamp, a second character lamp, and a third character lamp. The first character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first character decoration part, the second character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second character decoration part, The third character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third character decoration section.

The first character decoration section is provided at a first predetermined location (for example, the right side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10, and the second character decoration section is provided at a second predetermined location (for example, the display device) of the game board unit 10. 7), and the third character decoration part is provided at a third predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, the lower left side of the display device 7). The first character decoration section, the second character decoration section, and the third character decoration section are decorated with decorations representing the first, second, and third ally characters, respectively. . Also, the first character decoration portion, the second character decoration portion, and the third character decoration portion are each formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). The first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp employ full-color LEDs, respectively, and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green. Thereby, the effect colors of the first character decoration section, the second character decoration section, and the third character decoration section can be changed.

In this embodiment, while staying in the first production stage, basically the first character lamp is lit, and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are extinguished. While staying in the second production stage, basically the second character lamp is on, and the first character lamp and the third character lamp are off. While staying in the third production stage, basically the third character lamp is on, and the first character lamp and the second character lamp are off. Although not shown, in the stage change notice effect, one of the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp (character lamp corresponding to the effect stage after transition) blinks.

Specifically, when the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the first character lamp blinks, and when the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the second character lamp blinks. Then, when the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the third character lamp blinks. Such blinking of the character lamp is performed for 1.5 seconds, and the blinking period coincides with the display period of the background transition image. That is, while the first background transition image is displayed, the first character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the second background transition image is displayed, the second character lamp blinks. It blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the third background transition image is being displayed, the third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds.

FIG. 178(c) shows the state of each character lamp before and after the transition from the first production stage to the second production stage. In the previous game of the specified number reaching game, the first character lamp is lit, and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are extinguished. When the specified number reaching game is started, the first character lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state, the second character lamp switches from the extinguished state to the flashing state, and the third character lamp remains in the extinguished state. After that, the second character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds and then turns on. After that, the lighting state of the second character lamp continues and the state of extinguishing the first character lamp and the third character lamp continues until the next stage change notice effect is generated.

After the stage change notice effect is performed, the background corresponding to the effect stage after transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is shifted. It should be noted that, as described above, after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the normal background is restored. Also, after the effect in the fifth specific super ready-to-win that moves via the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is completed, the background returns to the normal background. The normal background is the background corresponding to the production stage after transition (not the production stage before transition).

In the above description, the above conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the stage change generation conditions. Here, regarding the above condition (I), the number of special symbol fluctuations is the case where the variable display in the first special symbol display unit 163 (variable display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120) is performed. However, it is not counted when the variable display (variable display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second start ports 140A and 140B) in the second special symbol display section 164 is performed. Therefore, in the normal game state, even if the variable display in the second special symbol display portion 164 is repeatedly performed by the player playing the game with the right hand, the count is not performed, and in this case, the stage is changed. is never done. In addition, the count is performed when the special symbol variation starts.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the stage change will be performed in a case other than when the above condition (I) or (II) is satisfied. Specifically, in a situation where the number of special symbol variations performed after shifting to one stage has not reached a predetermined number of times (20 times), as an effect performed when special symbol variations are performed , When a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs, a production stage shift lottery before reaching the specified number is performed. Then, on the condition that the lottery for the stage transition to the stage before reaching the specified number is won, the transition of the stage to the stage occurs.

Also, even if the number of special symbol variations performed after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times), there is a possibility that the stage change will not be performed. Specifically, when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs in the specified number reaching game, a lottery holding lottery to suspend production stage transition at the time of reaching the specified number is performed. If the lottery for suspending production stage transition at the time of reaching the specified number is not won, a transition to the production stage occurs in the specified number reaching game. On the other hand, if you win the production stage transition suspension lottery when the specified number is reached, the production stage does not change in the specified number reaching game, and the production stage moves in the next special symbol change of the specified number reaching game. occurs.

<Stage change section holding ball>
179 to 181 are diagrams for explaining the stage change section holding ball.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 120, the sub-variation pattern is selected by lottery in the sub-control circuit 300. FIG. Here, the result of the lottery (sub-fluctuation pattern selection lottery) may differ depending on the production stage to stay during the special symbol fluctuation related to the first start-up winning, and the first start-up winning has occurred. If a stage change occurs during the period from to when the special symbol variation related to the first start opening prize is performed, the special symbol variation (stage change game) in which the stage change is performed will start in the production stage after the transition. not determined until Therefore, for such a first start winning prize, the sub-variation pattern cannot be selected at least until the stage change game is started. The lottery related to the look-ahead effect is performed based on the sub-variation pattern, and the lottery related to the look-ahead effect cannot be performed unless the sub-variation pattern is selected.

In view of this point, in the present embodiment, the concept of "stage change section holding ball" is provided. The stage change section reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start winning prize related to the stage change game, and a special symbol change related to the stage change game after the first start winning prize related to the stage change game occurs. It refers to the reserved ball corresponding to the first starting entrance winning that occurred before the start. For such a stage change section holding ball, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect is not performed. In addition, among the stage change section reserved balls, the reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening winning prize related to the stage change game is particularly called "stage change section relevant reserved ball".

FIG. 179(a) shows a state in which the 16th special symbol variation is being performed after shifting to the current production stage and a state in which there is no reserved ball. In FIG. 179(b), after the state shown in FIG. 179(a), while the 16th special symbol variation is being performed, four game balls enter the first starting port 120. ing. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 17th to 20th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage. In FIG. 179(c), after the state shown in FIG. 179(b), the state in which the 17th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage is shown. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 3rd reserved balls are the 18th to 20th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage. It should be noted that there is no fourth ball on hold.

In FIG. 179(d), after the state shown in FIG. 179(c), while the 17th special symbol variation is being performed, one game ball wins the first start port 120. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the fourth ball on hold is the ball on hold in the stage change section (the ball on hold in the stage change section), and the fourth ball on hold cannot be read ahead.

FIG. 179(e) shows a state in which the 18th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage after the state shown in FIG. 179(d). In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 2nd reserved balls are the 19th to 20th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage, and correspond to the 3rd reserved ball. The special symbol variation to be performed is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. It should be noted that there is no fourth ball on hold.

In FIG. 180(a), after the state shown in FIG. 179(e), while the 18th special symbol variation is being performed, one game ball wins the first start port 120. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the second special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. The fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball cannot perform a look-ahead effect.

In FIG. 180(b), after the state shown in FIG. 180(a), the 18th to 20th special symbol variations are performed, during which two game balls enter the first starting port 120, and then, A stage change occurs, and a state is shown in which the first special symbol variation is performed after shifting to the next production stage. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls are the second to fourth special symbol variations after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 3rd reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 3rd reserved balls cannot be read ahead. It should be noted that there is no fourth ball on hold.

In FIG. 180(c), after the state shown in FIG. 180(b), while the first special symbol variation is being performed, a state in which one game ball wins the first start port 120 is shown. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the fifth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The fourth reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening winning after the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol variation related to the stage change game). Therefore, the fourth held ball is not a stage change section held ball, and the fourth held ball can be read ahead.

In FIG. 180(d), after the state shown in FIG. 180(c), the 1st to 2nd special symbol fluctuations are performed after the stage change occurs. It shows the state in which the third special symbol variation is performed after the ball wins and then the stage change occurs. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the fourth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the first reserved ball cannot perform the look-ahead effect. On the other hand, the special symbol variations corresponding to the second to fourth reserved balls are the fifth to seventh special symbol variations after the stage change occurs. The 2nd to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first starting entrance winning after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the stage change section corresponding to the suspended ball has started. is a sphere. Therefore, the second to fourth held balls are not the stage change section held balls, and the second to fourth held balls can be read ahead.

In FIG. 181(a), in a state where there is no reserved ball, after the 20th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage, while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed , shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first start port 120. FIG. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 21st to 24th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st to 24th special symbol variations are performed in the production stage after the shift. That is, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 1st to 4th special symbol variations after shifting to the next performance stage. As a result, the first to fourth held balls are the stage change section held balls, and the first to fourth held balls cannot be read ahead.

In FIG. 181(b), in a state where there is no reserved ball, after the 20th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage, while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed , shows a state in which one game ball has won the first start port 120. FIG. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current performance stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the first reserved ball cannot be subjected to a look-ahead effect. There are no second to fourth held balls.

In FIG. 181(c), after the state shown in FIG. 181(b), the 20th special symbol variation is performed, then a stage change occurs, and the first special after shifting to the next production stage. It shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first starting port 120 while symbol variation is being performed. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 2nd to 5th special symbol variations after the occurrence of the stage change. The 1st to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first starting entrance winning after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the stage change section corresponding to the suspended ball has started. is a sphere. Therefore, the first to fourth held balls are not the stage change section held balls, and the first to fourth held balls can be read ahead.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 181(a), the number of times of special symbol variation that cannot perform the look-ahead effect is 4, whereas the examples shown in FIGS. 181(b) and (c) Then, the number of times of special symbol variation that cannot perform the look-ahead effect is one time. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of times of special symbol variation that cannot perform the look-ahead effect is not uniformly fixed. The number of times is changed according to the context of.

<First start gate winning process>
FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the processing at the time of winning the first start opening relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the stage change section determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 184 and 185 are diagrams for explaining the look-ahead effect.

182 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) by the sub-control circuit 300 when the game ball has won the first start hole 120. is. The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the game ball has won the first starting hole 120 by receiving the winning command of the first starting hole winning transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

In the first start opening winning process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a stage change section determination process (step S9001). The stage change section determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the stage change section determination process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the stage change section relevant retained ball exists among the retained balls for the upper limit of four times (step S9151). As described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181, the stage change section pending ball is a pending ball corresponding to the first start winning prize in the stage change game (special symbol variation in which stage change is performed). In the processing of step S9151, the sub CPU 301 determines whether information indicating the stage change section relevant held ball (stage change section relevant held ball information) is stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 303 or not.

Specifically, as described above, the work RAM 303 contains the first sub-reserving area (0), the first sub-reserving area (1), the first sub-reserving area (2), the first sub-reserving area (3), and , a first sub-reservation area (4) is provided. Information corresponding to this special symbol variation (the variation) is stored in the first sub-reserving area (0), and the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (4) are reserved. Information corresponding to four special symbol variations is stored. That is, as described above, the first sub-reserving area (0) and the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (4) are the first special symbol start storage areas provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. (0) to correspond to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The winning command for the first start winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the big hit determination and information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbols. When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the information corresponding to these pieces of information is stored in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening winning of this time.

Also, when a stage change is performed in one special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 stores the stage change section relevant retained ball information in the first sub retaining area corresponding to the special symbol variation (see step S9155). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the stage change section relevant held ball information is stored in any of the first sub-reserving areas (1) to (3). In addition, when one special symbol variation ends and the next special symbol variation starts, the sub CPU 301 stores the information stored in the first sub reservation area (1) to the first sub reservation area (4), Shift to the first sub-reserving area (0) and the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (3) respectively. At that time, if the stage change section relevant reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (1), the sub CPU 301 transfers information from the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (0) With the transfer of the stage change section, the relevant held ball information is erased. Therefore, the situation that the stage change section relevant reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (0) does not occur.

In step S9151, if it is determined that the stage change section relevant held ball exists among the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times, the sub CPU 301 reserves the held ball related to the first start winning prize of this time for the stage change section. It is specified as a sphere (step S9152). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information (stage change section reserved ball information) indicating that the ball is a stage change section reserved ball in the first sub reserved area corresponding to the current first start opening winning prize. As a result, for example, in a situation where the stage change section relevant held ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (3), when the first start opening prize corresponding to the fourth held ball occurs, Stage change section reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) (see FIG. 180(a)).

In step S9151, when it is determined that the stage change section relevant held ball does not exist among the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times, the sub CPU 301 changes the special symbol variation counted after shifting to the current production stage. number of times (variation count number of times after stage transition) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize this time (step S9153). The post-transition variation count number is stored in the work RAM 303, and the value is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the transition to the stage does not reach the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start winning prize this time, the sub CPU 301 determines that the special pattern variation corresponding to the first start winning prize of this time It is determined whether or not the seventh notice effect is generated in the symbol variation (step S9154). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern (main variation pattern) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start winning prize is the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to effect number "121" or "122"). It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern corresponding to . Since the winning command for the first starting winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, by receiving the winning command for the first starting winning prize, the sub CPU 301 can recognize the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize this time. Further, the variation pattern includes information corresponding to the effect performed during the special symbol variation. Based on the information, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the seventh advance notice effect is performed during the special symbol variation.

In step S9153, when it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift reaches a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time, or corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time When determining that the seventh advance notice effect will occur in the special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 specifies the pending ball related to the first start opening winning prize this time as the pending ball in the stage change section (step S9155). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores the stage change section relevant reserved ball information in the first sub reserved area corresponding to the current first starting opening winning prize. As a result, for example, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize this time (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball) is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage , the stage change section relevant reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) (see FIG. 179(d)). Also, although not shown, for example, when the seventh notice effect occurs during the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize this time (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball), the first sub-reserved area In (4), the stage change section relevant held ball information is stored.

Although not shown, similarly, a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs during the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start winning prize this time, In addition, when winning the performance stage shift lottery before reaching the prescribed number, the stage change section relevant reserved ball information may be stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the current first start opening winning prize. In addition, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting entrance winning this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the 5th specific Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you do not win the production stage transition reservation lottery when the specified number is reached, in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the first start entrance prize this time , the stage change section relevant held ball information may be stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting entrance winning this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the 5th specific Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you win the production stage transition reservation lottery when the specified number is reached, the stage will be in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the next first start entrance winning It is also possible to store change section pertinent held ball information.

After executing the process of step S9152 or step S9155, or when it is determined in step S9153 that the seventh notice effect does not occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening prize this time, the sub CPU 301 executes this subroutine. finish.

The stage change section determination processing performed in step S9101 of FIG. 182 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 182 .

After executing the process of step S9101, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pending ball related to the current first starting entrance winning is the stage change section pending ball (including the stage change section pending ball) (step S9102). When the sub CPU 301 determines that the ball on hold related to the first start opening winning prize this time is the ball on hold for the stage change section, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the reserved ball related to the current first start winning prize is not the stage change section reserved ball, the sub CPU 301 sets the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting winning prize to a fixed value. It is determined whether or not they correspond (step S9103). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, the first jackpot that is relatively advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot with a short time) is relatively A disadvantageous second jackpot (for example, a jackpot with a small number of rounds or a jackpot with no short working hours) may be provided. On top of that, the probability that a predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) is selected when the first jackpot is achieved and the probability that the predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) is selected when the second jackpot is achieved are the same, while the probability of selecting a predetermined variation pattern (unspecified jackpot) in the case of the first jackpot and the predetermined variation pattern (unspecified jackpot) in the case of the second jackpot are selected. It may be configured to be different from the probability. In this case, the predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) and the predetermined variation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) may perform the special symbol variation with the same variation pattern. In the processing of step S9103, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning is a variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value) other than a predetermined variation pattern (indefinite jackpot). or not. When the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start opening winning prize is not the variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start winning prize is the variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 301 determines that the timing at which the first start winning prize occurred this time is It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined time (for example, time corresponding to 41 frames) from the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed (step S9104). When it is determined that the timing at which the current first start opening winning prize is generated is within a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing of the occurrence of the first starting opening winning this time is not within a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 301 performs the sub variation pattern (second half) lottery process. Execute (step S9105). The sub-variation pattern is composed of the first half and the second half, and the main variation pattern (variation pattern of the special symbols) is also composed of the first half and the latter half. In the process of step S9105, the sub CPU 301 controls the main variation pattern information (information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol) included in the winning command of the first start winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 200, and the current effect The content of the second half of the sub-fluctuation pattern is determined by performing a lottery based on random numbers based on the stage.

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes a sub variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9106). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random value, based on the sub-variation pattern (second half) and the main variation pattern determined in step S9105 and the current production stage, the first half of the sub-variation pattern. Determine content. Information indicating the current performance stage is stored in a performance stage flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303. can be recognized.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (step S9107). When determining that the second special symbol variation is being displayed, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the second special lottery corresponding to the second special symbol variation is a loss or a small hit (step S9108). ). When determining that the result of the second special lottery is neither a loss nor a small win (a big win), the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine. In this embodiment, as in the first pachinko game machine, a method (simultaneous variation type) is adopted in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Therefore, a situation in which a big hit related to the second special symbol suddenly occurs is assumed, but by executing the processing of steps S9107 and S9108, even in such a situation, unintended game characteristics may occur. It seems that there is no

If it is determined in step S9107 that the second special symbol is not being changed and displayed, or if it is determined in step S9108 that the result of the second special lottery is a loss or a small hit (not a big hit), the sub CPU 301 , executes a look-ahead effect lottery process (step S9109). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random value, based on the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106, regarding the first start-up winning this time (for the sub-variation pattern ) Determines whether or not to generate a look-ahead effect, and determines the content of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 191) when the look-ahead effect is to be generated (step S9109).

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a prefetch effect will occur for the current first starting opening prize, based on the result of the prefetch effect lottery process in step S9109 (step S9110). When judging that the prefetch effect will occur for the current first starting opening prize, the sub CPU 301 sets the prefetch flag to ON (step S9111). The look-ahead flag is a flag indicating that a look-ahead effect is generated for one first starting opening winning, and is set off when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning starts. As a result, the result of the first special lottery related to the first start-up winning is suggested between the occurrence of the first start-up winning and the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start-up winning. An effect (read-ahead effect) will be performed.

When it is determined in step S9110 that the look-ahead effect will not occur for the current first starting opening winning, or after executing the process of step S9111, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the processing of steps S9109 to S9111 may be configured as follows. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect will not occur for the first start-up prize this time, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the first start-up prize this time is a reserved ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect. do. The hold ball that can perform the look-ahead effect is a specific sub-variation pattern (for example, sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 190), and based on the main variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value It is a reserved ball for which production is performed by the determined sub-variation pattern. If the sub CPU 301 determines that the reserved ball related to the current first starting opening prize is a reserved ball that can perform the prefetch effect, the sub CPU 301 stores the prefetching in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening prize Enabled information (information indicating that the read-ahead effect can be performed) is stored. When the sub CPU 301 determines that the reserved ball related to the current first starting opening prize is a reserved ball that cannot perform the prefetching effect, the sub CPU 301 stores the prefetching in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening prize this time. Impossible information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect cannot be performed) is stored.

In FIG. 184 (a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 120 while one special symbol variation is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is read ahead. It shows a state in which the enabled information is stored. In FIG. 184(b), after the state shown in FIG. 184(a), one game ball enters the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second game ball It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. Figure 185
In (a), one game ball wins in the first start port 120 while one special symbol variation is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball Prefetchable information is stored. In FIG. 185(b), after the state shown in FIG. 185(a), one game ball enters the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second game ball It shows a state in which prefetching disabled information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. In FIG. 185(c), after the state shown in FIG. 185(b), one game ball enters the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third game ball It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball.

When it is determined that a prefetch effect will occur for the current first start win, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch effect for the first start win in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start win. Information indicating that (prefetch relevant information) is stored. And, if the prefetchable information is stored in all the first sub-reserving areas (excluding the first sub-reserving area (0)) corresponding to the first starting opening winning before the first starting opening winning this time, the sub The CPU 301 rewrites the read-ahead enabled information stored in these first sub-reserve areas to read-ahead information. The prefetching information is information indicating that the prefetching effect is performed until the special symbol variation corresponding to the first sub-reserving area in which the prefetching information is stored is started.

In FIG. 184(c), after the state shown in FIG. 184(b), one game ball enters the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third game ball It shows a state in which the prefetched information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. At this time, prefetching information is stored instead of prefetchable information in the first sub-holding areas corresponding to the first and second holding balls. As a result, while the special symbol variations corresponding to the first and second held balls are being performed, the look-ahead performance suggesting the result of the big hit judgment relating to the third held ball is performed. In addition, in FIG. 184(d), after the state shown in FIG. 184(c), one game ball enters the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and four It shows a state in which the read-ahead disabled information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the eye-holding sphere. Thus, when the prefetch relevant information is stored in the first sub-reserving area corresponding to one reserved ball, the pre-reading disabled information is stored in the first sub-reserving area corresponding to the next reserved ball.

In addition, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect will occur for the first start-up winning this time, the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0 )), if there is a first sub-reserving area in which pre-reading disabling information is stored, there are a plurality of first sub-reserving areas in which pre-reading disabling information is stored In this case, the read-ahead enabled information stored in the first sub-reservation area with a larger number than the first sub-reservation area with the largest number is rewritten to the pre-reading information. In FIG. 185(d), after the state shown in FIG. 185(c), one game ball enters the first starting port 120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the fourth game ball It shows a state in which the prefetched information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. At this time, prefetching information is stored instead of prefetchable information in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the third holding ball. As a result, while the special symbol variations corresponding to the first and second reserved balls are being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the third reserved ball is performed. While being held, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the big hit determination related to the fourth held ball is performed.

It should be noted that, if the pending ball related to the first starting point winning prize this time is a stage change section pending ball, the first sub-reserving area corresponding to the first starting point winning prize of this time may be stored with unpredictable information. good. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 180(d), when it is determined to generate the prefetch effect for the fourth reserved ball, the prefetch stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the first reserved ball It is also possible to rewrite the prefetchable information stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the second to third holding balls to the prefetching information while the impossibility information remains as it is. In this case, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to third reserved balls cannot be performed. While being performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the big hit determination relating to the fourth ball on hold is performed.

Alternatively, if the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize this time is the reserved ball in the stage change section, while prefetching disabled information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening prize this time, If the reserved ball related to the first starting entrance winning this time is a stage change section holding ball other than the stage change section concerned holding ball, the first sub-reserving area corresponding to the first starting entrance winning this time Prefetchable information may be stored. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 180(d), if it is determined to generate a look-ahead effect for the fourth held ball, it is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first to third held balls. It is also possible to rewrite the pre-readable information that is currently read-ahead information to pre-read information. In this case, while the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 3rd held balls are being performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the big hit judgment relating to the 4th held ball is performed. Become.

In addition, as described above, the first sub reservation area is provided in the work RAM 303 and corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area provided in the main RAM 203 . Information similar to the information stored in the first sub-reserving area of the work RAM 303 can be configured to be stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 as well. In this case, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 303 is controlled to be generated by the sub-control circuit 300 according to the information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203. is possible. Further, the main control circuit 200 may determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 . In addition, regarding the information stored in the first sub-reserving area of the work RAM 303, it may be configured such that a suggestive effect corresponding to the information is performed to such an extent that the player can recognize it.

<Processing at the start of the first special symbol variation>
FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the process at the start of the first special symbol variation related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing stage count processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the stage change occurrence lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern selection table. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table.

In the first special symbol variation start time process shown in FIG. 186, in the normal mode (see FIG. 137(a)), after the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special symbol variation related to the start winning starts. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 . Also, prior to executing the processing shown in FIG. (0), and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (3).

In the first special symbol variation start processing, first, the sub CPU 301 executes stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing (step S9201). The stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not this special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode (step S9251). When determining that this special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9252). The stage change flag is a flag indicating that the condition for generating a stage change is satisfied, and when the stage change flag is set to ON, the stage change is performed. After executing the process of step S9252, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining in step S9251 that this special symbol variation is not the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 301 executes stage count processing (step S9253). The stage count process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the stage count process, first, the sub CPU 301 adds 1 to the value of the post-transition variation counter (step S9261). The value of the post-stage shift variation counter indicates the number of first special symbol variations counted after shifting to the current production stage (post-stage shift variation count number), and is stored in the work RAM 303 . The sub CPU 301 adds the value of the post-stage change variation counter each time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display unit 163) is performed, while the second special symbol variation (second special symbol display 164) is performed, the value of the post-transition fluctuation number counter is not incremented.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the post-stage change fluctuation counter is 20 (step S9262). If the sub CPU 301 determines that the value of the post-transition fluctuation number counter is not 20, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the value of the post-transition variation number counter is 20, it sets the specified number reaching flag to ON (step S9263). The specified number arrival flag is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition has reached the number of special symbol fluctuations (20 times) related to the conditions for generating a stage change. When the specified number arrival flag is set to ON when one special symbol variation starts, basically (unless it wins the production stage transition suspension lottery when reaching the specified number (see step S9273 in FIG. 189)) , Stage change will be performed in the special symbol variation.

After executing the process of step S9263, the sub CPU 301 sets the post-stage change fluctuation number counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage change fluctuation number counter) (step S9264). After that, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The stage count processing performed in step S9253 of FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 187 .

After executing the process of step S9253, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 182) is set to ON (step S9254). When determining that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes stage change occurrence lottery processing (step S9255). The stage change occurrence lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the stage change occurrence lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the next change change flag is set to ON (step S9271). The change flag at the time of the next change is that the change count number after the stage transition in one special pattern change has reached the number of special pattern changes (20 times) related to the conditions for the occurrence of the stage change, but the occurrence of the stage change is the next special pattern. This is a flag indicating that the change is carried over (see step S9279). When determining that the next change change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9272). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9272, the sub CPU 301 sets the change flag at the next change to OFF (step S9273), and terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9271 that the next change change flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the specified number reaching flag (see step S9263 in FIG. 188) is set to ON (step S9274). When it is determined that the specified number reach flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs during this special symbol variation. It is determined whether or not (step S9275). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation pattern in the current special symbol variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a specific super reach. As described above, the winning command for the first start winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the sub CPU 301, based on the information, determines the current special symbol. It is possible to recognize effects that may occur during fluctuations.

When it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 executes a production stage shift suspension lottery upon reaching the specified number (step S9276). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the lottery for suspending production stage shift upon reaching the prescribed number is won (step S9277).

When it is determined in step S9275 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol variation, or when it is determined in step S9277 that the production stage transition suspension lottery at the time of reaching the specified number is not won, the sub CPU 301 A stage change flag is set to ON (step S9278). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9278, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding production stage shift upon reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the next change change flag to ON (step S9279). As a result, the stage change will be performed in the next special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9279, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9274 that the specified number reaching flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect will occur during this special symbol variation (step S9280). In this process, the sub CPU 301 refers to the process result of step S9154 in FIG. In the process of step S9154, when the sub CPU 301 determines that the seventh notice effect will occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning, in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening winning, Information (seventh notice effect generation information) indicating that the seventh notice effect is generated during the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize is stored. At the time of executing the process of step S9280, the information stored in the first sub-reserving area has been shifted to the first sub-reserving area (0). In the processing of step S9280, sub CPU 301 determines that the seventh advance notice effect will occur during the current special symbol change when the seventh notice effect occurrence information is stored in the first sub reservation area (0).

When determining that the seventh notice effect will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9281). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9281, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the seventh notice effect does not occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 selects a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) during this special symbol variation. ) occurs (step S9282). This process is similar to the process of step S9275. When it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 executes a lottery for transition to the production stage before reaching the specified number (step S9283). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers. At that time, the sub CPU 301 changes the winning probability of the effect stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number according to the value of the post-stage transition variation counter.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is won (step S9284). If the sub CPU 301 determines that the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is won, it sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9285). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. If it is determined in step S9282 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol variation, if it is determined in step S9284 that the production stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number is not won, or the processing of step S9285 is performed. After executing, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The stage change generation lottery process performed in step S9255 of FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 187 .

When determining in step S9254 that the prefetch flag is set to ON, or after executing the process of step S9255, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine. In addition, when the 7th advance notice effect occurs during this special symbol variation, all the pending balls existing at the time when the special symbol variation of this time is started are stage change section pending balls (see FIG. 183). Since no look-ahead effect is performed for the stage change section reserved ball (see FIG. 182), when the seventh notice effect occurs during this special symbol variation, the determination result of step S9254 is always "NO".

The stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing performed in step S9201 of FIG. 186 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 186 .

After executing the process of step S9201, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 189) is set to ON (step S9202). ).

When determining that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes stage change destination lottery processing (step S9203). In this process, the sub CPU 301 refers to the stage change destination lottery table and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the effect stage after the transition due to the stage change. Although not shown, in the stage change destination lottery table, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be the production stage after transition is defined in association with the random value range. It is As the stage change lottery tables, a stage change lottery table for the first production stage, a stage change lottery table for the second production stage, and a stage change lottery table for the third production stage are provided. The random value ranges are different in the stage change destination lottery table. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 refers to the stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage to perform a lottery, and when the current production stage is the second production stage. draws a lottery with reference to the stage change lottery table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, lottery with reference to the stage change lottery table for the third production stage. I do.

As a result, when the production stage after transition is determined, the sub CPU 301 performs control to shift to the determined production stage. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 updates the information stored in the production stage flag storage area to information corresponding to the production stage after transition. Then, the sub CPU 301 sets the post-stage change fluctuation number counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage change fluctuation number counter) (step S9204).

When it is determined that the stage change flag is not set to ON in step S9202, the sub CPU 301 determines the sub-variation pattern (step S9105 in FIG. 182 and (see step S9106) is determined (step S9205). When it is determined that the sub-variation pattern is determined when the first starting opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs, the sub CPU 301 determines when the first starting opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs. (at the time when the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182 is executed) is the same as the current production stage (step S9206).

If it is determined that the sub-variation pattern (see step S9105 and step S9106 in FIG. 182) is not determined when the first start opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs in step S9205, or in step S9206 It was determined that the production stage when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol variation occurred (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182) and the current production stage are not the same. In this case, the sub CPU 301 executes a sub-variation pattern (second half) lottery process (step S9207), and further executes a sub-variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9208). The processing in steps S9207 and S9208 is the same as the processing in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

In step S9206, when the first starting opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182), the production stage and the current production stage are the same. If so, or after executing the process of step S9208, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 182) is set to ON (step S9209).

When determining that the look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes sub variation pattern replacement processing (step S9210). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of replacing the already determined sub-variation pattern with another sub-variation pattern as necessary. A specific description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. FIG.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 190, the main variation pattern and the sub-variation pattern are defined in association with each other. As the main variation patterns, main variation pattern "1", main variation pattern "2", main variation pattern "3", and so on are provided. For example, although not shown, the main variation pattern "10" is the main variation pattern (see step S9154 in FIG. 183) corresponding to the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to effect number "121" or "122"). there is One main variation pattern is associated with a plurality of sub-variation patterns, and when the one main variation pattern is selected, any sub-variation pattern out of the plurality of sub-variation patterns selected. For example, in the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182, the sub CPU 301 receives information indicating that the main variation pattern is "1" as the variation pattern command from the main control circuit 200. When the sub variation pattern One sub-variation pattern is selected from "1" to "30" (30 types of sub-variation patterns).

The sub-variation patterns include a sub-variation pattern (read-ahead possible sub-variation pattern) that can perform a look-ahead effect and a sub-variation pattern (a look-ahead impossible sub-variation pattern) that cannot perform a look-ahead effect. FIG. 190 also shows whether each sub-variation pattern is classified into a pre-readable sub-variation pattern or a non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. For example, sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns, and sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns. For example, if it is determined in step S9110 in FIG. 182 that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start-up winning this time, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a look-ahead possible sub-variation pattern. For example, read-ahead enabled information (information indicating that a read-ahead effect can be performed) is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning prize of this time. On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a non-prefetchable sub-variation pattern, the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the first start opening prize of this time is filled with non-prefetchable information (performing a prefetch effect information indicating that it is not possible to

After that, when the first starting opening winning occurs and the look-ahead effect occurs for the first starting opening winning (when the look-ahead flag is set to ON in step S9111), description will be made using FIGS. 184 and 185. As described above, the sub CPU 301 rewrites the read-ahead enabled information stored in the first sub-reserve area to the read-ahead information. In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 186, the sub CPU301 is stored in the first sub-reserving area (first sub-reserving area (0)) corresponding to this special symbol variation (step S9105 and If the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9106 is a pre-readable sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is replaced. On the other hand, the sub CPU301, when prefetching disabled information is stored in the first sub reservation area (first sub reservation area (0)) corresponding to this special symbol variation (sub determined in step S9105 and step S9106 If the fluctuation pattern is a non-prefetchable sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is not replaced.

In the sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table shown in FIG. 191, for each sub-fluctuation pattern before replacement, the sub-fluctuation pattern after replacement is defined in association with the look-ahead effect pattern. As the sub-variation pattern before replacement, only the pre-readable sub-variation pattern is specified among the pre-readable sub-variation pattern and the non-prefetchable sub-variation pattern. The look-ahead effect pattern indicates the type of look-ahead effect, and is determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 182). The sub-variation pattern after replacement is a sub-variation pattern (pre-reading sub-variation pattern) corresponding to the look-ahead effect. In FIG. 191, as an example of the look-ahead sub-variation pattern, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "50" corresponding to the main variation pattern "1" are shown. Prefetching sub-variation patterns "31" to "35" are associated with pre-readable sub-variation patterns "1" to "5", and pre-reading sub-variation patterns "36" to "40" are pre-readable sub It is associated with the fluctuation patterns "6" to "10", and the pre-reading sub-variation patterns "41" to "45" are associated with the pre-readable sub-variation patterns "11" to "15". The sub-variation patterns for "46" to "50" are associated with the pre-readable sub-variation patterns "16" to "20".

In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 186, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation pattern replacement table to replace the already determined sub-variation pattern (prefetchable sub-variation pattern) with a new look-ahead sub-variation pattern. sub-fluctuation pattern. For example, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182 is the sub-variation pattern "1", and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in the pre-reading effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 182) is the pre-reading effect pattern. In the case of A, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern “31” as the sub-variation pattern after replacement. Also, the sub-fluctuation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 182 is the sub-fluctuation pattern "10", and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in the pre-reading effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 182) is the pre-reading effect pattern. In the case of B, the sub CPU 301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern “37” as the sub-variation pattern after replacement.

Thus, for example, when the main variation pattern "1" is selected, one of the sub variation patterns "1" to "50" can be selected, but the sub variation pattern selection table , the look-ahead sub-variation patterns “31” to “50” are not defined. As a result, in both cases where the look-ahead effect is performed and when the look-ahead effect is not performed, it is possible to select the sub-variation pattern by a common method in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the processing related to determination of the variation pattern. On top of that, when the look-ahead effect is performed, by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table, by replacing it with the look-ahead sub-variation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead effect pattern, the sub-variation pattern that matches the look-ahead effect It is possible to change the decorative pattern with . The sub-variation pattern selection table and sub-variation pattern replacement table are stored in the program ROM 202 .

Also, although not shown, as sub-variation pattern selection tables, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern selection table for the third production stage are provided. It is In these sub-variation pattern selection tables, the random value range assigned to each sub-variation pattern is different from each other, and the sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the first production stage, only in the second production stage A sub-variation pattern that can be selected and a sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the third production stage are set respectively. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 selects the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, and the current production stage is the second production stage. , the sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage A sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the pattern selection table.

Similarly, the sub-variation pattern replacement table includes a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the third production stage. is provided. In these sub-variation pattern replacement tables, the correspondence relationships between the sub-variation patterns before replacement and the sub-variation patterns after replacement are different from each other, and some of the types of the look-ahead effect patterns are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 301 replaces the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, so that the current production stage becomes the second production stage. , the sub-variation pattern is replaced by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage The sub-variation pattern is replaced by referring to the pattern replacement table.

If it is determined in step S9209 that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, or after executing the processing in step S9210, the sub CPU 301 converts the already determined sub-fluctuation pattern into a sub-fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation scale. A replacement process is performed (step S9211). In this process, the sub CPU301, if the already determined sub-variation pattern is a normal system sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern corresponding to the default variation pattern shown in FIGS. 171 to 173), changes as necessary change the time. For example, at the time when the first starting opening prize corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation occurs, the first starting opening prize corresponds to the fourth reserved ball, and the sub-variation corresponding to the 4 second fluctuation A pattern is selected, but after that, when all of the suspension is digested and the special symbol variation is reached, processing is performed to replace with a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the 13-second variation.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 189) is set to ON (step S9212). When determining that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 executes stage change wipe color lottery processing (step S9213). The stage change wipe color lottery process will be described below.

As described above, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol variations (variation count after stage transition) reaching a predetermined number of times (20 times), the effect corresponding to effect number "131" (Fig. 178) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. Also, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh advance notice effect, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (see FIG. 177) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. In addition, after the effect in the fifth specific super reach that transitions via the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is completed, the display device 7 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after transition (first effect stage) is displayed. , second production stage, or third production stage).

A predetermined wipe image is displayed on the display device 7 when transitioning to the background corresponding to the production stage after transition in this manner. The wipe image can be displayed in various colors (default color, gold, or special color). Specifically, when the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the wipe image for the first production stage in default color, the wipe image for the first production stage in gold, or the first production stage in special color A wipe image is displayed. When the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the wipe image for the second production stage in default color, the wipe image for the second production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the second production stage in special color is displayed. Is displayed. When the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the wipe image for the third production stage in default color, the wipe image for the third production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the third production stage in special color is displayed. Is displayed. In the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 301 refers to the stage change wipe color lottery table and performs lottery based on random values to determine the color of the wipe image. Although not shown, in the stage change wipe color lottery table, various colors (default color , gold, and special colors) and random number ranges are defined in association with each other.

Stage change wipe color lottery tables include a first stage change wipe color lottery table, a second stage change wipe color lottery table, a third stage change wipe color lottery table, a fourth stage change wipe color lottery table, and a fifth stage. A change wipe color lottery table and a sixth stage change wipe color lottery table are provided, and these stage change wipe color lottery tables have different random value ranges. The 1st stage change wipe color lottery table to the 6th stage change wipe color lottery table respectively correspond to the setting values "1" to "6", and the sub CPU 301 performs the stage change corresponding to the current setting value. A wipe color lottery table is referenced. In each stage change wipe color lottery table, the random value range for the special color is set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the special color will be selected. For example, when the setting value is "4", the probability of displaying a special color wipe image is higher than when the setting value is "2". , the probability that the special color wipe image is displayed is higher. As a result, the set value is suggested through the appearance frequency of the special color wipe image.

In the above, as an example, when the stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh notice effect (including the case where the seventh notice effect occurs in the game reaching the specified number), the effect number "121" It has been explained that the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed before the corresponding effect or effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. However, in this case, only the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" may be performed, and the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" may not be performed. In addition, both the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" and the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" are performed. Even if the wipe image is not displayed after the corresponding effect is performed, and the wipe image is displayed only after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. good. When adopting such a configuration, the wipe image is displayed only once in one stage change. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the wipe image.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, when a predetermined look-ahead effect occurs, the stage change wipe color lottery process may be performed during the previous special symbol variation of the stage change game. The predetermined look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance that can be performed during the previous special pattern variation of the stage change game when a variation pattern corresponding to the seventh advance notice performance is determined as a main variation pattern in the stage change game. In the look-ahead effect, the game freezes in a state where a predetermined image is displayed, and shifts to the stage change game in that state. In this case, in the stage change game, the processing of steps S9212 and S9213 may not be performed (wipe image may be displayed). Also, the predetermined look-ahead effect may be configured to occur only in one effect stage (for example, the second effect stage).

When it is determined in step S9212 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect lottery process corresponding to the effect stage (step S9214). In this process, the sub CPU301, by performing a lottery based on the random number, finally determined sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern determined by executing the process of step S9211), and the current production stage Based on the above, a process for determining the specific content of the effect is performed. For example, if the current effect stage is the first effect stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the first effect stage announcement lottery process (see FIG. 138). Further, when the current production stage is the second production stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the second production stage announcement content lottery process, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub CPU 301 executes the third production stage. A performance stage announcement content lottery process is executed. In the second production stage notice content lottery processing and the third production stage notice content lottery processing, as in the first production stage notice content lottery processing, the special symbol variation related to the first start opening prize is based on the sub-variation pattern. The content of the performance to be performed during the event is determined. After executing the process of step S9214, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Basic screen display in each production stage>
FIG. 192(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first production stage. FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the second effect stage. FIG. 192(c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the third production stage.

As shown in FIG. 192(a), in the first effect stage, a first effect stage name image 9101 indicating the name of the first effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7. FIG. As shown in FIG. 192(b), in the second effect stage, a second effect stage name image 9102 indicating the name of the second effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7 . As shown in FIG. 192(c), in the third effect stage, a third effect stage name image 9103 indicating the name of the third effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 7 . The first production stage name image 9101, the second production stage name image 9102, and the third production stage name image 9103 are displayed at the same positions on the display device 7, respectively.

Also, a counter image 9104 is displayed on the display device 7 in each production stage. As described above, the counter image 9104 is an image corresponding to the number of times of special symbol fluctuations (the number of post-stage change fluctuation counts) performed after the occurrence of the stage change. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol variations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of fluctuation counts after the current stage transition.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(a), in the first effect stage, a pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, a pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and a pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 are displayed. ing. As described above, the pseudo-continuous-step notification bell image 9021, the pseudo-continuous-step notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo-continuous-step notification cherry image 9023 are either dark or bright. (see FIG. 170). In addition, the pseudo-continuous-stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo-continuous-stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo-continuous-stage notification cherry image 9023 are always displayed while staying in the first production stage. It has become.

Specifically, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not occurring, or when the pseudo-continuous effect is occurring and the stage of the pseudo-continuous stage is "pseudo 1", the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-continuous stage notification The watermelon image 9022 for continuous stage notification and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed darkly. When the pseudo-continuous effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-continuous stage is "pseudo-2", the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed brightly, and the pseudo-continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 and the pseudo-continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 are displayed brightly. A cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. When the pseudo-continuous effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-continuous stage is "pseudo 3", the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 are displayed brightly, A cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. In the case of developing into super ready-to-win via the pseudo continuous effect, during the super ready-to-win, pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 are displayed. displayed brightly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(b), a stock timer image 9110 is displayed in the second production stage. The stock timer image 9110 is an image corresponding to any numerical value (“PLAY TIME”) from “00:00” to “99:99”. "PLAY TIME" indicates the length of time during which super reach is performed, and the effect in super reach is performed over the time corresponding to "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110. Such "PLAY TIME" is added (stocked) according to the effect (time stock notice) performed during the second effect stage.

Although not shown, as the time stock notice, a first time stock notice, a second time stock notice, and a third time stock notice are provided. In the first time stock notice, a predetermined item lamp lights up, a predetermined item decoration part (movable part) rattles, and at the same time the item decoration part jumps forward, a numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" is displayed. increases. The item lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the item decoration. The item decoration portion is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 10 (for example, as part of the second character decoration portion), and is made of translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). Also, the item decoration portion is decorated with a predetermined item. In the second time stock notice, there is no light emission of the item lamp and rattling movement of the item decoration portion as in the first time stock notice, and the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" suddenly increases. In the third time stock notice, after a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, an image is displayed in which the effect is absorbed by the item decoration portion, and at the same time, the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" increases.

Also, the display pattern of the stock timer image 9110 corresponds to the display pattern of the background image. When "00:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the default pattern. When any numerical value from "05:00" to "30:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with the effect level 1 pattern. When any numerical value from "35:00" to "60:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with the effect level 2 pattern. When any numerical value from "65:00" to "95:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with effect level 3 pattern. When "99:99" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with the effect level MAX pattern. As the stock timer image 9110, "00:01" to "04:99", "30:01" to "34:99", "60:01" to "64:99", "95:01" to The numerical value of "99:98" is not displayed.

The effect level 1 pattern has a higher chance of winning a big hit than the default pattern, the effect level 2 pattern has a higher chance of winning a big win than the effect level 1 pattern, and the effect level 3 pattern has a higher chance of winning than the effect level 2 pattern. In comparison, the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and the effect level MAX pattern has the highest degree of expectation for a big win. In effect level 1 pattern to effect level 3 pattern, a background image based on orange is displayed, and the higher the effect level, the more flashy the display mode. In the effect level MAX pattern, a background image based on red is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(c), in the third production stage, a character appearance meter image 9120 is displayed. The character appearance meter image 9120 includes a left character appearance meter image 9120L and a right character appearance meter image 9120R. The left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are images imitating meters.

Specifically, the left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are respectively in the initial display mode (the meter is not charged), the level 1 display mode (the meter is charged by one level), Level 2 display mode (2 levels of meter is full), Level 3 display mode (3 levels of meter is full), and Level MAX display mode (meter is full) It can be displayed in any manner.

The meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 accumulates in accordance with the effect (the meter UP notice) performed during the third effect stage. In the meter UP notice, there are cases where the meter accumulates by one stage, two stages, and three stages. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L becomes the level MAX display mode, the left character 9121L appears on the display device 7 (enters a standby state). When the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R becomes the level MAX display mode, the right character 9121R appears on the display device 7 (enters a standby state).

When only the left character 9121L of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enters the standby state, the super reach (super reach for the left character) corresponding to the left character 9121L develops. When only the right character 9121R of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enters the standby state, the super reach (right character super reach) corresponding to the right character 9121R develops. When both the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enter the standby state, the super reach (super reach for both characters) corresponding to both characters develops.

In the left character super reach, when the right character 9121R appears on the display device 7, it shifts to both character super reach. transition to Further, when the first teammate character appears on the display device 7 in the super reach for the left character, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Similarly, when the first teammate character appears on the display device 7 in the super reach for the right character, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Also, in the double-sided character super reach, if the button repeatedly hitting effect is successful, it develops into a predetermined super reach. These predetermined super reach are the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 154(a)) which is shifted when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first production stage.

Note that the silhouettes of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are displayed on the display device 7 even when the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full. Specifically, when the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed in the default state on the display device 7, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R. is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed on the display device 7 in the default state. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 1 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L blinks in blue, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 1 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R blinks in blue.

When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 2 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L blinks in green, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 2 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R blinks in green. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 3 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is lit and displayed in red, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 3 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is illuminated in red. In this way, as the level of the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 increases, the degree of expectation for a big win increases.

Note that even if the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the left character 9121L to the right character 9121R may enter the standby state. Specifically, when the decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the screen of the display device 7 may be displayed in a rotating mode, and after the rotation is completed, various icons may be stopped and displayed. Icons that can be stopped and displayed in this manner include a left character icon, a right character icon, a "cherry" icon, and the like. When the left character icon is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the left character super reach. When the right character icon is stopped and displayed, it shifts to right character super reach. When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed, the predetermined super reach is performed.

<8th notice production>
FIG. 193(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 193(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 193(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The eighth notice effect shown in FIG. 193 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the second effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)). The eighth notice effect can occur only in the second effect stage.

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "151" to "155", first, a sign that the decorative symbols will be tense (becomes a ready-to-win mode) is generated. The sign is the second character lamp (Fig. 178
(c)) flashes, suggesting that the ten-pie swing will occur. It should be noted that, in the above description, it is assumed that the corresponding character lamp is always lit while staying in each production stage. However, in the game other than the specified number reaching game, the corresponding character lamp may basically be extinguished. In such a configuration, the indication may be that the second character lamp lights up.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “151” is a effect that fades out after the occurrence of the sign. In the effect corresponding to the effect number “152”, after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the fanning of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai is displayed on the display device 7 . After that, an image corresponding to the failure of the ten pie fanning (failed ten pie fanning image) is displayed on the display device 7, and the display device 7 becomes a wipe display to return to the normal background. In the effect corresponding to the effect number “153”, after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the fanning (tenpai fanning) indicating whether or not the decorative pattern will become tenpai is displayed on the display device 7 . , and after that, an image corresponding to the success of the ten-pie fanning (ten-pie fanning successful image) is displayed on the display device 7 . When the tenpai agitation success image is displayed, after that, it shifts to the announcement after the tenpai success.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number “154”, after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the influence of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai is displayed on the display device 7 . , and after that, an image corresponding to the success of the ten-pie-fighting (successful ten-pie-fighting image) is displayed on the display device 7, and "PLAY TIME" is stocked. When the tenpai agitation success image is displayed, after that, it shifts to the announcement after the tenpai success. In the effect corresponding to the effect number “155”, after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the fanning (tenpai fanning) indicating whether or not the decorative pattern will become tenpai is displayed on the display device 7 . , and after that, an image corresponding to the success of the ten-pie fanning (ten-pie fanning successful image) is displayed on the display device 7 . When the tenpai inflaming success image is displayed, it shifts to the intense heat notice after that.

The predetermined movable accessory that operates in the presentation corresponding to the presentation numbers "152" to "155" is the same movable accessory that operates in the notice after the icon stops (see FIG. 153). Further, when the ten-pie-flavoring success image is displayed in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "153" to "155", the decoration pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode. In addition, after the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "153" and "154" are performed, the transition is made to the advance notice after the success of the tenpai, and when the notice is completed after the success of the tenpai, the sixth specific super reach, the seventh specific super reach, and Develop into any super-reach of the first specified super-reach. In the notice after the success of Tenpai, a connecting effect corresponding to the development destination Super Reach will be performed.

In particular, when it develops to the 6th specific super reach, an image showing the title of the 6th specific super reach is displayed on the display device 7 in the announcement after the success of Tenpai. A predetermined slot game is played in the sixth specific super reach. In the slot game, a plurality of types of icons including a "cherry" icon are variably displayed on the display device 7 in three columns of left, middle, and right, and then stopped. When the "cherry" icon is stopped in three rows of left, middle, and right in the slot game (when three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The predetermined super reach is the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 154(a)) that shifts when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first effect stage. Therefore, the slot game can be said to be a mission for shifting to a predetermined super reach.

When the slot game starts, "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 gradually decreases. While "PLAY TIME" remains (is greater than 0), the slot game is played repeatedly. Then, when the "PLAY TIME" becomes 0, the slot game ends. That is, the slot game is played for a period of time corresponding to "PLAY TIME". If three "cherry" icons are collected within the time period, the mission is completed, and a predetermined super reach is achieved. In other words, "PLAY TIME" is the time limit given to clear the mission.

As described above, "PLAY TIME" is stocked in the effect corresponding to the effect number "154", but this stock is due to the second time stock notice. In the second effect stage, both the time stock notice and the big hit notice effect (for example, the eighth notice effect) may occur during one special pattern variation.

In the intense heat notice that shifts after the effect corresponding to the effect number “155” is performed, one or more characters among the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are displayed on the display device 7 . appear in Then, it develops into super reach according to the combination of characters that have appeared. The intense heat notice can also occur in the first production stage and the third production stage.

Four timings are provided as timings at which the sign may occur. Specifically, when the sign occurs 4.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when the sign occurs 8.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 2). , when the sign occurs 12.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 3), when the sign occurs 16.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 4), is provided. A sign occurs at one of these four timings. At timing 2, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 1, and at timing 3, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 2. However, at timing 4, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 3. In FIG. 193(b), only timing 1 is illustrated.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 193(c), in the production (timing 1) corresponding to the production number "152", each decorative design (left decorative design, middle decorative design, and right decorative design) changes from the start of fluctuation. When 11 seconds have elapsed (when the display of the failed image of the ten-pie fanning ends), the process is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that each decorative pattern is stopped when the wipe display is performed and the background returns to the normal background after failing to stir the tenpai. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the results of the tenpai-fighting. For timings 2 to 4, from the same point of view, the stop timing of each decorative pattern is 15 seconds after the start of variation, 19 seconds after the start of variation, and 23 seconds after the start of variation, respectively.

<Logo lamp preview>
FIG. 194(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo lamp announcement effect. FIGS. 194(b) and 194(c) are diagrams showing time charts of the logo lamp forewarning effect.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined location (for example, the upper side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo lamp will be described in more detail below.

The logo cover has a first logo portion, a second logo portion and a third logo portion. The first logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the first word, the second logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the second word, and the third logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the second word. The logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the third word. The first word, the second word, and the third word are respectively predetermined words (character strings). The third word is sometimes referred to as "Z". The first logo portion is provided on the left portion of the logo cover, the second logo portion is provided on the central portion of the logo cover, and the third logo portion is provided on the right portion of the logo cover. .

The logo lamp is composed of a first logo lamp, a second logo lamp, and a third logo lamp. The first logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first logo portion, the second logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second logo portion, The third logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third logo portion. Thus, by lighting the first logo lamp, the letter "X" is lit, by lighting the second logo lamp, the letter "Y" is lit, and by lighting the third logo lamp, the letter "Z" is lit. can create the appearance of lighting up

In this embodiment, the logo lamp announcement effect is performed using such a logo lamp. The logo lamp notice effect shown in FIG. 194 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)). . The logo lamp notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with other big hit notice effects during one special pattern variation.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “161” is that after the first logo lamp (character “X”) lights up for a predetermined time (1 second), the first logo lamp (character “X”) turns off. It is a performance to turn off the lights. The effect corresponding to the effect number “162” is that after the first logo lamp (character “X”) lights up for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character “Y”) is turned on for a predetermined time (1 seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (character “X”) continues to be illuminated), and then the first logo lamp (character “X”) and the second logo lamp (character “Y”) It is a production that lights out.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “163” is that after the first logo lamp (character “X”) lights up for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character “Y”) is turned on for a predetermined time (1 seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (character “X”) continues to be illuminated), and then the third logo lamp (character “Z”) is illuminated (first logo lamp (character “X”). character) and the second logo lamp (character "Y") continues to light up). Lighting of the first logo lamp (character "X"), the second logo lamp (character "Y"), and the third logo lamp (character "Z") continues until the end of the special symbol variation.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" are effects related to the influence of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai. As the characters are lit up in sequence like "X"→"Y"→"Z", the possibility that the decorative pattern will be Tenpai increases. Then, when all the characters are lit (when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed), it is determined that the decorative pattern is tenpai (always in the ready-to-win mode). In other words, the logo lamp advance notice effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win increases as the number of lit logo lamps increases.

FIG. 194(b) shows a time chart when the logo lamp announcement effect is performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage. Here, two timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (“X” character) lights up 5.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative design (for 10 seconds tenpai), and when 9.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative design A case where the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up from the point of time (for 14 seconds tenpai) is provided. In the 1st production stage and the 3rd production stage, when the decorative pattern fluctuates with the default fluctuation pattern, when it becomes a reach mode after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation (10 seconds tenpai) and after 14 seconds from the start of fluctuation With a reach mode There is a time (14 seconds tenpai) (see FIGS. 171 and 173).

The two timings in FIG. 194(b) correspond to such two kinds of tenpai timings. As a result, when the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-win mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing indicated by "for 10 seconds tenpai" in FIG. 194(b). Also, when the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation, it is possible to light the logo lamp at the timing indicated by "for 14 seconds tenpai" in FIG. 194(b).

When the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed in the second effect stage, four timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (“X” character) lights up 6 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the first logo lamp ( (timing 2), when the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up after 14 seconds from the start of the variation of the decorative design (timing 3), and when the decorative design A case (timing 4) is provided in which the first logo lamp (character "X") is turned on after 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In FIG. 194(c), only timing 1 is illustrated. These four timings respectively correspond to the four timings at which the above-described eighth notice effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to light the logo lamp at the timing when the tenpai fanning is being performed in the eighth notice effect.

The logo lamp advance notice effect described above may also be performed at each stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. That is, any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" can occur in each of the "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2", and "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect. For example, in "pseudo 1", the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative design, and in "pseudo 2", the first logo lamp has been lit after a predetermined time has elapsed since the restart of the variation of the decorative design. The logo lamp (character "X") lights up, and in "Pseudo 3", the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. At this time, for example, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in the "pseudo 1", the transition to the "pseudo 2" is not performed, while the "pseudo 1" corresponds to the effect number "163". It may be so arranged that the transition to the "pseudo 2" is performed when the effect to do so is performed. Also, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in the "pseudo 2", the process does not shift to the "pseudo 3", while the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed in the "pseudo 2". If done, it may be shifted to "pseudo 3". In addition, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in the "pseudo 3", the transition to the super reach is not performed, while the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed in the "pseudo 3". You may make it shift to a super reach in the case where it is.

<Lottery processing for the content of the first production stage logo lamp notice>
FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the performance stage announcement content lottery process (see FIG. 138).

In the first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9301). When determining that the pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9302). When judging that the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes the lottery process for the details of the logo lamp notice for pseudo 3 (step S9303). The pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 196 .

In the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect (step S9321). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is a sub-variation pattern (10 second tenpai variation pattern ), and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "pseudo 3". do.

When it is determined that 10 seconds tenpai or 14 seconds tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 301, based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation, the contents of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice is determined (step S9322). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp announcement effect will not be performed in the "pseudo 3" (step S9323). . After executing the process of step S9322 or step S9323, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo 3 logo lamp notice lottery process performed in step S9303 of FIG. 195 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 195 .

If it is determined in step S9302 that the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9303, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo-2 logo lamp notice lottery process (step S9304). The lottery process for pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content will be described below with reference to FIG. 197 .

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect (step S9341). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is a sub-variation pattern (10 seconds tenpai variation pattern ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "pseudo 2". do.

When judging that 10-second tenpai or 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo-2" in the pseudo-continuous effect, the sub CPU 301 judges whether or not the details of the logo lamp notice for pseudo-3 have been determined (step S9342). In this process, if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 196 has been executed, the sub CPU 301 determines that the details of the simulation 3 logo lamp announcement have been determined. or when the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo-3"), it is determined that the pseudo-3 logo lamp announcement content has not been determined.

If the sub CPU 301 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 decides the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9343). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in the "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2". to determine one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in the "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects the effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in the "pseudo 2". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2". determines the corresponding performance.

On the other hand, when judging that the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice is not determined, the sub CPU 301 decides the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time (step S9344). . In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in the "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9341 that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous effect, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp announcement effect will not be performed in the "pseudo-2" stage (step S9345). ). After executing the process of step S9343, step S9344, or step S9345, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The simulation 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9304 of FIG. 195 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 195 .

When it is determined in step S9301 that the pseudo-continuous effect will not occur, or after executing the process of step S9304, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo-1 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9305). The pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 198 .

In the simulation 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "no simulation" effect. (Step S9361). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is a sub-variation pattern (10 seconds tenpai variation pattern ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern in "pseudo 1" becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation. do.

If it is determined that the 10-second tenpai or the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the details of the logo lamp announcement for the pseudo-2 are determined. It judges (step S9362). In this process, if the process of step S9343 or step S9344 in FIG. 197 has been executed, sub CPU 301 determines that the contents of pseudo 2 logo lamp announcement have been determined. If the processing of step S9345 is being executed, or if the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo-2 logo lamp announcement has not been determined.

When determining that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice has been determined, the sub CPU 301 decides the content of the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice based on the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice (step S9363). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in the "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". to determine one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". Determines the corresponding production.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp announcement has not been determined, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp announcement has been determined (step S9364). In this process, if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 196 has been executed, the sub CPU 301 determines that the details of the simulation 3 logo lamp announcement have been determined. is executed, the pseudo-continuous performance does not progress to ``pseudo-3'', or the pseudo-continuous performance does not occur), it is determined that the contents of the announcement of the logo lamp for pseudo-3 have not been determined.

If it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 decides the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9365). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". to determine one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". determines the corresponding performance.

On the other hand, when judging that the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice is not determined, the sub CPU 301 decides the content of the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time (step S9366). . In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9361 that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 301 performs the logo lamp announcement effect in the "pseudo-1". It is determined that there is no (step S9367). After executing the process of step S9363, step S9365, step S9366, or step S9367, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The simulation 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9305 of FIG. 195 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 195 .

After executing the process of step S9305, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the content of the second production stage logo lamp notice>
FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing the second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

The second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the performance stage announcement content lottery process.

In the second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 193) will occur during this special symbol change (step S9401). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301, in the second production stage notice content lottery process, selects the content of the production performed during the special symbol variation based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time. have decided. In the processing of step S9401, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the eighth notice effect has been determined as the effect to be performed during this special symbol variation.

When determining that the eighth notice effect will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp notice based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation (step S9402). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when determining that the eighth notice effect will not occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp notice effect will not be performed (step S9403). After executing the process of step S9402 or step S9403, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery process for third production stage logo lamp notice content>
FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the lottery process for third effect stage logo lamp notice content relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the performance stage announcement content lottery process.

In the third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9451). When determining that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 executes pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content lottery processing (step S9452). In the third production stage, the stages in the pseudo continuous production progress only up to "pseudo 2". The lottery process for pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content will be described below with reference to FIG. 201 .

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect (step S9461). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301, based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time, during the special symbol variation, what kind of pattern is the decorative symbol at the stage of "pseudo 2"? It is determined whether to stop (decorative design stop pattern). In the processing of step S9461, the sub CPU 301 determines that the decorative symbol stop pattern is a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second ten-pie stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-win state 10 seconds after the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in "pseudo 2"; In the "pseudo 2", it is determined whether or not the decorative pattern stop pattern is any one of the decorative pattern stop pattern (14-second tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

When it is determined that a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 301, based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation, the contents of the pseudo-2 logo lamp notice. is determined (step S9462). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in the "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 301 determines that the logo lamp announcement effect will not be performed in the "pseudo 2" (step S9463). . After executing the process of step S9462 or step S9463, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9452 of FIG. 200 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 200 .

When it is determined in step S9451 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process of step S9452, the sub CPU 301 executes the lottery process for the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content (step S9453). The pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 202 .

In the simulation 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "no simulation" effect. (Step S9471). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 301, based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time, during the special symbol variation, what kind of pattern is the decorative symbol at the stage of "pseudo 1"? It is determined whether to stop (decorative design stop pattern). In the processing of step S9471, the sub CPU 301 determines that the decorative symbol stop pattern is a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second ten-pie stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol enters a ready-to-win mode 10 seconds after the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in "pseudo 1"; In "Pseudo 1", it is judged whether or not the decorative pattern stop pattern is any one of the decorative pattern stop pattern (14-second tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

If it is determined that the 10-second tenpai or the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the details of the logo lamp announcement for the pseudo-2 are determined. It judges (step S9472). In this process, if the process of step S9462 in FIG. 201 has been executed, the sub CPU 301 determines that the details of the simulation 2 logo lamp announcement have been determined. is being executed, or the pseudo-continuous effect is not generated), it is determined that the content of the pseudo-2 logo lamp announcement has not been determined.

If the sub CPU 301 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 301 decides the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9473). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". to decide one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". determines the corresponding performance.

On the other hand, when judging that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice is not determined, the sub CPU 301 decides the content of the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time (step S9474). . In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in the "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9471 that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 301 performs the logo lamp notice effect in the "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no (step S9475). After executing the process of step S9473, step S9474, or step S9475, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9453 of FIG. 200 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 200 .

After executing the process of step S9453, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Screen display in probability mode>
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the variable probability mode.

As described above, in the probability variable mode, when the normal symbol losing length variation (variation display of normal symbols such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts, the game moves to the bonus mode (see FIG. 137(a)). In the bonus mode, while the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol variation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit to the right enter the small winning big winning opening 151, and a large number of game balls are paid out.

Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the player plays the game expecting that a variation pattern with a variation time of 600000 msec (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136) will be determined as the normal symbol variation pattern. From this, in the probability variation mode, whenever the normal pattern variation is performed, an effect (drum variation effect) corresponding to the pattern of the normal pattern variation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the variable probability mode, drum images 9201 (a left drum image 9201L, a middle drum image 9201C, and a right drum image 9201R) are displayed on the display device . A drum image 9201 is an image imitating a drum (reel). In the area where each drum image 9201 is displayed, the drum patterns 9202 (the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R) can be variably displayed and stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 203(a), the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are displayed in such a manner that they are fluctuating. In the example shown in FIG. 203(b), the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped as "bell" patterns, "watermelon" patterns, and "cherry" patterns, respectively. displayed in such a manner. Thus, in the variable probability mode, every time the normal symbol variation is performed, an effect (drum variation effect) simulating reel variation display and stop display (slot game) is performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 203, in the variable probability mode, the remaining ST count image 9203 and the winning ball count image 9204 are also displayed on the display device 7 . The remaining ST number of times image 9203 is an image corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (remaining ST number of times) performed in the probability variation mode. When the variable probability mode starts, "50" is displayed as the remaining ST number image 9203, and thereafter, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 decreases by one each time the special symbol variation is performed. When the number shown as the remaining number of STs image 9203 becomes "0", the variable probability mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. The winning ball number image 9204 is an image corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode.

Here, in this specification, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the normal symbol loss length variation as a trigger is called the first bonus mode. In the first bonus mode, the value indicating the number of remaining STs is updated (subtracted by 1) each time the special symbol variation is performed, similarly to the variable probability mode. Then, when the value indicating the number of remaining STs becomes 0, the first bonus mode is shifted to the normal mode. Therefore, the variable probability mode and the first bonus mode are combined and called the remaining ST number subtraction mode. In addition, when shifting from the probability variable mode to the first bonus mode, the remaining ST number in the probability variable mode is not reset, and the remaining ST number is inherited in the first bonus mode. In this specification, the remaining ST number subtraction mode may also be referred to as probability variable mode.

On the other hand, even when the conditions for starting the jackpot gaming state are satisfied in the variable probability mode, the game moves to the bonus mode (see FIG. 137(a)). In this specification, the bonus mode that shifts when the jackpot gaming state starts is referred to as the second bonus mode. When shifting to the second bonus mode, the remaining ST count is reset, and in the second bonus mode, the remaining ST count is not updated (managed). When the second bonus mode ends, if the limiter has not been reached, "50" is set as the remaining number of STs.

<Drum fluctuation effect determination processing>
FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the drum variation effect determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The drum fluctuation effect determination process shown in FIG. 204 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (gate passage). is. The sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126 by receiving a ball passage detector passage detection command indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126 . The ball passing detector passing detection command is set by the main control circuit 200 in the ball passing detector passing detection process and sent to the sub control circuit 300 .

In the drum variation effect determination process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the variable probability mode (see FIG. 137(a)) (step S9501). Information indicating the presentation mode is stored in a presentation mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 refers to the presentation mode flag storage area to recognize the current presentation mode. can be done.

When determining that the current effect mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current production mode is the probability variable mode, the sub CPU 301 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by the current gate passage is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation shown in FIG. 136 It is determined whether it is the pattern "05H") (step S9502). Since the ball passing detector passage detection command contains information indicating the normal symbol variation pattern, by receiving the ball passage detector passage detection command, the sub CPU 301 detects the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the current gate passage. can be recognized.

When it is determined that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the number of remaining STs is a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more. (step S9503). The remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode (probability variation mode and first bonus mode). A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is less than the predetermined number of times (10 times), the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the ST recovery is confirmed (whether it is determined to shift to the jackpot game state) (step S9504). In this process, the sub CPU 301 confirms the ST recovery when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the currently performed special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a big hit. (It is decided to shift to the jackpot game state). As described above, after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variable probability flag is set to ON (see FIG. 133), and the variable probability mode is restored (ST recovers). However, when the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first hit becomes a predetermined number (5 times) by executing the jackpot game state (when the limiter is reached), the variable probability mode is not returned. , to switch to normal mode. Therefore, in this case, it may be determined that ST recovery is not confirmed.

If it is determined that the normal symbol variation pattern determined in step S9502 as a trigger of this gate passage is not a pattern corresponding to normal symbol loss length variation, or ST recovery is not determined in step S9504 (jackpot game state is not determined), the sub CPU 301 determines the drum fluctuation effect pattern as a losing pattern (step S9505). As for the missing patterns, an all-missing pattern and a partially-missing pattern are provided. The all-missing pattern is a drum variation performance pattern in which different patterns are stopped and displayed as a left drum pattern 9202L, a middle drum pattern 9202C, and a right drum pattern 9202R. In the partially lost pattern, two of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, and the remaining one pattern is a pattern different from the two patterns. This is a drum variation effect pattern such that is stopped and displayed.

For example, as the all-losing pattern, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. or a pattern in which a "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "cherry" symbol is stop-displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "bell" symbol is stop-displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. etc. are provided. For example, the left drum pattern 9202L is a "bell" pattern, the middle drum pattern 9202C is a "bell" pattern, and the right drum pattern 9202R is a "watermelon" pattern. or a pattern in which a "watermelon" pattern is stop-displayed as the left drum pattern 9202L, a "watermelon" pattern is stop-displayed as the middle drum pattern 9202C, and a "cherry" pattern is stop-displayed as the right drum pattern 9202R. A plurality of patterns such as patterns are provided.

In the processing of step S9505, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on random values to select one losing pattern from among such multiple losing patterns (a plurality of all losing patterns and a plurality of partial losing patterns). It is determined as the pattern of the drum variation presentation performed during the normal pattern variation corresponding to the passage through the gate this time. After executing the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined that the remaining ST number of times is a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more in step S9503, or ST recovery is determined in step S9504 (it is determined to shift to the big hit game state) In this case, the sub CPU 301 determines the drum variation effect pattern as the winning pattern (step S9506). The hit pattern is a drum fluctuation performance pattern in which the same symbols are stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. The winning patterns include, for example, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns are provided, such as a pattern in which a "cherry" symbol is statically displayed. In the processing of step S9506, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to select one winning pattern from among such a plurality of winning patterns during the normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the current gate. It is determined as a pattern of drum variation effect.

Next, the sub CPU 301 executes a losing length variation look-ahead lottery (step S9507). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning length variable look-ahead lottery is won (step S9508). When determining that the winning length variable look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 sets the length variable look-ahead flag to ON (step S9509). As a result, in the subsequent drum variation effect, it is suggested that the normal symbol losing length variation has been determined (the losing length variation look-ahead effect is performed) (see FIG. 205). The loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to OFF when normal symbol variation (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to this gate passage starts.

If it is determined in step S9508 that the winning length variable prefetch lottery has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9509, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the start of drum fluctuation production>
FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of the drum fluctuation production relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

205, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126, the sub-control circuit 300 performs the production mode determination processing (FIG. 76 This is the processing performed in step S205). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 200 and sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol storage check process (see step S192 in FIG. 64).

In the drum fluctuation production start time processing, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the current production mode is the probability variable mode (see FIG. 137(a)) (step S9521). Information indicating the presentation mode is stored in a presentation mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303, and the sub CPU 301 refers to the presentation mode flag storage area to recognize the current presentation mode. can be done.

When determining that the current effect mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current production mode is the probability variable mode, the sub CPU 301 determines that the drum fluctuation production pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to this normal pattern fluctuation occurs is a losing pattern (step in FIG. 204). S9505) is determined (step S9522).

If the sub CPU 301 judges that the drum variation production pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol variation occurs is not a losing pattern, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the drum variation production pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol variation occurs is the missing pattern, the sub CPU 301 sets the missing length variation look-ahead flag (see step S9509 in FIG. 204). ) is turned on (step S9523).

If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub-CPU 301 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 changes the drum fluctuation production pattern to a look-ahead pattern (step S9524). The look-ahead pattern is the above-described partially lost pattern.

In the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 301 determines that all of the drum fluctuation production patterns (see step S9505 in FIG. 204) determined when the passage of the gate corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation of this time occurs are losing patterns. By performing a lottery based on the above, one partial losing pattern is selected from among a plurality of partial losing patterns, and the pattern of drum fluctuation production performed during this normal pattern fluctuation is selected as the selected partial losing pattern. Replace pattern. It should be noted that, if the drum variation production pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation occurs this time is a partially lost pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform such replacement processing, and has already been determined. Maintains the drum fluctuation effect pattern that is present. After executing the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Specific aspects of drum variation production>
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the currently performed normal symbol variation and the reserved ball. 207 to 209 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the drum variation effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol variation pattern determination random number) are reserved. In FIG. 206(a), there are three reserved balls in the situation where one normal symbol variation is performed, and 500 ms is determined as the variation time of this normal symbol variation, and the first retained ball 500 ms is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to , 500 ms is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the second retained ball, and the normal corresponding to the third retained ball It shows a state in which 500 ms is determined as the variation time of the pattern variation.

In FIG. 206(b), after the state shown in FIG. 206(a), one game ball passes through the passage gate 126 while the normal symbol variation is being performed, and the normal lottery accompanying the passage ( It shows a state in which 600000 ms is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball). FIG. 206(c) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(b) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206(d) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(c) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206(e) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(d) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 206(f) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(e) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (600000 ms) is being performed.

FIG. 207(a) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b). FIG. 207(b) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 207(a) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 207(b), the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R correspond to the normal pattern fluctuation time of 500 ms shown in FIGS. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 207(c) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(c). FIG. 207(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 207(c) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(c) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 207(e) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(d). FIG. 207(f) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 207(e) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(d) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 207(g) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(e). FIG. 207(h) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 207(g) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(e) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 207(i) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(f). FIG. 207(j) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 207(i) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 206(f) is 600000 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at . In FIG. 207(k), the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shift to bonus mode).

As described above, one drum fluctuation effect includes the fluctuation display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern. 9202R stop display. The fluctuation display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R starts simultaneously with the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, and is performed over 500 ms, and each drum pattern 9202 stops at the same time. Here, when the result of the normal lottery is the winning of the normal symbol, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is 500 ms. It matches the stop timing of the normal design.

Further, the stop display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R is performed over 1500 ms. Therefore, after 1500 ms have passed since the fluctuation of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R has stopped in one drum fluctuation effect, it is possible to start the fluctuation display of the next drum fluctuation effect. be. On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol hit, the time from the end of the normal symbol variation (after the normal symbol stops) to the end of opening the normal electric accessory 146 is 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the next normal symbol variation after 1500 ms have elapsed since the normal symbol stopped in one normal symbol variation. As a result, the cycle of the drum fluctuation effect and the cycle of the normal pattern fluctuation can be matched.

FIG. 207 shows an example in which the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol losing length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern, but the losing length variation look-ahead lottery is not won. On the other hand, FIG. 208 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to a normal symbol losing length variation is determined as a normal symbol variation pattern, and winning the losing length variation look-ahead lottery.

FIG. 208(a) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b). FIG. 208(b) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 208(a) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 208(b), left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are shown in FIG. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 208(c) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(c). FIG. 208(d) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 208(c) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. The variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. A symbol 9202C and a right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed as part of the missing pattern.

FIG. 208(e) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(d). FIG. 208(f) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 208(e) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. The variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. A symbol 9202C and a right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed as part of the missing pattern.

FIG. 208(g) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(e). FIG. 208(h) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 208(g) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 208(h), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum are shown in FIG. A symbol 9202C and a right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed as part of the missing pattern.

FIG. 208(i) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(f). FIG. 208(j) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 208(i) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(f) is 600000 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at . In FIG. 208(k), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 7. In FIG.

Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 208, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the winning pattern (see FIG. 208(j)). A drum pattern 9202L, a middle drum pattern 9202C, and a right drum pattern 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a false pattern (see FIGS. 208(d), 208(f), and 208(h)), This suggests that the normal symbol losing length variation has been determined (normal symbol losing length variation has been elected). In addition, even if the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, there is a possibility that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a losing pattern ( (see step S9505 in FIG. 204). When a partial losing pattern appears even though the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, it can be said that the stop display of the partial losing pattern is a fake effect.

In the above, an example in which some of the losing patterns are stopped and displayed as the loss length variable look-ahead effect has been described. The loss length variable look-ahead effect is not limited to this example, and for example, a loss length variable look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 209 may be employed.

FIG. 209(a) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 206(a) and (b). FIG. 209(b) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 209(a) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 209(b), the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R correspond to the normal pattern fluctuation time of 500 ms shown in FIGS. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 209(c) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(c). FIG. 209(d) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 209(c) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(c) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 209(e) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 206(d) and (e). As described above, the variable display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R is normally performed over 500 ms. On the other hand, the variable display shown in FIG. 209(e) is performed over 4500 ms. FIG. 209(f) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 209(e) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 206(d) and (e) correspond to the variation time of 500 ms for the normal symbol variation, in FIG. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 209(g) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 206(f). FIG. 209(h) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 209(g) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(f) is 600000 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at . In FIG. 209(i), the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to the bonus mode).

In the example shown in FIG. 209, one drum variation effect is performed while the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 206(d) and the normal symbol variation (two normal symbol variations) shown in FIG. It is supposed to be As a result, it is suggested that you have won the normal symbol loss length variation. In this way, as the loss length variation look-ahead effect, one drum variation effect may be performed while the normal symbol variations are performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that such a longer than usual drum fluctuation production (long-time drum fluctuation production) is preferably performed when the normal symbol losing length variation is won, but the normal symbol losing length variation is not won. It may be done in any case. In a form in which a long-time drum variation effect can be performed both when the normal symbol losing length variation is won and when the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the normal symbol losing length variation is won. When it is, compared with the case where the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, it is preferable to configure so that the drum variation performance can be performed for a long time with a high probability.

As described above, in FIGS. 207 to 209, gate passage occurs in a situation where the number of remaining STs is a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage corresponds to normal symbol loss length variation. An example in which a pattern has been determined has been described. In this case, the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stop-displayed in the winning pattern. On the other hand, gate passage occurs in a situation where the number of remaining STs is less than a predetermined number (10 times), and a pattern corresponding to normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined as a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. In this case, the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stop-displayed in a lost pattern (see step S9503 in FIG. 204).

The normal symbol losing length variation is performed over a long period of time (600000 ms), and when the normal symbol losing length variation occurs after the number of remaining STs has decreased, the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed. Then, the probability variation mode (probability variation gaming state) ends. When the variable probability gaming state ends, when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes very long (see FIG. 134), so the game ball is placed in the big winning hole 151 for small win. It becomes almost impossible to win a prize. Therefore, in this case, since the significance of winning the normal symbol losing length variation is lost, the appearance of the winning pattern is refrained.

In addition, although the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation is described as being 600000 ms, it is not limited to this example. For example, as the variation time of normal pattern loss length variation, a plurality of variation times such as 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds are provided It may be possible to In this case, the number of remaining STs for which a winning pattern can appear may be varied according to the variation time of the normal symbol losing length variation. For example, as the variation time of the normal symbol losing length variation, T1 seconds (eg, 60 seconds) and T2 seconds (eg, 120 seconds) (T1 < T2) is provided, the normal symbol losing length variation of T1 seconds When it is determined, the number of remaining STs is N1 times (for example, 10 times) or more, so that the hit pattern appears on the condition that the number of remaining STs is N2 times (for example, 10 times). For example, the winning pattern may appear under the condition of 20 times or more (N1<N2).

In addition, it is also possible to vary the mode of the winning pattern according to the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol losing length variation is determined. For example, when the remaining ST count is 40 times or more when the normal symbol losing length variation is determined, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and the normal symbol losing length variation is determined. When the remaining ST number is 20 times or more and less than 40 times, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and when the normal symbol losing length variation is determined, the remaining ST number is less than 20 times. , a "bell" pattern may be stopped and displayed as the drum pattern 9202. FIG.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is started simultaneously with the start of the normal symbol variation. The start timing of the variation display of the drum pattern 9202 is not limited to this example, and the variation display of the drum pattern 9202 may be started while the normal pattern variation is being performed. For example, the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R may start to be displayed 1000 ms after the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. In this case, for example, the fluctuation display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R is performed over the period of 1000 ms to 1500 ms after the start of one normal pattern fluctuation. , The left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped from the time when 1500 ms has passed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation until the time when 1000 ms has passed since the next normal pattern fluctuation is started. It can be configured to display.

In this way, by performing the fluctuation display and the stop display of the drum pattern 9202 across two normal pattern fluctuations, for example, while the normal pattern fluctuation shown in FIG. For example, 1500 ms after the start of the normal symbol variation), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the winning pattern (see FIG. 207(j)). becomes possible. As a result, the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) is performed before the normal symbol losing length variation shown in FIG. 206(f) is started. As a result, the normal symbol losing length variation is started. Immediately after that, an image as shown in FIG. 207(k) can be displayed. From this point of view, the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) may be terminated before the normal symbol losing length variation starts, or at the same time when the normal symbol losing length variation starts.

In the above description, it has been explained that after the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) is performed, the image as shown in FIG. At the start of normal symbol losing length variation, either one of the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) and the image display shown in FIG. 207(k) may be configured not to be performed. However, it may be configured not to display both. In addition, instead of the stop display shown in FIG. 207(j) and the display of the image shown in FIG. It may be configured to indicate the start of fluctuation.

<Normal pattern loss length fluctuation Remaining time indication effect>
Figures 210 and 211 are diagrams showing an example of a normal symbol losing length variation remaining time suggestive effect.

As described above, in the variable probability mode (see FIG. 137(a)), when the normal symbol losing length variation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts, the process shifts to the first bonus mode. . In the first bonus mode, a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time suggesting effect is performed. In the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time suggesting effect, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed on the display device 7 . The normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is an image showing the time corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation, and the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation is suggested through the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image. .

In FIG. 210(a), a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is displayed on the display device 7. In FIG. The normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is displayed after the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stop-displayed in the winning pattern (see FIG. 207(j)), and the drum symbol 9202 concerned. Displayed when the display of has ended. The normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an example of an image (see FIG. 207(k)) corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shift to the first bonus mode). In this example, the normal symbol losing length variation remaining time image 9210a is an image corresponding to the number "600:00" as the normal symbol variation of 600000 ms has started as the normal symbol losing length variation.

After the state shown in FIG. 210(a), the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. Remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210h→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210i→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j. Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j are respectively displayed sequentially for a short period of time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a → normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210b→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210c→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210h→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210i→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j As the number indicated by the image changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. becoming. The color of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. there is

In the above, an example in which the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed at the start of the first bonus mode has been described, but the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed in the middle of the first bonus mode. .

In the first bonus mode, a battle effect during the first bonus mode may be performed as an effect suggesting the possibility that the result of the second special lottery is a big win. In the battle effect during the first bonus mode, the display device 7 displays a battle between the ally character and the enemy character. When the ally character defeats the enemy character in such a battle effect during the first bonus mode, a normal symbol losing length variable remaining time image may be displayed. That is, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image can be displayed in a situation where the expectation that the result of the second special lottery is a big win is relatively high.

In FIG. 211( a ), a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211 a is displayed on the display device 7 . In this example, the normal symbol losing length variation remaining time image 9211a corresponds to the fact that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is about 30000 ms at the time when the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle effect during the first bonus mode. is an image corresponding to the number "30:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 211(a), normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → normal symbol losing length fluctuation as shown in FIGS. Remaining time image 9211c→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211d→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211e→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211f→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211h→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211i→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j. Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j are respectively displayed sequentially for a short period of time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Like the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j, although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol losing Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211a→normal symbol losing long fluctuation remaining time image 9211b→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211c→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211d→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211e→normal symbol losing Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211f→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211g→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211h→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211i→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j and the image As the number indicated by changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. The color of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. there is

In addition, the number indicated by the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image does not necessarily strictly correspond to the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation. As a normal pattern loss length fluctuation remaining time image, a plurality of remaining times (for example, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds , and 600 seconds) are provided. When the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed, an image corresponding to the remaining time closest to the (actual) remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation at the time point is selected, and the selected normal symbol losing length A variable remaining time image is displayed. A normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210 shown in FIG. 210 is a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image corresponding to 600 seconds, and a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211 shown in FIG. 211 corresponds to 30 seconds. It is a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image as described above is displayed on the display device 7, the drum fluctuation effect is not performed (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and The right drum pattern 9202R is not displayed on the display device 7).

<First bonus mode middle jackpot processing>
FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing the first bonus mode middle jackpot process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the first bonus mode middle jackpot time process shown in FIG. 212, the condition for starting the jackpot game state is satisfied in the first bonus mode, and when the jackpot game state starts, the sub-control circuit 300 performs the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 212). This is the processing performed in step S205 of 76). As described above, the first bonus mode is a bonus mode that shifts with the start of the normal symbol losing length variation as a trigger. In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that a big-hit game state starts by receiving a big-hit start command.

In the first bonus mode middle jackpot process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes prize ball number counter addition process (step S9601). The number-of-balls counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the second bonus mode (step S9602). The second bonus mode is a bonus mode that shifts when the conditions for starting the jackpot gaming state are met in the variable probability mode or the first bonus mode. In the process of step S9602, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the second bonus mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303. FIG. After that, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing the process at the end of the second bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The second bonus mode ending process shown in FIG. 213 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the jackpot game state ends in the second bonus mode. . In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the jackpot game state is finished by receiving the jackpot end command. The jackpot end command is set by the main control circuit 200 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300, for example, when the jackpot flag is cleared.

In the process at the end of the second bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the limiter number of times has been reached due to the current jackpot game state (step S9621). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first win is a predetermined number (five times) (the jackpot game state to end this time is the fifth jackpot after the first win (including the first win)). game state).

When it is determined that the number of limiter times has not been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length is being varied (currently, the normal symbol losing length is being varied). It judges (step S9622). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern relating to the normal symbol variation has expired after the variation display of the normal symbol relating to the normal symbol losing length variation has started. The sub CPU 301 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the above-described normal symbol variation start command. In addition, the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 136). It is possible to recognize the fluctuation time of the pattern. While the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 300. - 特許庁The remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is updated by a timer update process (not shown) performed at a predetermined cycle. In the process of step S9622, the sub CPU 301 determines that the normal symbol losing length is changing when the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is longer than 0.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length is fluctuating, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the first bonus mode (step S9623). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the first bonus mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303 .

On the other hand, when judging that the normal symbol losing length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 301 shifts the production mode from the second bonus mode to the variable probability mode (step S9624). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303 .

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9625). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the jackpot game state, the normal lottery is performed (the normal symbol variation pattern is determined) as in the non-jackpot game state. and The normal symbol variation corresponding to the gate passage may be performed during the big win game state or after the big win game state is finished.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9626). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the big win is won when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the reserved special symbol variations is a big win.

After executing the processing of step S9623, when it is determined that the normal symbol losing length variation is won in step S9625, or when it is determined that the big hit is won in step S9626, the sub CPU 301 determines the number of prize balls A counter addition process is executed (step S9627). The number-of-balls counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S9627, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9621 that the number of times of the limiter has been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the normal mode (step S9628). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the normal mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303 .

If it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9628, the sub CPU 301 executes a bonus mode result display process (step S9629). The bonus mode result display process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S9629, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the first bonus mode>
FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

214 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) when the normal symbol losing length variation ends in the first bonus mode. is. As described above, while the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 300, and the sub-control circuit 300 controls the normal symbol losing length variation. By referring to the remaining time, it can be recognized that the normal symbol loss length variation ends.

In the process at the end of the first bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9641). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9642). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the big win is won when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the reserved special symbol variations is a big win.

If it is determined in step S9641 that the normal symbol losing length variation has been won, or if it is determined that the big hit has been won in step S9642, the sub CPU 301 executes prize ball number counter addition processing (step S9643 ). The number-of-balls counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes bonus mode result display processing (step S9644). The bonus mode result display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S9643 or step S9644, the sub CPU 301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the variable probability mode (step S9645). In this process, the sub CPU 301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 303 . After that, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Number of prize balls counter addition processing>
FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing prize ball number counter addition processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The prize ball number counter addition process shown in FIG. 215 is the first bonus mode middle jackpot process (see step S9601 in FIG. 212), the second bonus mode end process (see step S9627 in FIG. 213), or the first bonus. This is the process performed in the mode termination process (see step S9643 in FIG. 213).

In the prize ball number counter addition process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the extra game flag is set to ON (step S9661). The extra game flag is a flag indicating that an extra game has occurred. In this embodiment, when shifting from the variable probability mode to the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode, and after the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode ends, the player stays in the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode There is In this case, it is assumed that the bonus mode continues (continuous). Hereinafter, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode that first shifts from the variable probability mode will be referred to as the initial game. Also, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode that stays continuously after the end of the initial game is called an extra game.

When judging that the extra game flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 sets an initial game prize ball number counter (step S9662). The value of the initial game prize ball number counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode as the initial game). The total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode is managed in the work RAM 303 at any time. In the processing of step S9662, the sub CPU 301 stores the total number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 303 as the value of the initial game prize ball number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 301 sets the extra game flag to ON (step S9663).

On the other hand, when determining that the extra game flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 sets the value of the extra game winning ball counter to the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as an extra game). The total number of game balls paid out is added (step S9664). The value of the extra game prize ball number counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the extra game, and is stored in the work RAM 303 . In the process of step S9664, the sub CPU 301 sets the value of the extra game winning ball counter stored in the work RAM 303 to the number of game balls paid out during the current extra game (first bonus mode or second bonus mode). is stored in the work RAM 303 as a new value of the counter for the number of prize balls during the extra game.

After executing the process of step S9663 or step S9664, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Result display processing during bonus mode>
FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing the result display processing during the bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The bonus mode result display process shown in FIG. 216 is a process performed in the second bonus mode end process (see step S9629 in FIG. 213) or the first bonus mode end process (see step S9644 in FIG. 214). be.

In the bonus mode result display process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the extra game flag (see step S9663 in FIG. 215) is set to ON (step S9681).

When determining that the extra game flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 301 calculates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode as the initial game) ( The value of the initial game winning ball number counter) is displayed on the display device 7 (step S9682).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that the extra game flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display the sum of the value of the initial game prize ball counter and the value of the extra game prize ball counter ( step S9683). The total value corresponds to the total number of game balls paid out during the period from the transition from the variable probability mode to the initial game to the present (bonus mode consecutive section). Subsequently, the sub CPU 301 sets the extra game flag to OFF (step S9684).

After executing the process of step S9682 or step S9684, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when it is determined in step S9622 in FIG. 213 that the normal symbol losing length is fluctuating, the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. performed by

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is 10 seconds or more (step S9701). As described above, while the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 300, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation. can do.

When determining that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 10 seconds, the sub CPU 301 sets the effect data for returning to the probability variation mode (step S9702). The effect data for returning to the variable probability mode is effect data corresponding to the effect (variable probability mode return effect) indicating returning to the variable probability mode, and is stored in the program ROM 202 . By executing the process of step S9702, the variable probability mode return effect is performed. For example, the variable probability mode return image (image indicating that the variable probability mode is restored) is displayed on the display device 7 .

On the other hand, when determining that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation is 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 301 sets the effect data for entering the extra game (step S9703). The effect data for entering the extra game is effect data corresponding to the effect indicating entering the extra game (extra game entering effect), and is stored in the program ROM 202 . By executing the process of step S9703, an extra game entry effect is performed. For example, the display device 7 displays an extra game entry image (an image indicating that the extra game is entered).

After executing the process of step S9702 or step S9703, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

Note that when the process of step S9702 is executed, the sub CPU 301 may proceed to the process of step S9625 in FIG. Also, when it is determined in step S9622 in FIG. 213 that the normal symbol losing length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 301 is the same as the production data for returning to the probability variable mode set in step S9702 (for entering the extra game set in step S9703). Effect data different from the effect data) may be set, or effect data different from the effect data for returning to the variable probability mode (also different from the effect data for entering the extra game) may be set.

<1st bonus mode middle processing>
FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing processing during the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The processing during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 218 is processing performed at a predetermined timing in the effect mode determination processing (see step S205 in FIG. 76) by the sub-control circuit 300 in the first bonus mode. For example, the process during the first bonus mode is performed when the second special symbol variation starts in the first bonus mode.

In the process during the first bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is 15 seconds or more (step S9721). As described above, while the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 300, and the sub CPU 301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation. can do.

When determining that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is 15 seconds or more, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode process (I) (step S9722). The processing (I) during the first bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when determining that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9723). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode processing (II) (step S9724). The processing (II) during the first bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 301 executes the first bonus mode process (III) (step S9725). The processing (III) during the first bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S9722, step S9724, or step S9725, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<First bonus mode middle processing (I)>
FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing processing (I) during the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (I) shown in FIG. 219 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9722 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode processing (I), first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9741). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9742). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (A) during the first bonus mode (step S9743). In the first bonus mode production (A), the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST count is 5 times or more, and a big win is won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9743, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. Alternatively, the sub CPU 301 executes a lottery to encourage the end of the first bonus mode, and causes the display device 7 to display an image to encourage the end of the first bonus mode when the player wins the lottery. The end-of-the-first-bonus-mode-promoting image is an image that encourages the end of the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9743, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9742 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (B) during the first bonus mode (step S9744). In the first bonus mode production (B), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9744, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. The image displayed by the process of step S9744 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (A). After executing the process of step S9744, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is less than 5 in step S9741, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9745). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (C) during the first bonus mode (step S9746). In the first bonus mode production (C), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5 times, and a big win is won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9746, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that ST recovery is confirmed although the number of remaining STs is low. The image displayed by the process of step S9746 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (B) during the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9746, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9745 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (D) during the first bonus mode (step S9747). The effect (D) in the first bonus mode is that the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the number of remaining STs is less than 5, and the jackpot is not won in the first bonus mode. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9747, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9747 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (C) during the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9747, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<First Bonus Mode Middle Processing (II)>
FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing the first bonus mode processing (II) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (II) shown in FIG. 220 is processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9724 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode processing (II), first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9761). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is 5 times or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9762). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (E) during the first bonus mode (step S9763). In the first bonus mode effect (E), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST number is 5 times. In addition to the above, this is an effect performed when the jackpot is won. In the processing of step S9763, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9763 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (A). After executing the process of step S9763, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9762 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (F) during the first bonus mode (step S9764). In the first bonus mode production (F), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, and the remaining ST number is 5 times. In addition to the above, this is an effect performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9764, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9764 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (E). Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (B). After executing the process of step S9764, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9761 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9765). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (G) during the first bonus mode (step S9766). In the first bonus mode production (G), the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the remaining ST count is less than 5 times, and This is an effect performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9766, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs remaining is low, but ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (F) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (C). After executing the process of step S9766, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9765 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (H) during the first bonus mode (step S9767). In the first bonus mode production (H), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST count is 5 times. This is an effect that is performed when the amount is less than and the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9767, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (G) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (D). After executing the process of step S9767, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<First bonus mode middle process (III)>
FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing the first bonus mode processing (III) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (III) shown in FIG. 221 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9725 in FIG. 218).

In the first bonus mode processing (III), first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9781). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9782). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9783). In the first bonus mode production (I), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is won, and the remaining ST count is 5 times or more. , and is an effect that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the processing of step S9783, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is short. The image displayed by the process of step S9783 may be the same as or different from the images that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (E) during the first bonus mode.

If it is determined in step S9782 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (J) during the first bonus mode (step S9784). In the first bonus mode production (J), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is won, and the remaining ST number is 5 times or more. , and is an effect performed when the jackpot is not won. In the processing of step S9784, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is short. The image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (I). Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (B) to (F) during the first bonus mode.

When determining in step S9781 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9785). In this process, the sub CPU 301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (K) during the first bonus mode (step S9786). In the first bonus mode production (K), the remaining time of the normal pattern losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal pattern losing length variation is won, the remaining ST count is less than 5 times, and a big hit. It is a production that is performed when you are elected to. In the process of step S9786, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs remaining is low, but ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (J) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (C) to (G) during the first bonus mode.

When determining in step S9785 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect (L) during the first bonus mode (step S9787). In the first bonus mode production (L), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is won, and the remaining ST count is less than 5 times. , and is an effect performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9787, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (K) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (D) to (H) during the first bonus mode.

After executing the processing of step S9783, step S9784, step S9786, or step S9787, the sub CPU 301 extends the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation (step S9788). In this process, the sub CPU 301 sets the variation time (for example, 600000 ms) of the winning normal symbol variation as the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation. The winning normal symbol variation is a normal symbol variation related to a normal symbol loss length variation among the reserved normal symbol variations. In addition, when a plurality of winning normal symbol variations are included in the reserved normal symbol variations, the sub CPU 301 selects the winning normal symbol variation whose variation starts first among the plurality of winning normal symbol variations. The fluctuation time is set as the remaining time of normal pattern loss length fluctuation. The remaining time of the new normal symbol losing length fluctuation set in this manner is not updated by timer update processing until the winning normal symbol fluctuation starts, and is subtracted after the winning normal symbol fluctuation starts.

After executing the process of step S9788, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine. As a result, thereafter, an effect corresponding to the remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length variation is performed. In other words, it is treated as if the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is extended when the content of the effect is determined. For example, in the second special symbol variation this time, due to the processing of step S9725 in FIG. On the other hand, in the next second special symbol variation, the process of step S9722 in FIG. 218 is performed, and any one of the effects (A) to (D) during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 219 is performed. It will be.

The processing during the first bonus mode described above with reference to FIGS. 218 to 221 may be performed in the first bonus mode as the initial game described above, or in the first bonus mode as an extra game (see FIG. 215). mode, or both of these first bonus modes. As described above, in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation, the presence or absence of winning the normal symbol losing length variation, the remaining ST number, and the presence or absence of winning the big hit. Rendering can be performed according to one of the elements or any two or more elements.

In addition, in the first bonus mode, the above-described drum variation effect may be performed as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. For example, when the result of the big hit determination related to one special symbol variation is a big hit, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a winning pattern as a drum variation effect (performed during the special symbol variation) corresponding to the special symbol variation. If the result of the big hit determination related to one special symbol variation is not a big hit, the drum symbol 9202 is stop-displayed in a losing pattern as a drum variation effect (performed during the special symbol variation) corresponding to the special symbol variation. It may be assumed that Also, if the result of the big hit determination related to one special symbol variation is a big hit, before the special symbol variation is started, the look-ahead effect (for example, the same effect as the above-mentioned loss length variation look-ahead effect) is performed. It may be assumed that As such a look-ahead effect, the same effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining STs, or depending on the number of remaining STs Different effects may be performed depending on the case.

Further, when a drum variation effect is performed as an effect corresponding to the special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be associated with one special symbol variation. For example, while one special symbol variation is being performed, a drum variation effect may be performed a plurality of times as an effect suggesting the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation. In addition, before one special symbol variation is started, a drum variation effect may be performed a plurality of times as an effect suggesting the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation. One drum variation effect is completed in about 2 seconds as described above, and it is possible to configure such that the drum variation effect is repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

<Remaining ST count adjustment processing>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing remaining ST number adjustment processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the above description, the remaining ST number image 9203 is displayed on the display device 7 in the variable probability mode (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (see FIG. 203). The remaining ST number image 9203 may indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number, or may not necessarily indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number (suggesting the remaining ST number). In the following description, it is assumed that the remaining ST number image 9203 suggests the remaining ST number.

The remaining ST number adjustment process shown in FIG. 222 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. For example, the remaining ST count adjustment process is performed when the first bonus mode starts or when the first bonus mode ends.

In the remaining ST count adjustment processing, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count (step S9801). The value of the actual number of remaining STs is an accurate value of the number of remaining STs, and as described above, the value is updated (subtracted by 1) each time a special symbol variation is performed. The value of the number of remaining STs for display is an approximate value of the number of remaining STs, and the value is updated (decreased by 1) each time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 corresponds to the value of the remaining ST number for display. The value of the actual remaining ST count and the value of the remaining ST count for display are stored in the work RAM 303, respectively.

When determining that there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, the sub CPU 301 sets the value of the remaining ST count for display to the value of the actual remaining ST count (step S9802). ). As a result, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed to the value of the actual remaining ST number, and the remaining ST number image 9203 is corrected to indicate the correct value of the remaining ST number. For example, when the first bonus mode (normal symbol losing length variation) starts or when the first bonus mode (normal symbol losing length variation) ends, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 increases or decreases. .

If it is determined in step S9801 that there is no difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, or after executing the processing of step S9802, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the ST number adjustment process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. For example, during normal operation, the value of the remaining ST count for display is updated (decremented by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. If it is larger (smaller) than the value of the number of times, it can be configured to increase (decrease) the update frequency or increase (decrease) the value to be subtracted in one update. .

<Remaining ST count update process for display>
FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing the display remaining ST count update process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the above description, the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated (decremented by 1) each time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated is not limited to this example. For example, every time the drum variation production is performed (when the variation of the drum pattern 9202 starts), the value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated, or the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation The value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated when the second special symbol variation) starts. Below, an example in which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated when the second special symbol variation starts will be described.

The remaining ST number update process for display shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the control circuit 300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

In the remaining ST count update process for display, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a big hit (step S9821). When judging that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a big hit, the sub CPU 301 judges whether or not the big hit of this time is a 10R big hit (see FIG. 133) (step S9822). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 contains information indicating the result of the big hit determination and the type of the big hit, the sub CPU 301 receives the special symbol effect start command. It is possible to make a judgment of

If it is determined in step S9821 that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is not a big hit (losing or a small hit), or in step S9822, the big hit this time is not a 10R big hit (it is a 2R big hit). If so, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10) (step S9823). The error of the remaining ST count for display is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the remaining ST count for display from the value of the actual remaining ST count. Here, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 50 is set as the value of the actual remaining ST number, and 40 is set as the value of the remaining ST number for display. Therefore, the initial value of the error of the number of remaining STs for display is 10.

When determining that the error of the remaining ST count for display is the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining ST count for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9824). After that, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error of the remaining ST count for display is not the predetermined value (10), it is determined whether or not the error of the remaining ST count for display is greater than the predetermined value (10) (step S9825). When determining that the error of the remaining ST count for display is larger than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 adds 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9826). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery to determine which process to perform, either the process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display or the process of maintaining the value of the remaining ST count for display. may be determined. After executing the process of step S9826, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining that the error of the remaining ST count for display is smaller than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 301 subtracts 2 from the value of the remaining ST count for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9827). After that, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot, the sub CPU 301 subtracts 3 from the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 (step S9827). Here, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 10R big hit is 15 seconds. The sub CPU 301 may decrement the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 303 by 1 (subtract 3 in total) every 5 seconds while the special symbol variation is being performed. . After executing the process of step S9827, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

It should be noted that the total time of the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 2R big win (see FIG. 133) and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of the opening of the big winning prize opening 131 for the big win is 10 seconds. It's becoming In addition, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation related to the small win and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of opening the big winning hole 151 for the small win is 5 seconds. Also, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the loss is 5 seconds. In addition, when a jackpot game state occurs, the value of the remaining ST count for display may or may not be reset, but in the form in which the remaining ST count update process for display shown in FIG. 223 is performed, , is not reset (after the second bonus mode is over, the value of the number of remaining STs for display before the start of the second bonus mode is inherited).

In the above description, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 suggests the remaining ST number. In this embodiment, instead of the remaining ST number image 9203, a rank image (not shown) may be displayed on the display device 7 as an image suggesting the remaining ST number. The rank image is, for example, an image corresponding to a character such as "A", "B", "C", "D", etc., and the character (rank) suggests the number of remaining STs. For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST number for display managed in the processing of FIG. ” is displayed, and when the remaining ST count for display is 40 or more and less than 60, “B” is displayed as a rank image, and when the remaining ST count for display is 20 or more and less than 40, as a rank image It is possible to adopt a configuration in which "C" is displayed and "D" is displayed as a rank image when the number of remaining STs for display is 5 or more and less than 20. When the number of remaining STs for display becomes less than 5, the rank image may be deleted.

In addition, the value of the remaining ST count for display is set so that the value of the remaining ST count for display always becomes a specific value (eg, 0) when the actual remaining ST count reaches a predetermined value (eg, 5). It is also possible to control update (subtraction or addition). For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST number for display, and after that, every time a special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining ST number for display is set by 5. After subtraction and the value of the remaining ST number for display reaches 30, the remaining ST number for display may not be subtracted (added or maintained) by a lottery even if the special pattern variation is performed. . As a result, if the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes 30 when the value of the actual remaining ST count reaches 11, then every time the special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining display ST count becomes 30. The ST count is decremented by 5, and when the value of the actual remaining ST count becomes 5, the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes 0. It is possible to employ such a configuration. Note that when the actual remaining ST number becomes a predetermined value (eg, 5) or less (when the value of the remaining ST number for display becomes a specific value (eg, 0)), the actual remaining ST number If the value is greater than a predetermined value (eg, 5), the mode may shift to a mode in which a different background is displayed.

In the above description, the remaining ST count (rank) for display is updated based on the result of the jackpot determination or the type of the jackpot. It may be configured such that the number of remaining STs (rank) is updated. For example, if you have won the normal symbol losing length variation, compared to the case where you have not won the normal symbol losing length variation, even if the value to be subtracted or added in one update is larger (smaller) good. Similarly, when the result of the big win determination is a big win, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be increased (smaller) than when the result of the big win determination is not a big win. As a result, it is possible to suggest the presence or absence of winning to the big hit and the presence or absence of winning to the normal symbol losing length variation through the remaining ST number image 9203 and the rank image.

<Possible change mode mid-normal map look-ahead effect processing>
FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing normal pattern prefetch effect processing in probability variable mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Normal figure prefetch effect processing in the probability variation mode shown in FIG. 224 is, in the probability variation mode, after the game ball has won the second start opening 140A, 140B, when the special symbol variation related to the start winning starts, sub-control circuit This is the process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76) by 300. FIG. In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

In the probable variable mode mid-normal pattern look-ahead effect processing, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a normal pattern look-ahead lottery (step S9841). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the general pattern prediction lottery has been won (step S9842). If it is determined that the general/universal map pre-reading lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the general pattern pre-reading lottery has been won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a big hit (step S9843). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the big hit determination, by receiving the special symbol effect start command, the sub CPU 301 can make the determination. is possible.

When judging that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9844). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A) (step S9845). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (A) wins the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the variable mode, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special pattern change is a big hit, and when the normal pattern loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in In the process of step S9845, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that both the big win and the normal symbol losing length variation have been won. The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images according to the type of the jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9845, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9844 that the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol prefetch effect (B) (step S9846). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (B) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the variable mode, the result of the big hit determination related to this special pattern change is a big hit, and you have not won the normal pattern loss length change. It is a production performed in In the process of step S9846, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the player has won the big prize. The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images according to the type of the jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9846 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effect (A). After executing the process of step S9846, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9843 that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is not a big hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a small hit ( step S9847). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 includes information indicating the result of the big hit determination, by receiving the special symbol effect start command, the sub CPU 301 can make the determination. is possible.

When judging that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9848). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C) (step S9849). In the normal pattern pre-reading effect (C), in the variable mode, the general pattern pre-reading lottery is won, the result of the big hit determination related to the special pattern change this time is a small hit, and the normal pattern loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9849, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that both the small winning and the normal symbol losing length variation have been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9849 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (B). After executing the process of step S9849, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9848 that the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the sub CPU 301 executes a normal symbol prefetch effect (D) (step S9850). Normal pattern pre-reading effect (D) wins the normal pattern pre-reading lottery in the probability variation mode, the result of the big hit determination related to this special pattern variation is a small hit, and the normal pattern loss length variation is not elected. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9850, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that a small prize has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9850 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (C). After executing the process of step S9850, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9847 that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is not a small hit, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9851). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol prefetch effect (E) (step S9852). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (E) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the probability variation mode, the result of the big hit determination related to this special pattern change is a loss, and when you win the normal pattern loss length variation It is a production performed in In the process of step S9852, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won. The image displayed by the process of step S9852 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (D). After executing the process of step S9852, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9851 that the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the sub CPU 301 executes the normal symbol prefetch effect (F) (step S9853). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (F) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the probability variation mode, the result of the big hit determination related to this special pattern change is a loss, and you have not won the normal pattern loss length variation. It is a production performed in In the processing of step S9853, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that neither the big or small win nor the normal symbol losing length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9853 may be the same image as or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (E). After executing the process of step S9853, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

In the general map look-ahead effect (A), the general map look-ahead effect (C), and the general map look-ahead effect (E), the general map look-ahead effect (B), the general map look-ahead effect (D), and the general map look-ahead effect A specific image (an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won) is displayed with a high probability compared to (F). As a result, during the special symbol variation, it is suggested that the normal symbol loss length variation is won. As an image that can be displayed in the general pattern look-ahead effect (A), the general pattern look-ahead effect (C), and the general pattern look-ahead effect (E), images that cannot be displayed in other effects (normal pattern loss length variation) An image that confirms that the

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the general pattern look-ahead effect (A), the general pattern look-ahead effect (C), and the general pattern look-ahead effect (E), different images are displayed according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal pattern loss length fluctuation. It may be displayed on the device 7 .

Further, in the above description, the probability variation mode mid-normal map prefetch effect processing shown in FIG. You can do it.

<Special figure look-ahead effect processing in probability mode>
Figure 225 is the flowchart which shows the special figure foreseeing effect processing in probability variation mode which relates to the 5th pachinko game machine.

The special figure prefetch effect processing in the probability variation mode shown in FIG. This is the process performed in the determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 76). In addition, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 200 and sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol storage check process (see step S192 in FIG. 64).

In the probability variation mode special figure prefetch effect processing, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a special figure prefetch lottery (step S9861). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the special figure prefetch lottery is won (step S9862). When determining that the special figure prefetch lottery is not won, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure prefetch lottery is won, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol losing length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 136). It is determined whether or not (step S9863). Since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 136), by receiving the normal symbol variation start command, the sub CPU 301 can make the determination. It is possible.

When determining that the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol losing length variation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit is won (step S9864). In this processing, the sub CPU 301 determines that a big win is won when the result of the big hit determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a big win.

When judging that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (A) (step S9865). In the special figure prefetching performance (A), the special figure prefetching lottery is won in the variable probability mode, the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is won. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9865, for example, the sub CPU 301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9845 of FIG. 224) suggesting that both the jackpot and normal symbol losing length variation have been won. display on the device 7. The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images according to the type of the jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9865, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When judging that the jackpot has not been won in step S9864, the sub CPU 301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (B) (step S9866). In the special figure prefetching performance (B), in the probability variable mode, the special figure prefetching lottery is won, the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is not won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9866, for example, the sub CPU 301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9852 of FIG. 224) suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won on the display device 7. Let The image displayed by the process of step S9866 may be the same image or a different image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure prefetch effect (A). After executing the process of step S9866, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9863 that the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol losing length variation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9867). In this processing, the sub CPU 301 determines that a big win is won when the result of the big hit determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a big win.

When judging that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (C) (step S9868). In the special figure prefetching performance (C), the special figure prefetching lottery is won in the variable probability mode, the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9868, for example, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display an image suggesting that the player has won a big win (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9846 of FIG. 224). The sub CPU 301 may cause the display device 7 to display different images according to the type of the jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9868 may be the same image or a different image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure prefetch effects (A) to (B). After executing the process of step S9868, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

When judging that the jackpot has not been won in step S9867, the sub CPU 301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (D) (step S9869). In the special figure prefetching performance (D), the special figure prefetching lottery is won in the probability variable mode, the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is not won. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9869, for example, the sub CPU 301 displays an image suggesting that neither the jackpot nor the normal symbol losing length variation has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9853 of FIG. 224). is displayed on the display device 7. The image displayed by the process of step S9869 may be the same image or a different image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure prefetch effects (A) to (C). After executing the process of step S9869, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

In the special pre-reading effect (A) and the special pre-reading effect (C), a specific image (that you won the jackpot) has a higher probability than the special pre-reading effect (B) and the special pre-reading effect (D) image) is displayed. As a result, it is suggested that a big hit is won during normal symbol variation. As an image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead performance (A) and the special figure look-ahead performance (C), an image that cannot be displayed in other performances (an image that confirms the winning of the jackpot) may be provided. Also, in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D), respectively, depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 10 times or more, when it is 5 times or more and less than 10 times, 5 times It may be configured such that a different image is displayed when it is less than). Further, as the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D), the above-described drum variation effects may be performed.

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (B), different images may be displayed on the display device 7 according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol losing length fluctuation.

Also, in the above, it was explained that the special figure foreseeing effect processing during the probability variation mode shown in FIG. You can do it.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation becomes a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, basically, the production corresponding to the start of the normal symbol loss length variation (Fig. 207 (j) and ( k)) will be performed, but if a big hit is won (for example, if the process of step S9865 is performed), the effect may not be performed. That is, in this case, when the normal symbol losing length variation (first bonus mode) starts, the state shifts to the big win game state (second bonus mode) soon after, until the start time of the big win game state, "BONUS ” may be suspended from being performed. For example, when the process of step S9865 is performed, the drum pattern 9202 may be stopped and displayed in the losing pattern (even though the normal pattern losing length variation is won), or the drum pattern 9202 may be stopped. It may be arranged such that, while the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 207(k)) is not performed at that point. After that, when shifting to the jackpot game state, it is possible to perform an effect (hit notification effect) to excite the start of the "BONUS".

<Icon stop suggestion notice effect>
FIG. 226(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. FIG. 226(b) is a diagram showing a pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the first effect stage, the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 ("Bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and " A "Cherry" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c) is displayed on the display device 7. FIG. The “bell” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a, the “watermelon” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301b, and the “cherry” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c are images imitating meters.

Specifically, the “bell” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a, the “watermelon” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301b, and the “cherry” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c are each in an initial display mode (the meter is full). level 1 display mode (the meter is filled to one level), level 2 display mode (the meter is filled to two levels), and level MAX display mode (the meter is full) ) can be displayed in any mode.

The meter indicated by the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 accumulates according to the effect (icon stop suggestion advance notice effect) performed during the first effect stage. The icon stop suggestive notice effect shown in FIG. 226(b) is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)). The icon stop suggestive notice performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit notice performances during one special pattern variation. Note that the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect is a effect that can be performed only in the first effect stage.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “171” is a effect in which the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a is level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “172” is a effect in which the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "173" is a effect in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" are effects suggesting the possibility that the above-described "bell" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode, the "bell" icon is displayed in a higher level than when the "bell" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a is in the initial display mode. Icons are likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode, the “bell” icon display mode is higher than when the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon display mode is higher than when the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to "pseudo 2".

The effect corresponding to the effect number “174” is a effect in which the display mode of the “watermelon” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “175” is a effect in which the display mode of the “watermelon” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “176” is a effect in which the display mode of the “watermelon” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" are effects suggesting the possibility that the above-described "watermelon" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop-suggesting meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode, the "watermelon" icon is displayed in a higher level than when the "watermelon" icon stop-suggesting meter image 9301b is in the initial display mode. Icons are likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than when the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode. ” icon is likely to appear (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the "watermelon" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to "pseudo 3".

The effect corresponding to the effect number “177” is a effect in which the display mode of the “cherry” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c is level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “178” is a effect in which the display mode of the “cherry” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c is level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “179” is an effect in which the display mode of the “cherry” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" are effects suggesting the possibility that the above-described "cherry" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is in the initial display mode. Icons are likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode. ” icon is likely to appear (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the "cherry" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to a predetermined super reach.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "179" are basically, after the game ball has won the first start hole 120, when the special symbol variation related to the start win is being performed, the special It is performed as an effect for suggesting to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during pattern fluctuation progresses. That is, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. Similarly, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "watermelon" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. In addition, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "cherry" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173", after the game ball has entered the first starting hole 120, the prefetching effect is performed before the special symbol variation related to the starting winning starts. In some cases, the look-ahead effect may be performed as an effect for suggesting to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the special symbol variation progresses. In this case, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation is the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the next and subsequent special symbol variations (to be read ahead). will suggest Therefore, in the look-ahead effect for one starting prize, if the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a becomes the level MAX display mode, the simulation performed during the special symbol variation related to the starting prize In the continuous effect, it is determined that at least "pseudo 2" is shifted.

<Lottery process for icon stop suggestion notification contents>
FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The lottery process for icon stop suggestion notice contents shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the content lottery process (see FIG. 138).

In the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect will occur during the current special symbol variation, based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9901). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the sub variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation is the look-ahead sub variation pattern (see FIG. 191).

When determining that the look-ahead effect will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect will occur based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9902). When determining that the pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9903).

When judging that the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 301 executes the lottery process for the icon stop suggestion advance notice content for pseudo 3 (step S9904). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3", and to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3". In that case, the content of the effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect to be performed in "pseudo 3". As a result, in "pseudo 3", the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9904, the sub CPU 301 executes the pseudo 2 icon stop suggestion notice lottery process (step S9905). ). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion advance notice effect in "pseudo 2", and to perform an icon stop suggestion advance notice effect in "pseudo 2". In that case, the content of the effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect to be performed in "pseudo 2". As a result, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b can be changed in "pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo-continuous effect will not occur, or after executing the processing in step S9905, the sub CPU 301 executes pseudo-1 icon stop suggestion notice lottery processing (step S9906). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "Pseudo 1", and to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "Pseudo 1". In that case, the content of the effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1". As a result, in "pseudo 1", the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9901 that the look-ahead effect will occur during the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 301 executes a look-ahead icon stop suggestion notice lottery process (step S9907). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion advance notice effect in the look-ahead effect. Determine the content of the performance. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “171” to “173” as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect performed in the look-ahead effect. As a result, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed in the look-ahead effect.

After executing the process of step S9906 or step S9907, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

<Relevant hold change effect lottery processing>
228 and 229 are flowcharts showing the holding change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), the held ball image 9302 is displayed on the display device 7 in the first effect stage. The reserved ball image 9302 is an image corresponding to the current (currently performed) special symbol variation (the reserved ball). Also, one or more of the first reserved ball image 9303a, the second reserved ball image 9303b, the third reserved ball image 9303c, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d according to the number of reserved special symbol variations. image is displayed. The first reserved ball image 9303a is an image corresponding to the first reserved ball, the second reserved ball image 9303b is an image corresponding to the second reserved ball, and the third reserved ball image 9303c is It is an image corresponding to the third reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d is an image corresponding to the fourth reserved ball.

In this embodiment, an effect of changing the color of the pending ball image 9302 (the pending change effect) is performed. Through the color of the reserved ball image 9302, the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is suggested. The pending change effect is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)). The pending change performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit announcement performance during one special pattern variation. Note that the colors of the first reserved ball image 9303a, the second reserved ball image 9303b, the third reserved ball image 9303c, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d may change due to the look-ahead effect.

The holding change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is the first effect when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start time process (see FIG. 186). This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 300 after the stage announcement content lottery process (see FIG. 138). The pending change effect lottery process may be performed even when the current effect stage is the second effect stage or the third effect stage.

In the pending change effect lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 executes a pending change pattern combination lottery process (step S9921). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the pending change effect (at what timing and how the color of the pending ball image 9302 is changed) by performing a lottery based on random numbers. The content of the pending change effect is defined by a combination of pending change patterns. The pending change pattern includes pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern (6), pending change Pattern (7), pending change pattern (8) and pending change pattern (9) are provided.

Combinations of pending change patterns include, for example, a combination of pending change pattern (1) and pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), and pending change pattern (3). The combination of change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (7), pending change pattern (8), And, a combination of pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern ( 6), pending change pattern (8), and pending change pattern (9). A combination of pending change patterns always includes a pending change pattern (9). In addition, when the combination of pending change patterns includes the pending change pattern (7), the combination must also include the pending change pattern (8). In the process of step S9921, the sub CPU 301 selects one combination from a plurality of combinations of pending change patterns provided in advance.

Next, sub CPU 301 determines whether or not pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns determined in step S9921 (step S9922). Suspended change pattern (1) changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 1” stage in the pseudo continuous effect or “no pseudo” effect starts (when this special symbol variation starts). It is a pattern that makes

When determining that pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (1) (step S9923). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “simulated 1” stage in the simulated continuous effect or the “no simulated” effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of This will cause the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in a determined manner at the start of the "pseudo 1". The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9922 is performed is the same as the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a immediately before the special symbol variation of this time is started. When the color of the reserved ball image 9303 is changed by the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 301 determines the color change mode of the reserved ball image 9302 based on the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a.

When it is determined in step S9922 that the pending change pattern (1) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9923, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (2) (step S9924). Suspended change pattern (2) is a pattern that changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "non-simulated". The combination including the pending change pattern (2) can be selected only when a sub-variation pattern is determined in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode in "pseudo 1".

When determining that pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (2) (step S9925). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the stage of "simulated 1" in the simulated continuous effect or the effect of "no simulated". For example, the sub CPU 301 sets “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when ten pie occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage. Note that the color of the suspended ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9924 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9923 when the processing of step S9923 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9923 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9922 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9924 that the pending change pattern (2) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the processing in step S9925, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (3) (step S9926). The pending change pattern (3) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 2” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. A combination including the pending change pattern (3) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs.

When determining that the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (3) (step S9927). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 2” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of This will cause the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in a determined manner at the start of the "pseudo 2". Note that the color of the suspended ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9926 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9925 when the processing of step S9925 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9925 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9924 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9926 that the pending change pattern (3) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9927, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (4) (step S9928). Suspended change pattern (4) is a pattern that changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 2” stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. The combination including the pending change pattern (4) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and a sub-variation pattern is determined in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode in "pseudo 2". It's becoming

When determining that pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (4) (step S9929). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 2” stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when ten pie occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9928 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9927 when the processing of step S9927 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9927 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9926 is performed.

When it is determined in step S9928 that the pending change pattern (4) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9929, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (5) (step S9930). The pending change pattern (5) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 3” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. A combination including the pending change pattern (5) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the "pseudo 3" stage.

When determining that pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (5) (step S9931). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 3” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of This will cause the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in a determined manner at the start of the "pseudo 3". Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9930 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9929 when the processing of step S9929 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9929 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9928 is performed.

When it is determined in step S9930 that the pending change pattern (5) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9931, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (6) (step S9932). Suspended change pattern (6) is a pattern that changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 3” stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. The combination including the pending change pattern (6) is such that a pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3", and the decorative pattern is in a ready-to-win state in the "pseudo 3". can be selected only when an appropriate sub-fluctuation pattern has been determined.

When determining that pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (6) (step S9933). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when ten pie occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage. Note that the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9932 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9931 when the processing of step S9931 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9931 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9930 is performed.

When it is determined in step S9932 that the pending change pattern (6) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9933, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (7) (step S9934). The pending change pattern (7) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending sphere image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the pending sphere image 9302 reaches the final color. . The timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (7) can be, for example, the first half of super reach.

When determining that pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (7) (step S9935). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved ball image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the reserved ball image 9302 reaches the final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of This causes the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in the determined manner with two more color changes remaining. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9934 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9933 when the processing of step S9933 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9933 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9932 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9934 that the pending change pattern (7) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9935, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (8) (step S9936). The pending change pattern (8) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending sphere image 9302 in a situation where one more color change remains before the pending sphere image 9302 reaches the final color. . The timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (8) can be, for example, the first half or the second half of super reach.

When determining that pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (8) (step S9937). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the reserved ball image 9302 in a situation where one more color change is left until the reserved ball image 9302 reaches the final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the retained ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner in a situation where one more color change remains. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9936 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9935 when the processing of step S9935 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9935 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9934 is performed.

When it is determined in step S9936 that the pending change pattern (8) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9937, the sub CPU 301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (9) (step S9938). The pending change pattern (9) is a pattern used to change the color of the pending sphere image 9302 to the final color. Although detailed description is omitted, before the holding change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is performed, the color of the holding ball image 9302 is finally changed by lottery based on random numbers. (the final color of the reserved ball image 9302) is determined. In the process of step S9938, sub CPU 301 determines that pending change pattern (9) is always included in the combination of pending change patterns. The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (9) is, for example, when a tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage, when "pseudo 2" starts, when a tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage, "pseudo 3 , the first half or the second half of Super Reach, etc. can be mentioned.

When determining that pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (9) (step S9939). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines how to change the color of the pending sphere image 9302 in order to change the color of the pending sphere image 9302 to the final color. For example, the sub CPU 301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 changes in the determined mode, and the color of the reserved ball image 9302 is changed by the lottery performed before the holding change effect lottery processing shown in FIGS. Final color determined by (original lottery). Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9938 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9937 when the processing of step S9937 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9937 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9936 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9938 that the pending change pattern (9) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9939, the sub CPU 301 ends this subroutine.

Note that if the color of the reserved ball image 9302 that has been determined before the processing of step S9938 is already the final color, the sub CPU 301 determines "NO" in the processing of step S9938. good too. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may display the reserved ball image 9302 in the final color, or may display it in another color (default color). When the color of the reserved ball image 9302 changes to another color after the color of the reserved ball image 9302 becomes the final color, it may be determined that the reserved change effect is a false effect.

<Slot game in the 6th specific super reach>
FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the contents of effect blocks in the sixth specific super reach. FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in the second effect stage (see FIG. 137(a)), the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 193) may be performed. There is a possibility that it will develop into a specific super reach. In the sixth specific super reach, a game (slot game during the sixth specific super reach) is played in which a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 7 and then stopped. . When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right in the sixth specific super reach slot game (when three are aligned), a predetermined super reach is developed. The sixth specific super reach middle slot game is composed of a plurality of effect blocks. FIG. 230 illustrates the contents of the effect block.

In the effect block “1”, the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the description of the sixth specific super reach slot game. In the effect block “2”, an image (for example, an image showing a title of a predetermined super reach) indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has been successful (developing to a predetermined super reach) is displayed on the display device 7 . to be displayed. In the effect block “3”, the display device 7 displays an image indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has failed (the sixth specific super reach slot game ends).

In the production block "4", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 7 in three columns, left, middle, and right, for eight seconds, and an image encouraging the "additional" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 7, the "additional" icons are not displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "additional" icons are not aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "4" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In the effect block "5", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 7 in three columns, left, middle, and right, for eight seconds, and an image encouraging the "additional" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 7, the "additional" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "additional" icons are aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "5" is performed, the value of the above-described "PLAY TIME" (see FIG. 192(b)) is added by a predetermined number, and the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. .

In the effect block "6", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 7 in three columns (left, middle, right) for eight seconds, and an image encouraging the "mission" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 7, the "Mission" icons are not stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right three columns (the "Mission" icons are not aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "6" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In production blocks "7" and "8", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right on the display device 7 for eight seconds, and the "mission" icons are encouraged to be aligned. After such an image is displayed on the display device 7, "Mission" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "Mission" icons are aligned), and a predetermined mission begins. After that, the mission fails in production block "7", and succeeds in the mission in production block "8". When the effect corresponding to the effect block "7" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach is continued, and when the effect corresponding to the effect block "8" is performed, a predetermined super reach. develop into.

In the effect block "9", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 7 in three columns of left, middle, and right for eight seconds, and an image encouraging the "cherry" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 7, the "cherry" icons are not stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right three columns (the "cherry" icons are not aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "9" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game continues. In the effect block "10", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in three columns on the left, middle and right sides of the display device 7 for 8 seconds, and an image encouraging the "cherry" icons to come together. is displayed on the display device 7, the "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle and right (three "cherry" icons are aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "10" is performed, it develops into a predetermined super reach.

The sixth specific super ready-to-win content lottery process shown in FIG. 231 is performed when the current effect stage is the second effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start time process (see FIG. 186), effect number "153". ” or “154” is performed by the sub-control circuit 300 . The content of each effect block is determined by performing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 301 determines the content of the final effect block (step S9941). In this process, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation is a sub-variation pattern that develops into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect block "2" as the final effect block. . On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation is a sub-variation pattern that does not develop into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect block "3" as the final effect block.

Next, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the effect block immediately before the final effect block (step S9942). In this process, when the effect block "2" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 301 selects the effect block as the effect block immediately before the final effect block by performing a lottery based on the random number value. Determine "8" or "10". On the other hand, when the effect block "3" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 301 selects the effect block "4" as the effect block immediately before the final effect block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. ” or “6”.

Next, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9943). In this process, sub CPU 301 subtracts the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9942 from the value of the stock timer at the start of the sixth specific super reach, and sets the value to the new stock timer. is stored in the work RAM 303 as a value of . The value of the stock timer at the time when the 6th specific super reach starts corresponds to the value of "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 at the time when the slot game starts during the 6th specific super reach during this special symbol variation. are doing. The value is determined before the sixth specific super reach content lottery process is started.

Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "4" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "4". The time corresponding to effect block "6" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to effect block "6". The time corresponding to the effect block "8" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect (excluding the mission) corresponding to the effect block "8". The time corresponding to the effect block "10" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "10". Note that the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach is started is always a value corresponding to 8 seconds or more.

Next, sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the stock timer is greater than 0 (step S9944). When determining that the value of the stock timer is greater than 0, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the final effect block among the undetermined effect blocks (step S9945). In this process, the sub CPU 301 performs a lottery based on a random value to select one of the effect block "5", the effect block "7", and the effect block "9" as the last effect block. Determine the production block.

Next, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9946). In this process, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9945 from the stock timer value stored in the work RAM 303 as a new stock timer value. Store it in the work RAM 303 . Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "5" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "5". The time corresponding to the effect block "7" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect (excluding the mission) corresponding to the effect block "7". The time corresponding to effect block "9" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to effect block "9". When effect block “5” is determined in step S9945, the sub CPU 301 subtracts the value of the stock timer and adds a predetermined number (additional time) to the value of the stock timer. The value of the stock timer is configured to be N times 8 seconds (N is an integer).

After executing the process of step S9946, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to step S9944. When determining that the value of the stock timer is 0 in step S9944, the sub CPU 301 determines the contents of the first effect block (step S9947). In this process, the sub CPU 301 determines the effect block "1" as the first effect block. After executing the process of step S9947, the sub CPU 301 terminates this subroutine.

The contents of the sixth specific super reachable slot game are determined by executing the sixth specific super reachable lottery process described above. For example, in the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, effect block "2" is determined in step S9941, effect block "10" is determined in step S9942, effect block "9" is determined in step S9945, and further. Effect block "5" is determined in step S9945, effect block "7" is determined in step S9945, and then effect block "1" is determined in step S9947. The order of block "1" → production block "7" → production block "5" → production block "9" → production block "10" → production block "2" (the order determined in the 6th specific super reach content lottery process ), an effect corresponding to each effect block is performed.

<Effects and logo lamp on the LCD screen>
FIG. 232(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first presentation stage logo effect announcement presentation. FIG. 232(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the second presentation stage logo effect announcement presentation. 233 to 235 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the second production stage logo effect forewarning production.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined location (for example, the upper side of the display device 7) of the game board unit 10, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. As effects using such a logo lamp, there are cases where a first effect stage logo effect forewarning effect and a second effect stage foreground logo effect effect are performed.

The first effect stage logo effect forewarning effect shown in FIG. 232(a) is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage. The logo effect forewarning effect for the first effect stage can occur only in the first effect stage. In addition, the logo effect forewarning performance for the first production stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit forewarning performances during one special pattern variation.

Although not shown, before the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "181" to "184" are performed, first, the decorative symbols become tenpai after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation. After that, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "181" to "184", the button image is displayed on the display device 7 and the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted. Then, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, nothing in particular occurs in the effect corresponding to the effect number "181", and the effect ends. On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "182" to "184", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner after a predetermined period of time (one second) has passed since the absorption of the effect.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "182", the logo lamp emits white light. As a result, the characters "X", "Y", and "Z" are illuminated in white in the first logo portion, the second logo portion, and the third logo portion, respectively. Also, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "183", the logo lamp emits red light. As a result, an appearance is created in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in red in the first logo portion, the second logo portion, and the third logo portion, respectively.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "184", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates the appearance that a given word (eg, "CHANCE") is lit white throughout the logo cover. A large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix (lattice) on the back side of the logo cover, and any word can be formed by appropriately selecting the LEDs to emit light.

The performance corresponding to the performance number ``182'' has a higher expectation for a big hit than the performance corresponding to the performance number ``181'', and the performance corresponding to the performance number ``183'' is the performance corresponding to the performance number ``182''. , and the effect corresponding to the effect number "184" has the highest degree of expectation for a big hit.

The logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage shown in FIG. 232(b) is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the second effect stage. The logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage can occur only in the second effect stage. In addition, the logo effect forewarning performance for the second performance stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit forewarning performances during one special pattern variation.

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", after the decorative pattern starts to change (see FIG. 233(a)), the screen (monitor) of the display device 7 is displayed as if it were reduced. (See FIG. 233(b)). Then, an image is displayed such that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the left (see FIG. 233(c)), and a plurality of icons are displayed in place of the decorative pattern, and each icon flashes in sequence. The displayed roulette effect is performed (see FIG. 233(d)), the button image is displayed on the display device 7, and the operation of the effect button 54 is accepted (see FIG. 233(e)). After that, one icon is selected as a result of the roulette effect, and an image indicating the title of the effect corresponding to the icon (for example, “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 233(f)) is displayed on the display device 7 . "CHANCE" indicates the title of an effect in which the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed by the logo cover (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 234 and 235).

Note that a predetermined button effective time is set while the button image is being displayed. If the effect button 54 is operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, " CHANCE” is selected). On the other hand, if the effect button 54 is not operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, "CHANCE") is selected at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends). screen).

After that, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", an effect in which the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect) is performed. In the effect absorption production, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 7, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "191", the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the fact that the logo lamp does not emit light in a predetermined manner and the result of the effect absorption effect is a failure. becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "192" and "193", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner. As a result, an appearance is created in which the characters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in predetermined colors in the first logo portion, the second logo portion, and the third logo portion, respectively. As the predetermined effect, a plurality of types of effects having different colors (white effect, red effect, etc.) may be provided, and the logo lamp may be configured to emit light in the same color as the color of the appearing effect. . After the logo lamp emits light, the decorative pattern becomes Tenpai. At this time, "PLAY TIME" is stocked in the effect corresponding to the effect number "193". After that, it shifts to the notice after the success of Tenpai. As described above, in the pre-notice after the success of Tenpai, a connecting effect corresponding to the development destination Super Reach is performed (see FIG. 193(b)).

FIG. 234 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 after the start of the effect absorption presentation in the presentation corresponding to the presentation number "192". As shown in FIG. 234, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 234(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. It is displayed in such a manner as to approach the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 234(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so as to form the character "X" 9410L (see FIG. 234(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 7, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 234(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp lights up so that the character "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 234(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 7, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 234(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears and the third logo portion 9401R emits light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo portion 9401R, and the logo lamp is lit so as to form the character "Z" 9410R (see FIG. 234(e)). After that, the image display is such that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see FIG. 234(e)), and the decorative pattern 9001 becomes the ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 234(f)).

FIG. 235 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 7 after the start of the effect absorption presentation in the presentation corresponding to the presentation number "191". As shown in FIG. 235, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 235(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced in size. It is displayed in such a manner as to approach the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 235(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so as to form the character "X" 9410L (see FIG. 235(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 7, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 235(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp lights up so that the character "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 235(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 7, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 235(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears, but the third logo portion 9401R does not emit light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed into the third logo portion 9401R, but the letter "Z" 9410R is not formed. After that, the logo lamp is extinguished (“X” character 9410L and “Y” character 9410C disappear), and the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) becomes an image display that moves to the right (see FIG. 235(e)). , the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 235(f)).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235, in the logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage, an effect in which the effect on the display device 7 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect) is performed. Although not shown, a similar effect absorption effect is performed in the logo effect forewarning effect for the first effect stage. Effect absorption rendering is a rendering that presents an appearance as if the image is acting on the logo cover (absorbed by the logo cover) by reducing or disappearing the image displayed near the logo cover. is.

In FIGS. 234 and 235, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R are divided (adjacent logo portions are not formed continuously and there is a gap). Although the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R may be integrally formed. In particular, when an arbitrary word is displayed on the entire logo cover, such as the effect corresponding to the effect number "184", it is desirable that the entire logo cover is integrally formed.

By the way, even in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to the A reduced working hours game state after the end of the jackpot game state, and if the condition for transition to the B reduced working hours game state is satisfied, it will shift to the B reduced working hours gaming state. Then, when the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, the state is shifted to the C time saving game state.
[5-3. Production control related to transition to B time-saving gaming state]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, in a gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the sub CPU 301 In the display device 7, the display of the first display effect is started in accordance with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, while the display of the second display effect is performed even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started. do not have. In addition, in a gaming state where hitting to the right is a regular game mode (for example, a high-probability short-time gaming state, a high-probability non-short-time gaming state, or a low-probability short-time gaming state), the sub CPU 301 displays the second While the display of the second display performance is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the display of the first display performance is not performed even if the variable display of the first special symbols is started. Note that the display device 7 is preferably a liquid crystal display device.

The first display effect whose display is started with the variable display of the first special symbol is, for example, a display effect performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Variable display of decorative patterns, display effects by characters, etc.) correspond. Regardless of the game state, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol blinking at one corner of the display device 7, for example, is not included in the first display effect.

Similarly, the second display effect whose display is started with the variable display of the second special symbol is, for example, a display effect performed in the display area 7a of the display device 7 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. (For example, variable display of decorative patterns, display effect by characters, etc.) corresponds. Regardless of the game state, the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol blinking at one corner of the display device 7, for example, is not included in the second display effect.

By the way, in a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the variable display of either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the final ceiling fluctuation. If the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the variable display of one of the special symbols, there is a possibility that the display performance will be unnatural and the interest will be reduced.

For example, at any timing from the start of the variable display of one special pattern as the final ceiling change to the end of this variable display (for example, when the variable display of the special pattern is started), the B time-saving game state In the case of transition, a situation may occur in which the first display effect is performed on the display device 7 while the state is internally transitioned to the B time-saving game state. In particular, when the variable display of one special pattern is started as the final ceiling change and the variable display of the other special pattern is started until this variable display is finished, the first display effect is changed to the second display effect. It can be unnatural to switch to

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display effect performed when shifting to the B time-saving game state in the final ceiling change is performed in a natural manner as described below, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed. . Below, the production control related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state performed by the sub CPU 301 will be described.

[5-3-1. Production control in normal pattern related to transition to B time saving game state]
Figure 236 is a time chart showing production control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, (A) time chart showing an example of production control performed in the first normal pattern, (B) th It is a time chart which shows an example of the production|presentation control performed by 2 normal patterns.

First, mainly referring to FIG. 236(A) and supplementarily referring to FIG. 237, the effect control in the first normal pattern will be described. FIG. 237 is an example of the display effects of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. FIG.

In the first normal pattern shown in FIG. 236(A), the variable display immediately before the final ceiling fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "pre-final ceiling fluctuation") is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the final ceiling fluctuation is the first. It is a pattern when the variable display of the special design and the variable display of the second special design are started during the variable display of the first special design in the ceiling final fluctuation. Note that the “liquid crystal effect” shown in FIG. 236 corresponds to the display effect displayed on the display device 7 . In addition, "Special 1_losing variation" represents a variation pattern when the result of the hit determination processing for the first special symbol is a loss, and "Special 1_big hit variation" indicates that the result of the hit determination processing for the first special symbol is a big hit. It shows a variation pattern in a certain case. Similarly, "special 2_loss variation" represents the variation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss, and "special 2_small hit variation" indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is A variation pattern in the case of a small hit is represented, and "special 1_big hit variation" represents a variation pattern in the case where the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is a big hit.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the change before the ceiling final, the sub CPU 301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in the display area 7a of the display device 7 as shown in FIG. 237(a). When the variable display of the first special symbol as the ceiling final variation is finished and the display mode of losing is derived to the 1 special symbol display section 163, as shown in FIG. Confirm and display the image showing .

As shown in FIG. 236(A), in the first normal pattern, the sub CPU 301 performs the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling change. As such, for example, a shutter closing effect is started. This shutter closing effect functions as a effect indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, that is, a transition effect to the B time-saving game state.

The shutter closing rendering is an image shown in FIG. 237(c). In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also performs a right-hand navigation effect for instructing a right-hand shot. Incidentally, the sub CPU 301, in the shutter closing effect, instead of or in addition to the right-hand navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , you may perform an effect related to the progress of the game. In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also displays an image indicating that the night mode is being prepared. In this embodiment, the night mode is a display effect suggesting that the B time-saving game state is being controlled, and the night mode preparation is a display effect suggesting that the B time-saving game state is being prepared. be.

By the way, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the ceiling final variation, the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol may be a big hit or a time saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling change is a big hit, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the shutter closing effect, but executes a normal big win change effect. .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling change is a time saving hit, the sub CPU 301 follows the process when a plurality of time saving game states overlap, B time saving game When transitioning to the state, a transition effect (for example, shutter closing effect) to the B time saving game state is performed, and when moving to the C time saving game state, a transition effect suggesting a transition to the C time saving game state is performed. . In this case, the transition effect to the B time saving game state and the transition effect to the C time saving game state may be the same or substantially the same effect in appearance, or may be different effects.

In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit. When the variable display of the special symbol is performed, it is possible that the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the main CPU 201 shifts to the B time-saving game state after controlling the small-hit game state, so that the sub CPU 301 displays a small win winning effect indicating that the small win game state has been won. It is preferable to give priority to the transition effect (for example, shutter closing effect) to . However, it is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may give priority to the transition effect to the B time saving game state over the small hit winning effect.

Also, the variable display of the second special pattern is started during the variable display of the first special pattern in the final ceiling change, and the result of the hit determination processing of the second special pattern may be a big hit or a time-saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling change is a big hit, the sub CPU 301 ends the shutter closing effect, irregular It is preferable to execute a big hit variation performance. In other words, it is preferable that the irregular big hit variation effect is preferentially executed over the transition effect to the B time saving game state.

again. When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling change is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 transitions to the B time saving gaming state (for example , Shutter closing effect) is ended, a night mode display effect is started as a display effect suggesting that the B time saving game state is controlled, and in this night mode display effect, a small hit is suggested. It is preferable to perform a hit suggestion production. That is, it is preferable to give priority to the small hit suggestion effect over the transition effect to the B time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may give priority to the transition effect to the B time-saving game state over the small hit suggestion effect.

During the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the big hit variation) is started as the variable display of the first rotation in the B time-saving gaming state, the main special symbol is the second. It is changed from 1 special design to 2nd special design.

In such a case, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the variation of the big hit) is started, the sub CPU 301 opens the closed shutter (ends the shutter closing effect), for example, and displays the second special symbol. A night mode display effect is started as the second display effect associated with the variable display (see FIG. 237(d)). That is, when the main special symbol changes from the first special symbol to the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling change, the sub CPU 301 changes the first display effect to the second display effect. switch to Therefore, the night mode display effect functions as an effect indicating the transition to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 236(A), the sub CPU 301 internally shifts to the B time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol as the ceiling final variation is started. Until the variable display of the 2 special symbols is started (until the night mode display effect is started), the shutter closing effect as the first display effect is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unnatural situation in which the display effect associated with the variable display of the special pattern is not started even though the variable display of the first special pattern is started in the final ceiling change, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

After completing the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling change, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect at least while being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

The sub CPU 301, while the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state, is performed, night mode display effect (see FIG. 237 (d)), game explanation effect ( 237(e)), a landing effect (see FIG. 237(f)), a right-handed instruction display effect (see FIG. 237(g)), and a count-up effect (see FIG. 237(g)).

The night mode display effect is, as described above, a display effect indicating that the game state has shifted to the B time-saving game state, and is, for example, a display effect in which the background image becomes night. The game explanation (see FIG. 237(e)) corresponds to a display effect in which explanations related to the game are displayed, such as information indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state. In the landing effect (see FIG. 237(f)), the text "Count Up" is displayed, and a ball of light, for example, hits the 7-segment display 71 provided, for example, on the lower right side of the display device 7. A display effect such as Although it is difficult to grasp from the illustration in FIG. 237, when the impact effect is performed, the sub CPU 301 starts high-speed fluctuation on the 7-segment display 71 with this as a trigger. After that, the sub CPU 301 performs a right-handed instruction display rendering for instructing a right-handed shot (see FIG. 237(g)). Although not shown, the count-up effect corresponds to a display effect in which the information displayed on the 7-segment display 71 (for example, the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state) seems to increase. The sub CPU 301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 71 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing a series of display effects from the night mode display effect to the count-up effect, and B time saving game. Information indicating the end timing of the state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed (see FIG. 237(h)). After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the second display effect associated with the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the display area 7 a of the display device 7 .

In the first normal pattern, it is possible to switch the display effect from the first display effect to the second display effect in a natural manner in accordance with the transition to the B time-saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236(B), effect control in the second normal pattern will be described. The second normal pattern is variable display of the first special pattern for the final fluctuation of the ceiling, variable display of the first special pattern for the final fluctuation of the ceiling, variable display of the first special pattern for the first time in the B time saving game state, B time saving game It is a pattern when the second time in the state is a variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 236(B), in the second normal pattern, the sub CPU 301 causes the variable display of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (losing variation), which is the final ceiling variation. As the display effect, for example, the shutter closing effect described above is started. In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 301 also performs a right-hand navigation effect for instructing a right-hand shot. Incidentally, the sub CPU 301, in the shutter closing effect, instead of or in addition to the right-hand navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , you may perform an effect related to the progress of the game.

If the variable display of the second special symbol does not start until the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation. Even if is completed, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is not displayed in the shutter effect which is the first display effect, and the first variable display of the second special symbol is started in the B time-saving game state. The first display effect is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display of the second special symbol is started after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished as the final ceiling change, this first A new first display effect accompanying the variable display of special symbols is not performed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second time in the B time-saving gaming state (the first variable display after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state as the second special symbol), the sub CPU 301 changes the ceiling final. The first display effect started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is ended, and the second display effect accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed when the variable display of the second special symbol is started for the second time in the B time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 301 will not change the second special symbol according to the variable display of the second special symbol. Start display rendering.

After shifting to the B time-saving game state, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is started, the sub CPU 301 starts the night mode display effect, and then the game explanation effect, the landing effect, and the count-up effect. Perform a series of display effects up to. By the way, when the variable display time of the second special symbol performed first after shifting to the B time saving gaming state is short, the above-mentioned series of display effects are performed until the variable display of this second special symbol is completed. There may be cases where it cannot be finished. In such a case, the sub CPU 301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 71 at the timing of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol after performing the above series of display effects, performs a count-up effect, Information indicating the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state (for example, the number of times of time-saving) is displayed. That is, if the second special symbol is being variably displayed when the timing at which the series of display effects described above can be terminated has come, the sub CPU 301 can be displayed in accordance with the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol. , ends the above series of display effects. However, there may be cases where the second special symbol is not being variably displayed when it is time to end the above series of display effects. A count-up effect is performed when receiving the information, information indicating the end timing of the B time-saving game state (for example, the number of times of time-saving) is displayed, and the above series of display effects is terminated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, until the number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed in the night mode display effect (that is, the remaining number of time saving) is displayed. In the meantime, the variable display by the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be performed and the remaining number of time reduction may change, so in order to absorb and display the variable display number of times, the second special symbol is displayed. Waiting for the end of the variable display, the count-up effect is performed.

The sub CPU 301 performs the second display effect when the first variable display of the special symbols in the B time saving game state is the second special symbol variable display, while the first variable of the special symbols in the B time saving game state. When the display is the variable display of the first special symbol, the first display effect is not performed, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the first variable display of the special symbols in the B time-saving gaming state is the variable display of the first special symbols, the first display effect may be performed only when the specific condition is satisfied. . However, the frequency with which the first display effect is performed when the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state is the variable display of the first special symbol is the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state of the second special symbol. It is preferable that the frequency of the second display effect is lower than that of the variable display.

In this embodiment, in a game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the second special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, while right-handed hitting is regular. In the game state of the game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, if the game specification is such that the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed when the game is played with the left hand, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed when the game is played with the right hand. In the game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special pattern, the first special symbol corresponds to the secondary special symbol, and the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. Then, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol.

[5-3-2. Production control with irregular pattern related to transition to B time saving game state]
FIG. 238 is a time chart showing production control in an irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of production control performed in the first irregular pattern, (B ) A time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the second irregular pattern, (C) A time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the third irregular pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 238(A), effect control in the first irregular pattern will be described. The first irregular pattern is a pattern in which the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the first special symbol, and the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 238(A), when the ceiling final variation is a variable display of the first special symbol and the ceiling final variation is a variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 At the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the ceiling final fluctuation, for example, the above-described shutter closing effect is started. That is, even though the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is not started after the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is finished, the first special symbol is displayed in the above-described normal pattern. A shutter closing effect that functions as the first display effect associated with the variable display is displayed.

After shifting to the B time saving game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned shutter closing effect and performs the night mode display effect. Start. That is, the sub CPU 301 continues to display the shutter effect started at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol as the ceiling final fluctuation until the variable display of the second special symbol starts after the B time-saving game state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 238 (A), the "Ceiling final fluctuation (long fluctuation)" illustrated in the columns of "special 2_losing fluctuation" and "special 2_small hit fluctuation" are both over a long period of time of about 600000 msec. 2 It is a long variation in which a variation display of special symbols is performed, but for the sake of convenience, it is shown with a narrow width. In addition, the variable display time of the second special symbol over a long fluctuation is not limited to approximately 600000 msec, and may be within the range of 360000 msec to 600000 msec, for example.

Further, when variable display of the second special symbol is started while variable display of the first special symbol is started as the final ceiling change, the sub CPU 301 causes the display device 7 to display the , Performs a right-handed small navigation effect (right-handed instruction display in small letters). That is, even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed (for example, during the reach effect), the right-handed small navigation effect is performed. As a result, even when the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling change starts, the game mode (right-hand hitting) can be instructed to the player at an appropriate timing, even if the game state shifts to the B time-saving game state. Unnecessary consumption of game balls can be suppressed, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation) Even when the ready-to-win effect is performed as the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed small navigation effect is performed in this ready-to-win effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238(B), effect control in the second irregular pattern will be described. The second irregular pattern is variable display of the second special symbol (long variation) before the ceiling final variation, variable display of the first special symbol for the final ceiling variation, and variable display of the first special symbol which is the final ceiling variation. , B is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after the transition to the B time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 238(B), when the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation) and the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling change, as the first display effect associated with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, the above-described shutter closing effect is started.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after transition to the B time-saving gaming state during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, the sub CPU 301 is the final ceiling variation. Even if the variable display of a certain first special pattern has not ended, the above-described shutter closing performance is ended and the night mode display performance is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling change ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the night mode display effect, and performs a series of display effects including a game explanation effect, a landing effect, and a count-up effect. After that, a right-handed instruction display effect is performed.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol until at least the B time-saving gaming state ends after the ceiling final variation ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238(C), effect control in the third irregular pattern will be described. The third irregular pattern is variable display of the second special symbol (long variation) before the ceiling final variation, variable display of the second special symbol for the final ceiling variation, and the first variable display after transition to the B time-saving game state. It is a pattern in the case of variable display of 2 special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 238 (C), the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation), the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the second special symbol, and the first time after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state When the variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the above-described shutter closing effect, and at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time after the shift to the B time-saving game state, suddenly the night mode. Perform display effects. After the night mode display effect is performed, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol until at least the B time saving game state ends.

Also, after performing the night mode display effect for a predetermined time, the sub CPU 301 performs a series of display effects including a game explanation effect, a landing effect, and a count-up effect, and then performs a right-handed instruction display effect.

By the way, in the fifth pachinko game machine, as described above, in the probability variation mode, when the normal symbol losing length variation (the variation display of the normal symbol such that the variation time is 600000 msec) is started, it shifts to the bonus mode. (See FIG. 137(a)). In the bonus mode, while the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol variation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit to the right enter the small winning big winning opening 151, and a large number of game balls are paid out.

Therefore, as in the fifth pachinko game machine, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, in the pachinko game machine that shifts from the normal game state or the C time saving game state to the B time saving game state, the transition to the B time saving game state Before and after the shift, the probability that the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the loss length variation may be different. In this case, before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to win the losing length variation as the normal symbol variation pattern, and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the winning length variation is not elected as the normal symbol variation pattern. It is preferable to make it possible (probability 0).

After the transition to the B time-saving game state, the frequency of being controlled to the small winning game state is increased, but after the transition to the B time-saving game state, by making it impossible to win the long fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, B After shifting to the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress the winning of game balls into the big winning hole for small wins and thus suppress the increase in the number of balls to be put out.

In addition, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, instead of making it impossible to win the long variation as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the losing length variation is reduced compared to before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. You may do so. Even in such a case, after the shift to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the winning of the game ball into the big winning hole for the small win, and thus suppressing the increase in the number of balls released. .

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the passage gate 126 is arranged in the right area 107, but it may be arranged in the left area 106. However, when the passage gate 126 is arranged in the left region 106, it is preferable to lower the probability of winning the normal symbol so that the frequency of operation of the normal electric accessory 146 does not increase.

FIG. 239 is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. In addition, the time saving flag is off before the transition to the B time saving game state, and the time saving flag is on after the transition to the B time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 239, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 determines the length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is on. By doing so, before the shift to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to expect the payout of game balls by winning the big winning opening 151 for a small hit compared to after the shift to the B time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, after shifting to the B time saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress the payout of game balls by the small winning big winning opening 151 compared to before the transition to the B time saving gaming state.

In addition, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 201 may determine the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is off. In this case, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, compared to before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, game balls can be expected to be paid out by winning the small winning big winning opening 151, so the B time-saving gaming state is more improved. It is possible to make the game state more interesting.

By the way, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12) before shifting to the B time saving gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol by referring to the low starting special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 12). After the transition is determined with reference to the special figure fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbols per unit time is higher after the transition than before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. That is, the average variable display time after transition to the B time saving gaming state is shorter than the average variable display time before transition to the B time saving gaming state. In addition, the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a big hit (jackpot probability), and the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol (normal symbol Hit probability) is the same before and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 is, for example, a 7-segment display, before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, the variable display number of special symbols until transition to the B time-saving gaming state. Ceiling counter, etc.) is displayed, and after the transition to the B time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state (for example, the remaining number of time saving in the B time saving game state, etc.) may be displayed. In this case, when the content of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 changes due to the transition of the game state, the sub CPU 301 forcibly changes the display content displayed on the 7-segment display 71 to 0, for example. should be

[6. Extension example]
An expansion example common to the above-described first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine and third pachinko game machine will be described below. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following description, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third The symbols are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[6-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a big win, it is determined whether or not to set the variable probability flag to ON according to the kind of the big win. , Although the probability variation number is determined when the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the following aspects.

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 112 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) specific A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 112, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 112 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 112(A), in the first open mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening to the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the special prize opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special prize opening is started (these two times are short ), the specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening passes through the specific area, it can be either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 112, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two modes. It is possible to use only one mode, or three or more modes.

In addition, in FIG. 112, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 113 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 113, when the hit/lose determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The selection symbol command of 2 special symbols is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. , 'z2' is selected with a selectivity of 50%. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command is, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. , 'z5' is selected with a selectivity of 35%. In addition, since FIG. 113 is a diagram showing only an example of expansion of the variable probability control, the hit-lose judgment value data does not include "time-saving hit judgment value data", but the hit-lose judgment value data "time-saving hit judgment value data " may be included.

FIG. 114 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 114, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C). In addition, as described above, the hit-lose determination value data shown in FIG. 113 does not include "time-saving hit determination value data", so the type of "time-saving hit" is not shown in FIG. 114, but the hit-lose determination value When "time saving per determination value data" is included in the data, one of a plurality of types of time saving per may be determined.

According to the above FIGS. 112 to 114, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the kind of big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and the selection rate of 10%. It is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A at the rate, and is determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot A at 50% selection rate. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to have different probabilities of being set on.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 115, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 115 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 115(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball wins the big winning hole, Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult for even one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is opened twice during a short opening of the special winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special winning opening is started. Although it is in the open state for a short period of time (in both cases), if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times. There may be.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of big winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the variable probability control is executed alternately until the limiter number of times is reached, the so-called limiter machine is repeatedly executed, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state and , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[6-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", after the big hit game control process is finished, C time saving Control can be exercised. However, the lottery for the "time saving hit" is not limited to being performed in the special symbol hit determination process.

For example, among the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, a specific random number different from the jackpot judgment random number etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving winning/losing determining process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control separately from the special symbol hitting determining process. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, when performing a time-saving win-loss determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol random When it is a numerical value, it can be determined to be "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time saving winning/losing determination processing separately from the special symbol winning determining processing, the time saving winning/losing determining processing may be executed prior to the special symbol winning determining processing in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbols from which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the final display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win, the sub CPU instructs, for example, a right-handed shot as a method of shooting a game ball which is regarded as a regular game mode in the big win game state. A display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is controlled to display the effect image shown. In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU, when the time saving control is executed Control is performed so that an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right is displayed on the display device as a method of shooting a game ball which is regarded as a regular game mode. However, if the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit", the effect image showing the shooting method of the game ball, which is the normal game mode when the time-saving control is executed, is always displayed on the display device. Alternatively, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction hit" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), etc., it is not displayed. You may do so. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed before the special symbol winning determination process is executed, the sub CPU is under the condition of "time-saving hit" (that is, the time-saving flag is set to ON). Whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display a performance image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the time-saving number of times, the time-saving hit probability, and the time-saving judgment Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving hit-and-fall determination process are, for example, the random numbers for special design hit determination, the random numbers for special design determination, the random numbers for normal hit determination, the random numbers for normal design determination, the random numbers for special design fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used for the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random number value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball enters the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. At the time of passing, it may be at any timing such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the time saving win-lose determination random number may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving hit-loss judgment processing using the extracted time-saving hit-loss judgment processing random value, the extracted time-saving hit-loss judgment random value is a specific time-saving hit-loss judgment random value (for example, specific time-saving hit judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving hit-loss determination process using the random number value for the special symbol hit determination, when it is the specific loss determination value data, the specific small hit determination value data or/and the specific big hit determination value data, the time saving It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it should be determined as a time-saving hit when it is a specific losing symbol, a particular small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Further, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination processing using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing time-saving winning/losing determination processing using random numbers for normal hit determination and random numbers for determining normal symbols. Furthermore, the condition for determining that the time saving hit is determined in the time saving hit/loss determination process is not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving hit", the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is the role release hit. And when the game ball entering the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 21522152 is opened, whether or not the time saving control is executed and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to Then, the jackpot game control process is executed without detecting the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the accession hit and the V attacker 2152 has opened. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time saving control and the number of times of time saving based on the "time saving win" if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the special symbol winning determination process is the opening hit, and the game ball entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens. does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the time-saving win-lose determination random number obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU, the start information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number to be used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win-lose determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, the conditions for executing the time-saving win-lose determination process, such as executing the time-saving win-lose determination process in any game state or executing the time-saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, are determined in advance. It may be so that the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the conditions are satisfied.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, for example, it may be determined based on the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is executed It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable that the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, if the random number value for time saving hit/loss determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to be "100", and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of times of time saving to be "50".

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may newly set the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' instead of the remaining number of times of saving time (that is, reset the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state with the time saving flag turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction win" to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit ”, the main CPU replaces the number of times of time saving determined based on the “time saving hit” with the remaining number of times of time saving and newly sets the number of time saving times determined based on the “time saving hit”. Among the processing to be added to the number of times, any one may be determined in advance, and the number of times of shortening working hours may be set in a mode that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that performs time saving control with different functions when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on, time saving win-lose determination processing If the result is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are time saving control of the same function and time saving of different functions You may make it change the process which sets the number of times of time saving with the case of control. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is the special symbol winning determination process in the same frame. If performed earlier, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" (based on "time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set to ON based on the winning time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to ON depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process, based on the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process, immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed) even if the time saving control is started. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time saving judgment process and the execution of the time saving judgment process, and it is possible to enhance the interest becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends Based on, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 103) is the role release hit Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the closure of the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the time saving based on the "time saving winning". It is good to start controlling.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is executed, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is executed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or "When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc. is.

In addition, in the game state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control continues to be executed even after the small hitting game control process ends be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by deriving a stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a prize open hit. However, when the V-attacker 2152 is opened, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to operate even after the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to implement time saving control.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
In the game state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, time-saving game state, etc.) in which time-saving control is executed, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, and when the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination processing is "time-saving hit", the main CPU , You may rewrite the number of times of working hours, and do not rewrite the number of times of working hours (that is, to execute the time saving control until the number of times of working time saving control in execution is digested).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of execution of the special design hit determination process, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving success determination process, and it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed, or the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when it is done, or when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed and the second time saving win/loss determination process The time saving hit probability may be the same or almost the same probability as in the case where is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the winning of the opening of the role and the big winning game control process is not executed based on the opening of the role, the main CPU 2201 performs the time saving winning/losing. When the result of the judgment process is "time saving win", the interval time after the action for opening the accessory is longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving win-lose judgment process is "time saving loss". may be the same or approximately the same time.

[6-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and offer benefits (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. (balls, prize balls, prize data, etc.) can be applied to all types of gaming machines. In other words, a game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the results of the game. Alternatively, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game media held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game media management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to a game medium handling device and a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media for the game medium lending operation (that is, when the player performs the game medium insertion operation). or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (that winning combination is established) (Acquisition action), or an action of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. In addition, it is also possible to eject cash or a cash equivalent instead of just ejecting the recording medium, or to store the information in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game parlor can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, but the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using game balls, or a sealed game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. can be reduced, the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the waiting state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, a game machine of the type in which game balls are shot from above the game area does not have the concept of foul balls. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls. It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. The liquid crystal display device is positioned above the gaming machine and receives requests for conversion of game value managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. These requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. Note that in the second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. Also, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpot symbols. Take action to prevent it from happening.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol, the state is shifted from the general game state to the big win game state as described above. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game is executed. Based on the transition from the state to the small winning game state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state ( Based on the end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning pattern, the general game state shifts to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are being performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU is under variable display. As for the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[6-4. State display of being in the time-saving gaming state]
When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, a time saving state display section indicating the time saving game state may be provided. It is preferable that the time saving state display section is provided in the LED display group including the special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, when providing a time saving state display unit indicating that it is in a time saving game state, an A time saving state display unit indicating that it is in an A time saving game state, a B time saving state display unit indicating that it is in a B time saving game state, A C time-saving state display unit that indicates that the game is in the C time-saving gaming state may be provided. In this case, the main CPU controls the A time-saving state display unit so that a specific mode that allows the appearance of the A time-saving gaming state to be displayed in the A time-saving gaming state is displayed, and if the B time-saving gaming state is , Control the B time saving state display unit to display a specific mode that allows you to visually recognize that you are in the B time saving gaming state, and if it is in the C time saving gaming state, specify that you can visually recognize that you are in the C time saving gaming state. It is preferable to control the C time saving state display unit so that the mode is displayed. Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may display all of the time-saving state display portions that are being repeatedly executed.

Also, even if the A time saving state display part, the B time saving state display part and the C time saving state display part are not provided, for example, for the time saving game state with the same time saving performance, a common time saving state display part may be used. For example, if the time-saving performance in the B time-saving game state and the time-saving performance in the C time-saving game state are the same, and these time-saving performances differ from the time-saving performances in the A time-saving game state, A indicates that it is in the A time-saving game state. A time saving state display unit and a BC common time saving state display unit representing the B time saving game state or C time saving game state may be provided and controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, the sub-CPU displays, for example, in a display area such as a liquid crystal display device that it is in a time-saving game state, and if it is in a time-saving game state, the type of time-saving game state, or/and the number of times of time-saving (including the number of times of time-saving remaining) is displayed. You may make it

[6-5. Outer end signal for time saving gaming state]
When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state, or C time saving game state, the main CPU sends a time saving signal representing the time saving game state from the external terminal plate 4184 to the outside (for example, island computer and hall computer 4186), but in this case, you may send a time-saving signal that does not distinguish the type of time-saving gaming state, or a signal indicating which time-saving gaming state is being controlled, that is, the time-saving gaming state The types may be distinguished and transmitted. When transmitting a time-saving signal by distinguishing between types of time-saving gaming states, the main CPU, for example, transmits an A time-saving signal when it is in an A time-saving gaming state, and a B time-saving signal when it is in a B time-saving gaming state. and transmit a C time saving signal when it is in the C time saving game state. In addition, when a plurality of time-saving game states are being executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may transmit a plurality of time-saving signals being executed.

Moreover, you may make it transmit a common time-saving signal about the time-saving game state with same time-saving performance. For example, if the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the main CPU is in the A time saving game state. In this case, the A time saving signal is transmitted, and in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, the BC common time saving signal is transmitted.

[5-6. Interval in the case of "time reduction per"]
If the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game if the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss. It may be longer than the above interval time in some cases. In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbols in the game to the special symbols. It may be longer than the case where the result of the hit determination process is an open-access hit and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this open-access hit, or the same or substantially the same time may be set.

[7. Note]
[7-1. Appendix 1]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which is controlled to a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is established, symbols are variably displayed, and when a special result is derived.

In this type of game machine, in addition to the special game state controlled when a special result is derived, variable display is performed a specified number of times in a high probability time reduction state even if no special result is derived. A game machine is disclosed that is made to shift to a high probability non-time saving reduction state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The game machine described in JP-A-2016-174800 has a new game property such as shifting from a high-probability time-shortening state to a high-probability non-time-shortening state to make the game state more advantageous than the normal game state. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for gaming machines with even newer game features.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a gaming machine with new game features.

In this respect, the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 1 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) for performing a special symbol lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
game state control means capable of controlling the game state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
with
The game state control means is
a normal game state during which the variable display of the special symbols can be performed;
A special game state (for example, a jackpot game state), which is a period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and is more advantageous than the normal game state;
It is a period in which the variable display of the special symbols can be performed, and it is possible to control to any of a plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, a short game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The special symbol control means is
A special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating that the special game state is entered;
A loss stop mode (for example, a display mode of loss) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss;
It is possible to derive any of a plurality of stop modes including a specific stop mode (for example, a display mode for reducing working hours) indicating transition to the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the period in which the variable display of special symbols can be performed, as a game state advantageous to the player, the specific game state is provided separately from the special game state, and the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to provide unprecedented new game characteristics, such as shifting to a specific game state when the game is played.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the special game state, and after the special game state ends, to shift to the specific game state,
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state without shifting to the special game state.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stop mode is derived, the transition to the specific game state occurs without transitioning to the special game state. It is possible to provide playability.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The game state control means is
When the loss stop mode is derived, the game state continuation control means (for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the special symbol The main CPU 201) that does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag in the game end processing;
Even when the losing stop mode is derived, if a special condition is established (for example, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value), the game state is not continued by the game state continuation control means. , Specific game state transition control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs B time reduction control mode determination processing) capable of transitioning to the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to shift to a specific game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied even when a losing stop mode is derived, providing unprecedented new game characteristics. becomes possible. Even when the losing stop mode is derived, the case where the predetermined condition is met corresponds to, for example, when a specific special game state among a plurality of types of special game states ends.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific stop mode includes:
a first specific stop mode (for example, mode of the selected symbol command "z0");
A second specific stop mode different from the first specific stop mode (for example, the mode of the selected symbol command "z1") is included at least,
The game state control means is
When the first specific stop mode is derived and when the second specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state with a different degree of advantage (for example, the number of times of time reduction). do.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, it is possible to widen the range of game characteristics by providing variations, and to provide interesting game characteristics while suppressing gambling characteristics.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (eg, passage gate 126) provided in the game area, and normal symbol lottery means (eg, normal symbol variable display start processing (S293 ), the main CPU 201)
Normal symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs normal symbol variable display end processing (S294)) that performs variable display of normal symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived; ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, special symbol lottery facilitation means (for example, normal The main CPU 201) that performs the electric accessory opening process (S296);
Normal symbol probability control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs time saving setting processing (S238)) capable of changing the normal symbol probability from which the normal symbol hit is derived;
further comprising
The normal symbol probability control means,
When the specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) is shifted to by the specific stop mode being derived, the normal symbol probability is not changed (for example, the normal symbol hit determination table is referred to Main CPU 201 for performing symbol hit determination processing),
When the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) is shifted to after the end of the special game state by deriving the special stop mode, the normal symbol probability can be changed (for example, the normal symbol Main CPU 201 that performs hit determination processing for normal symbols with reference to a hit determination table
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, the transition to the specific game state (for example, the A short-time game state) is made even after the special game state ends, and the transition to the specific game state is made by deriving the specific stop mode. If the normal symbol probability is not changed, the normal symbol probability is changed when shifting to the specific game state after the end of the special game state. In this way, by providing a plurality of specific game states with different transition motives and making it possible to change the normal symbol probability according to the transition motives, it is possible to widen the range of game characteristics and provide interesting game characteristics. becomes possible.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to a high probability game state in which the special stop mode is more likely to be derived than in the normal game state and the specific game state,
The special symbol control means is
In the normal game state and the specific game state (for example, when S221 is YES determination), at least the special stop mode and the specific stop mode can be derived,
It is characterized in that at least the special stop mode can be derived in the high certainty gaming state (for example, when S221 is NO determination).

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode can be derived in the normal game state and the specific game state in which the interest of the player tends to decline. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game state.

In addition, in the high certainty gaming state, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a result corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, a time saving hit), a mode in which the specific stop mode is derived but not shifted to the specific game state, and a special symbol A mode in which the specific stop mode is not derived even if the result of the lottery corresponds to the specific stop mode, and a mode in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the result corresponding to the specific stop mode is not included in the result of the special symbol lottery in the first place. and may be either.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and the predetermined conditions include a first condition and a second condition,
The special symbol lottery means is
First special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processes of S81 and S82) that performs the first special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the first condition;
A second special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S78 and S79) that performs a second special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the second condition,
The special symbol control means is
When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol is variably displayed,
A derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may differ between when the first special symbol is variably displayed and when the second special symbol is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may differ between when the first special symbol is variably displayed and when the second special symbol is variably displayed. It is possible to widen the range and provide interesting game characteristics.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The game state control means is
When the game state under control is the normal game state, when the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state in a mode corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, the process of S244 can be executed). while
When the game state under control is the specific game state, even if the specific stop mode is derived, instead of controlling to the specific game state in a mode corresponding to the specific stop mode, the specific game under control The mode according to the state can be continued (for example, the process of S243 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the specific stop mode is derived while being controlled to the specific game state, the mode corresponding to the specific game state being controlled continues. That is, even if the specific stop mode is derived in the specific game state, it is not invalidated, and the player can be provided with the same effect as when the specific game state under control is extended. can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing the processing of S392 or S399) that acquires a plurality of types of random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging big hits and random numbers for symbols) when the predetermined condition is established,
The special symbol lottery means is
Using a specific random number (for example, a random number for judging a big hit) among the plurality of types of random numbers, the stop mode derived by the special symbol control means includes the special stop mode, the losing stop mode, and the specific stop mode. It is possible to determine which of a plurality of stop modes including
The type of the special stop mode or the type of the specific stop mode can be determined using a predetermined random number (for example, a symbol random number) different from the specific random number (for example, a random number for judging a big hit) among the plurality of types of random numbers. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, a specific random number (for example, a random number for judging a big hit) is used to determine a derived stop mode, that is, a lottery result, and a predetermined random number different from the specific random number (for example, a pattern random number ) can be used to determine the type of special stopping mode or the type of specific stopping mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security compared to the case of determining not only the derived stop mode but also the special stop mode and the type of the specific stop mode using only the specific random number.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
When the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) is entered by deriving the special stop mode, the specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) is entered by deriving the specific stop mode It is characterized by being able to perform control so that the expected value of the period controlled to the specific game state becomes smaller than in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the specific game state by deriving the specific stop mode (for example, C time-saving gaming state) compared to the case of transition to the specific game state by deriving the special stop mode A superiority can be given when shifting to a state (for example, A time-saving game state). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest without increasing the gambling nature in the normal game state or the specific game state.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
When the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) is shifted to by the special stop mode being derived, the specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) is entered by the specific stop mode being derived It is characterized in that it is possible to perform control so that the expected value of the period controlled to the specific game state is increased compared to the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine (11) above, the specific game state by deriving the specific stop mode compared to the case of transitioning to the specific game state (for example, A reduced working hours game state) by deriving the special stop mode A superiority can be given when shifting to a state (for example, C time saving game state). In such a case, it is possible to enhance the playability in the normal game state and the specific game state, which tend to be less interesting, and to increase the interest.

According to the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 1, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[7-2. Appendix 2]
The pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 2 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
When the game ball fired toward the game area passes through the special symbol start area (for example, the start port switches 121, 141A, 141B), a random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number related to the special symbol (for example, processing of S392 or S399 a main CPU 201) that performs
Special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start process (S93) capable of performing a special symbol lottery including a special result and a specific result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means) main CPU 201) to perform
Symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When the variable display of the special symbols is performed and the special stop mode indicating the special result (for example, the display mode of the big win) is derived, a special game state (eg, the big win game state) in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. ) controllable special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145),
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol management process) capable of controlling a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
with
The game state control means is
Normal game state,
A specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (for example, A short game state, B short game state, C short game state), and controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
When the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the selection symbol command "0" to "2" big hit in FIG. 120), the result of the special symbol lottery is the special It is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous than the result (for example, the big hit of the selected symbol command "4" in FIG. 120).

According to the gaming machine (1) above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result, it is more advantageous for controlling the specific game state than when the result of the special symbol lottery is the special result. It is possible to make the game state more interesting, and to provide new playability that has never existed before.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
When the specific stop mode (for example, display mode for time saving) is derived by the symbol control means and controlled to the specific game state (for example, C time saving game state), the end condition of the specific game state is the above It is characterized in that it can be determined based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, when the specific stop mode is derived and controlled to the specific game state, the condition for ending the specific game state is determined based on the value of the acquired random number, so the specific game The end timing of the state may differ each time. By doing so, it is possible to provide a wide range of game characteristics, and to provide interesting game characteristics.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A special display effect (e.g., big win system reach) indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, and a specific display effect (e.g., time saving hit) indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived system reach), and suggestive effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing any one of a plurality of display effects.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, not only the special display effect indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, but also the specific display effect indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to provide unprecedented new gameplay.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6) with different probabilities of deriving the special stop mode can be set, and the probability corresponding to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived at
The special symbol lottery means is
When the special symbol lottery is set to one setting value (for example, setting 1) among the plurality of setting values and when it is set to another setting value (for example, setting 6), The derivation probabilities of the special stop mode are different, while the derivation probabilities of the specific stop mode are the same.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, by making the derivation probability of the specific stop mode the same while varying the derivation probability of the special stop mode according to the set value, when the set value is low Even so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Although the derivation probability of the specific stop mode is the same when one of the plurality of set values is set and when the other set value is set, the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to change the end condition of the specific game state that is controlled when it is set (for example, 50 times of time saving in case of setting 1, 100 times of time saving in case of setting 6)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, by making the probability of shifting to the specific game state the same when one set value is set and when another set value is set, interest is enhanced. It is possible to make it more interesting by making the end condition different while suppressing the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
It is possible to perform the special symbol lottery with either a low probability with a relatively low probability of deriving the special stop mode or a high probability with a relatively high probability of deriving the special stop mode. and
The probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol lottery is performed with the low probability (for example, 1/201 shown in FIG. 118) and when the special symbol lottery is performed with the high probability With a probability (for example, 1/6 shown in FIG. 118) that is relatively higher than any of the probabilities that the special stop mode is derived (for example, 1/200 shown in FIG. 118), the specific stop It is characterized in that it is possible to perform the special symbol lottery so that the mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, since the specific stop mode is derived with a higher probability than when the derivation probability of the special stop mode is low and when it is high, unprecedented new games are possible. It is possible to provide sexuality and suppress the decline in interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number obtaining means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S399) for acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
First special symbol lottery means (for example, first special symbol variable display start Main CPU 201) that performs processing (S93);
Second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery containing at least the special result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, second special symbol variable display start process (S93) and a main CPU 201) that performs
The symbol control means is
First symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs first special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls to derive the result of the first special symbol lottery and,
Second symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs second special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls to derive the result of the second special symbol lottery and
When the result of the second special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8" jackpot), the result of the first special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the selected symbol command 'z3' or 'z4' jackpot) and the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is the specified result (for example, the selected symbol command 'z0' to 'z2' time-saving hit). It is characterized by being configured to be

According to the gaming machine (7) above, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a special result, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a special result, and when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific result Since it is more advantageous than any other case, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in the game in which the second special symbol lottery is performed.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number obtaining means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the processing of S399) for acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
First special symbol lottery means (for example, first special symbol variable display start Main CPU 2201 for performing processing (S2013);
Second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, second special symbol variable display start process (S2013) and a main CPU 2201) that performs
The pattern control means is
First symbol control means (for example, main CPU 2201 that performs first special symbol variable display end processing (S2014)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls to derive the result of the first special symbol lottery and,
Second symbol control means (for example, main CPU 2201 that performs second special symbol variable display end processing (S2014)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls to derive the result of the second special symbol lottery and
The results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery further include a special result (for example, a winning prize),
The game machine is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the special stop mode (for example, the display mode for opening the accessory) indicating the special result is derived, a predetermined area (for example , V winning device 2150), entry control means (for example, main CPU 2201) for controlling entry of game balls to be possible or easy;
A special area (for example, V winning opening 2155) through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined area can pass;
further comprising
The special game state control means is
When the game ball passes through the special area, it can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state via the second route) in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed,
The first special symbol lottery means is
The probability that the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived (for example, 0), and the probability that the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived ( For example, it is possible to perform the first special symbol lottery so as to differ from 1/1.17).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result, the new game feature is controlled to the specific game state, and when the special stop mode is derived, the game machine moves to the predetermined area. It can be applied to a so-called 1-kind 2-kind mixing machine that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball, and shifts to a special game state when the game ball that has entered the predetermined area enters the special area. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide unprecedented new game characteristics even for a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
In the specific game state,
A first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state are included,
The end conditions for each of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state include:
The first end condition for ending the specific game state when the sum of the variable display count of the first special symbol and the variable display count of the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number end condition L), and a second end condition (for example, time-saving end condition M in FIG. 99) that ends the specific game state when the number of variable display times of the second special symbol reaches a second predetermined number , a third termination condition (for example, a time-saving termination condition N in FIG. 99) that terminates the specific gaming state when the number of times the special stop mode is derived reaches a third predetermined number,
At least one of the first end condition, the second end condition and the third end condition is the end condition of the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state It is characterized by being different in at least one of the specific game states.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, it is possible to provide a wide range of game characteristics by providing variations to the end condition of the specific game state, and to enhance interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state is
Including at least two specific game states of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state,
Said 1st specific game state, said 2nd specific game state, and said end condition of each of said 3rd specific game state includes variable display times of said special symbols (for example, time saving times),
The game state control means is
Any one of the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state (e.g., C time saving game state) in another specific game state (e.g., B time saving game state) is met,
The number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be performed until the end condition for the one specific game state is satisfied, and the above that can be performed until the end condition for the other specific game state is satisfied Until the variable display of the special symbols is performed over the greater number of variable display times of the special symbols, control is possible in the same manner as the one specific game state regardless of the degree of advantage (for example, in S243 processing can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, while ensuring that the end condition of the specific game state is not disadvantageous to the player, it is performed in the same manner as one specific game state, It becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
The normal gaming state (for example, low probability low base state),
Although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is higher than the normal game state, the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is the same high probability non-specific game state (for example, high probability low base state) as the normal game state,
Although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same as the normal game state, the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is a low probability specific game state (for example, low probability high base state) higher than the normal game state ,
Both the probability of deriving the special stop mode and the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery are controllable to either a high-probability specific game state (for example, a high-probability high base state) higher than the normal game state. and
The game machine is
It is characterized by comprising a display effect control means capable of controlling the normal game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state so that a display effect is performed in a manner that is difficult to grasp from the outside.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the high-probability non-specific game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state are performed in a manner that is difficult to grasp from the appearance, so that the game is interesting. It is possible to make the user have it, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The game machine is
A first mode (e.g., left-handed hitting) in which a game ball is shot toward a first area (e.g., left side area 106) of the game area;
A second mode (e.g., right-handed hitting) in which a game ball is shot toward a second area (e.g., right side area 107) of the game area;
The game can be played in any one of a plurality of modes including
While the game is performed in the first mode in the normal game state, the low probability specific game state, and the high probability specific game state,
In the high-probability non-specified game state, the game is configured to be played in the second mode.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, the game is performed in the first mode in the normal game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state, while the second mode is performed in the high-probability non-specific game state. Since the game is played in , it is possible for the player to understand that the high-probability non-specific game state is a special game state different from other game states.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (11) or (12) above,
further comprising payout means (e.g., payout/emission control circuit 400) for paying out prize balls or prize data based on the fact that game balls shot toward the game area pass through a predetermined winning area;
In the normal game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1,
In the high-probability non-specified game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, it is possible to increase interest by making the high-probability non-specific game state an advantageous game state compared to other game states.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (13) above,
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode (for example, the selected symbol command "z3" jackpot) is derived in the normal game state (for example, the low-probability low base state), the high-probability specific game state after the end of the special game state It is possible to shift to the high probability non-specific game state without shifting to.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the high-probability non-specific game state, so that the decline in interest in the normal game state is suppressed. becomes possible.

According to the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 2, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[7-3. Appendix 3]
The pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 3 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, sub-control circuit 300) that performs control related to production,
with
The main control means is
starting information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S392 or S399) for acquiring starting information (for example, various random numbers) when a predetermined condition is established;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, a lottery including at least a special result (for example, a big hit), a specific result (for example, a short time hit), and a loss is performed using the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)),
When the fluctuation start condition is established, a symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined display area, and a symbol control means (for example, a special symbol variable display end process (S94) that controls so that the result of the lottery is derived is executed. CPU 201);
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a prefetch determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
Information transmission means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S322) for transmitting information related to the progress of the game to the effect control means;
has
The game state control means is
When a special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a special game state (for example, a big win game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed;
When a specific stop mode indicating the specific result (for example, a display mode for reducing working hours) is derived, a game state in which the symbol is variably displayed and a specific game state (for example, a specific game state more advantageous than a normal game state) C time-saving game state) and can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states, including
The production control means is
receiving information transmitted from the information transmitting means, and being able to control so that an effect based on the information is displayed in a predetermined effect display area,
When information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is received, the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301) that controls such that the effect (for example, the variable effect corresponding to the change) is performed along with the variable display of the symbol. )and,
Preceding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) for controlling so that a preceding effect (for example, prefetching effect) is performed prior to the variable display of the symbols when information indicating the result of the preceding determination by the preceding determining means is received; , characterized by having

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the specific stop mode indicating the specific result is derived, the game machine controlled to the specific game state performs the production and the preceding production, which is an unprecedented novelty. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high level of playability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding production control means is
A first preceding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a first preceding effect that can suggest that the specific stop mode may be derived (for example, display of a time-saving hit-based prefetch effect form) is performed. )and,
A second preceding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) for controlling to perform a second preceding effect (for example, a display of a big win-based prefetch effect form) capable of suggesting that the special stop mode may be derived. and,
A third preceding effect that can suggest that one of the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived (for example, display of a common prefetch effect form) is performed. and effect control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to derive not only an effect (second preceding effect) in which a special stop mode may be derived, but also a specific stop mode as the preceding effect. Since the suggestible first preceding performance is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new game characteristics. Moreover, when the third preceding effect is performed, there is a possibility that both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode will be derived, so it is possible to increase interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The third preceding effect control means is
The third preceding effect (e.g., a display mode for a big win) in a manner that makes it difficult to distinguish from the appearance which one of the special stop mode (e.g., a display mode for a big win) and the specific stop mode (e.g., a display mode for a time-saving win) is derived. It is characterized by being controllable so that common system prefetch effect form display) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the third preceding effect is performed in such a manner that it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance whether the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to increase interest by doing

(4) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The third preceding effect control means is
a first aspect (e.g., a blue square); and
A second mode (e.g., a yellow pentagon) that is a mode that can be changed from the first mode and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the first mode (for example, a yellow pentagon);
A third mode (for example, a rainbow triangle), which is a mode that can be changed from the first mode or the second mode, and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the second mode (for example, a rainbow triangle);
It is controllable so that the third preceding effect is performed in one or more aspects out of a plurality of aspects including
In the first aspect and the second aspect, it is difficult to distinguish by appearance whether the expected value for the result of the lottery is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The third aspect is characterized in that the expected value for the special result can be easily distinguished from the appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the third preceding effect is performed, in the first mode and the second mode, which of the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result is higher can be visually determined. Although it is difficult to distinguish, it becomes easier to distinguish that the expected value for the special result is high when changing to the third mode. Therefore, when the third preceding effect is performed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
The first preceding effect control means,
A fourth mode (for example, a dedicated common system look-ahead effect mode);
A fifth aspect (for example, a white circle), which is an aspect that can be changed from the fourth aspect and has a higher expected value for the specified result than the fourth aspect,
It is controllable so that the first preceding effect is performed in one or more aspects out of a plurality of aspects including
The fourth aspect is an aspect in which it is difficult to distinguish by appearance whether it is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The fifth aspect is characterized in that the expected value for the specified result is easily distinguishable by appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the fourth mode, it is difficult to distinguish by appearance which of the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result is higher, but in the fifth mode, the expected value for the specific result is Higher values are easier to distinguish. Therefore, in the first preceding performance, by performing a performance with a high expected value for the specific result while excluding the expected value for the special result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without unnecessarily increasing gambling.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above,
The ratio of the first preceding performance performed by the first preceding performance control means and the ratio of the second preceding performance performed by the second preceding performance control means are configured to be different.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, by making the ratio of the first preceding performance and the ratio of the second preceding performance different, it is possible to give a sharp effect to the performance, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. becomes.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above,
The symbol control means is
It is possible to derive the specific stop mode in the normal game state and the specific game state,
The first preceding effect control means,
It is characterized in that control is possible so that the first preceding effect is performed in the normal game state, while control is possible so that the first preceding effect is not performed in the specific game state.

According to the game machine of (7) above, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest in the normal game state. That is, the player is more interested in the case where the specific result is derived in the normal game state than in the case where the specific result is derived in the specific game state. Therefore, the first preceding performance can be effectively performed by enabling the first preceding performance to be performed in the normal game state and preventing the first preceding performance from being performed in the specific game state.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
The first production control means (for example, sub CPU 301);
A second effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second relevant effect (for example, a big hit system ready-to-win) that suggests that the specific stop mode may be derived;
A third effect control means (for example, and a sub CPU 301).

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (7) above,
The production control means is
The first production control means (for example, sub CPU 301);
A second effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second relevant effect (for example, a big hit system ready-to-win) that suggests that the specific stop mode may be derived;
A third effect control means (for example, and a sub CPU 301).

According to the gaming machines (8) and (9) above, as the effect. Since not only the effect (the second effect) from which the special stop mode may be derived, but also the first relevant effect that can suggest that the specific stop mode may be derived, It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new game features that have never been seen before. Moreover, when the third effect is performed, there is a possibility that both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode will be derived, so it is possible to increase interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
Said second production control means,
When the second preceding effect (for example, the display of the prefetch effect form of the big hit system) or the third preceding effect (for example, the display of the prefetch effect form of the common system) is performed, the second relevant effect (for example, the ready-to-win system of the big win system) is controllable so that
It is characterized in that control is possible so that the second pertinent performance (for example, big win system ready-to-win) is not performed when the first preceding performance (for example, time-saving winning type look-ahead performance mode display) is performed.

According to the gaming machine (10) above, the second relevant effect is performed when the second preceding effect or the third preceding effect is performed, but is not performed when the first preceding effect is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of the preceding performance, it is possible to perform a performance that enhances interest by performing the preceding performance with a high expected value for the special result while eliminating the expectation value for the specific result in vain.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (9) or (10) above,
The first production control means is
When the first preceding effect (for example, display of time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form) or the third preceding effect (for example, display of common system look-ahead effect form) is performed, the first relevant effect (for example, time-saving hit system reach) is controllable,
It is characterized in that it is possible to perform control so that the first pertinent performance (for example, time-saving win system ready-to-win) is not performed when the second preceding performance (for example, the display of the big hit type look-ahead performance form) is performed.
According to the gaming machine (11) above, the first relevant effect is performed when the first preceding effect or the third preceding effect is performed, but is not performed when the second preceding effect is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of the preceding performance, by performing a preceding performance with a high expected value for the specific result while eliminating the needless giving of the expected value for the special result, the decline in interest is suppressed without increasing the gambling effect. becomes possible.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above,
The third production control means is
The first preceding effect (for example, display of time-saving prefetch effect form), the second preceding effect (for example, display of big win system prefetch effect form), and the third preceding effect (for example, display of common prefetch effect form) It is characterized in that control is possible so that the third relevant effect (for example, common reach) is performed even when either of the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine (12) above, in the third relevant effect, it is difficult to grasp whether the expected value for the special result is high or the expected value for the specific result is high. It becomes possible to attach.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above,
The production control means is
In the variable display of the specific pattern (for example, target variation) when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific pattern,
When the third relevant production (for example, common reach C) is started, after the third relevant production is performed, the first relevant production (for example, time-saving hit system reach C) or the second relevant production (For example, jackpot system reach C) while it is possible to shift,
When the third relevant production (for example, common reach C) is not started, any of the first relevant production (for example, time-saving hit system reach C) and the second relevant production (for example, big hit system reach C) It is characterized in that it is configured not to migrate also.

According to the gaming machine (13) above, when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific symbol, the third effect is started in the variable display of the specific symbol in which the preceding effect is performed. If you do, you can increase your interest. On the other hand, unless the third effect is started, neither the first effect nor the second effect is performed.

According to the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 3, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[7-4. Appendix 4]
The pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 4 has the following features.
(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
holding means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S395 or S402) capable of acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied and holding the acquired starting information (for example, various random numbers) up to a predetermined number;
When the variable start condition is satisfied, a lottery including a special result (for example, a big hit), a specific result (for example, a short-time hit), and a loss is carried out using the start information held by the holding means. Lottery means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93));
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, special symbol display units 163 and 164), and symbol control means (for example, special The main CPU 201) that performs a pattern variable display end process (S94);
When the symbols are variably displayed and a special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a special game state (eg, a jackpot game state) in which the symbols are not variably displayed. a special game state control means capable of shifting to
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for the reduction in working hours) indicating the specified result is derived, the game state in which the variable display of the symbols is performed is more than the normal game state. Specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) capable of shifting to an advantageous specific game state;
an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls such that the effect is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbols in a predetermined effect area (for example, the display area 7a of the display device 7);
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a prefetch determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
Preceding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301);
with
The preceding production control means is
The preceding effect can be performed when there is a possibility that the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the specific stop mode indicating the specific result is derived, the game machine controlled to the specific game state performs the production and the preceding production, which is an unprecedented novelty. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high level of playability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding production control means is
If the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stop mode (for example, display mode for time saving) can be derived, the specific stop mode (for example, display for time saving) aspect) may be derived, while it is possible to control so that a specific preceding effect (for example, display of a time-saving hit-based pre-reading effect form) is performed,
Even if the specific starting information is included in the starting information held by the holding means, the special stop mode (for example, the big win display mode) is included, it is possible to perform control so that the preceding effect (for example, look-ahead effect) for the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived is withheld, if the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is previously withheld, The preceding production for the specific start information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest by performing an effective preceding performance while eliminating the preceding performance that may be unnecessary as much as possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The preceding production control means is
When the starting information held by the holding means includes special starting information from which the special stop mode can be derived, there is a possibility that the special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) can be derived. In addition to being controllable to perform a special preceding effect (for example, a display of a big hit type prefetch effect form) suggesting that
Even if the special starting information is not included in the starting information held by the holding means, it is possible to perform control so that the special preceding effect is performed,
When the special preceding effect is performed although the starting information held by the holding means does not include the special starting information, the starting information held by the holding means includes the specific stop mode. Even if specific starting information that can be derived is included, it is possible to perform control so that the preceding effect for the specific starting information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the special preceding performance is performed even though the special starting information is not reserved, even if the specific starting information is reserved, the preceding performance for the specific starting information is performed. is not performed, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. That is, if the special preceding effect is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, the player may be disappointed when the special stop mode is not derived. In such a case, even if the specific start information is withheld, by not performing the preceding effect for the specific start information, the specific stop mode is derived after the player is disappointed once. It is possible to increase interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The preceding production control means is
During the variable display of the pattern from which the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information withheld by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start It is characterized by being controllable so that the preceding presentation of information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, even if the specific start information is suspended, the preceding effect for the specific start information is not performed during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived. Therefore, it is possible to minimize unnecessary preceding performance. That is, during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, the player's interest is attracted to the performance during the variable display, so even if the preceding performance for the specific start information is performed, it may become a useless performance. Therefore, during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, the preceding effect for the specific start information is not performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
In the specific game state,
A first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) capable of executing the first specific control (for example, time-saving control with time-saving performance in A time-saving game state);
A second specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) that can execute a second specific control (for example, time-saving control with time-saving performance in C time-saving game state) different from the first specific control is included. cage,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state),
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state),
When the special stop mode is derived, the starting information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the special game state ends, the When the transition to the first specific game state, even if the specific stop mode is derived by the establishment of the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information, the first without executing the second specific control It is characterized by being able to execute specific control.

In the gaming machine of (5) above, even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, if the transition is made to the first specific game state after the end of the special game state, the specific start information is performed and the specific stop mode is derived, the first specific control is executed without executing the second specific control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage that the player obtains from being spoiled due to the derivation of the special stop mode.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state),
The preceding production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, the starting information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the special game state is completed, the specific start information is included. It is characterized in that it is controllable so that, when it is controlled to a game state, the preceding effect for the specific starting information is not performed.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, if the specific start information is controlled to the specific game state after the special game state ends, It is designed so that the preceding performance is not performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the necessary preceding performance.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information withheld by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the special game state ends, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to shift to the specific game state based on the specific starting information.

According to the game machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, the special game state is not shifted to the specific game state based on the specific start information after the end of the special game state. Therefore, for example, when the special game state is controlled based on the derivation of the special stop mode, it is possible to shift to the specific game state based on this.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The preceding production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information withheld by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the special game state ends, the It is characterized in that it is possible to control so that the preceding performance for the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, it is possible to prevent unnecessary preceding effects from being performed after the special game state ends. can be suppressed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the starting information held by the holding means when the special stop mode is derived includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the special game state ends, When the expected value from which the special stop mode is derived is controlled to be in an advantageous gaming state (for example, a high-probability gaming state), the specific stop mode is derived by satisfying the variable start condition for the specific start information. It is characterized by being controllable so as not to shift to the specific game state even if it is played.

According to the gaming machine (9) above, after the special game state is over, the advantageous game state (for example, the high probability game state) with a high expected value for deriving the special stop mode is given priority over the specific game state. Since it is controlled, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Further comprising a counting means (for example, a ceiling counter) for counting the number of times the pattern is displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the number of variable display times of the symbols counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (eg, ceiling value), the specific game state (eg, C time saving game state) can be shifted to,
The preceding production control means is
Even if the starting information withheld by the withholding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, before the variable starting condition for the specific starting information is satisfied, the It is characterized in that, when the number of times of variable display of the symbols counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, it is possible to perform control so as not to perform the preceding effect for the specific starting information.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, even if the specific start information is withheld, the number of variable display times of symbols counted by the counting means before the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information is established. reaches a specified number of times, the specific game state is entered before the specific display mode is derived. In such a case, even if the preceding effect for the specific start information is performed, the preceding effect may become an unnecessary preceding effect. Therefore, by not performing such an unnecessary preliminary performance, the decrease in interest is suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit),
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a display mode of a small win) indicating the special result is derived, a special game capable of shifting to a special game state in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed. further comprising state control means;
The preceding production control means is
The starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived and special starting information from which the special stopping mode can be derived, and the specific starting information regarding the specific starting information Even if the fluctuation start condition for the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is satisfied before the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, control is performed so that the preceding performance for the specific start information is performed. It is characterized by being possible.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, the specific start information and the special start information are reserved, and the change start condition for the special start information is established prior to the change start condition for the specific start information. However, it is possible to perform a preceding effect for the specific start information. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit),
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and the special stop mode indicating the special result is derived, a special game state in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed (for example, a small win game state) can be transitioned to. Further comprising control means (eg, main CPU 201),
The preceding production control means is
During the variable display of the pattern from which the special stop mode is derived, if the start information retained by the retaining means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start information It is characterized in that it is controllable so that a preceding performance of is performed.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the specific start information is suspended during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, a preceding effect is performed for the specific start information. . This makes it possible to enhance interest.

According to the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 4, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[7-5. Appendix 5]
The pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 5 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A main CPU 201 for performing special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start processing (S93) for performing a special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a special starting area (for example, starting port switches 121, 141A, 141B). )and,
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big win game state) in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145);
A game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and a specific game controllable to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) more advantageous than a normal game state until the number of times of the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. State control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs time saving management processing);
A normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 for performing a normal symbol variable display start process (S293)) for performing a normal symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the normal starting area (for example, the passage gate switch 127);
Normal symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs normal symbol variable display end processing (S294)) that performs variable display of normal symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived; ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, the normal electric accessory opening) that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special start area Main CPU 201) that performs processing (S296);
with
The specific gaming state is
At least one of the probability that the normal per symbol stop mode is derived, the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special start area, and the time during which the normal symbol is variablely displayed is the normal A game state in which specific control different from the game state is executed,
A first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) that can be controlled until the first end condition is satisfied, with the transition condition being that the special stop mode is derived and the special game state is terminated;
A second specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) that can be controlled until a second end condition is satisfied, with a transition condition that a specific stop mode (e.g., display mode for time saving) is derived by the symbol control means )and,
At least two specific games out of a third specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) that can be controlled until the third end condition is satisfied, with the transition condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. It is characterized by including a state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first specific game state, the second specific game state whose transition condition is that the specific stop mode is derived, and the variable display of the special symbols are performed a specified number of times. Since at least two specific game states are prepared out of the third specific game state used as the transition condition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new playability.

In the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state, the specific control mode may be the same, or the specific control mode may be different. Also, among the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state, the specific control aspect in the two specific game states is the same, and the specific control aspect in the remaining one specific game state is It may differ from the mode of specific control in the above two specific game states.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) and the third specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) are
It is characterized in that the derivation probability of the normal per symbol stop mode is the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second specific game state and the third specific game state, the derivation probability of the stop mode per normal symbol is the same or substantially the same. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state), a plurality of different degrees of ease of passage of game balls to the special start region, respectively Ease-of-passing patterns (for example, open pattern of normal electric accessories) are prepared,
The second specific game state and the third specific game state are
In at least a part of the plurality of passability patterns, the passability of the game ball to the special starting area is the same or substantially the same. .

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the second specific game state and the third specific game state allow the game ball to pass through the special start area in at least a part of the plurality of passability patterns. are configured to have the same or substantially the same degree of easiness. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the second specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) and the third specific game state (e.g., B time-saving game state), a plurality of time patterns at which the variable display of the normal symbols is performed are different. is prepared and
The second specific game state and the third specific game state are
In at least a part of the time patterns among the plurality of time patterns, the time during which the normal symbols are variably displayed is the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second specific game state and the third specific game state have the same or approximately the same or approximately the same time for variable display of normal symbols in at least a part of the time patterns among the plurality of time patterns. configured to be the same. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the specific stop mode (for example, display mode for time saving per) is derived in the first specific game state, the first specific control corresponding to the first specific game state (for example, time saving performance in A time saving game state ) can be maintained.

In the gaming machine of (5) above, even if the specific stop mode is derived in the first specific game state, it does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state, and corresponds to the first specific game state. It enables the first specific control to be maintained.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode (eg, display mode for time saving) is derived at a specific timing (eg, time saving final variation) in the first specific gaming state (eg, A time saving gaming state), after the specific timing (For example, the change next to the time-saving final change) can be changed from the first specific control to the second specific control.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific game state, the first specific control can be changed to the second specific control after the specific timing. be.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saving final variation) in the first specific gaming state, after the specific timing (for example, the next variation of time saving final variation), the first specific The first specific control corresponding to the game state (for example, time saving performance in A time saving game state) and the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state (for example, time saving performance in C time saving game state) are both performed It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to

In the gaming machine of (7) above, when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific game state, neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed after the specific timing. It is controllable. Being able to control so that neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed corresponds to, for example, control that ends the first specific control and does not start the second specific control.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific game state, without changing to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state (for example, the time saving performance in the C time saving game state), the third It is characterized by being able to maintain the third specific control corresponding to the specific game state (for example, time saving performance in B time saving game state).

The gaming machine of (8) above does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific game state, and corresponds to the third specific game state. It enables the third specific control to be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saving final variation) in the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state), after the specific timing (for example, time saving final variation next variation), the third specific control (for example, time-saving performance in B time-saving game state) to the second specific control (for example, time-saving performance in C time-saving game state) characterized in that it can be changed.

In the gaming machine of (9) above, when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the third specific game state, the third specific control can be changed to the second specific control after the specific timing. be.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The second specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) and the third specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) may differ in the aspect of the specific control.

In the gaming machine (10) above, the second specific game state and the third specific game state have different specific control modes. As a result, the variety of games is increased, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the first specific game state (eg, A reduced gaming state) and the transition condition to the second specific game state (eg, C reduced gaming state) are established, or the first specific game state When the transition condition to the second specific game state is established in
The number of variable display times of the special symbol executable until the first end condition is satisfied and the number of variable display times of the special symbol executable until the second end condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. The specific game state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when the first specific game state and the second specific game state overlap, the number of variable display times of special symbols that can be executed until the first end condition is satisfied and the second end condition are set. It is possible to control to a specific game state until the special symbols are variably displayed over the larger number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the game is established.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction game state) and the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction game state) are satisfied, or the third specific game state When the transition condition to the second specific game state is established in
The number of variable display times of the special symbol executable until the second end condition is satisfied and the number of variable display times of the special symbol executable until the third end condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. The specific game state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the second specific game state and the third specific game state overlap, the number of variable display times of special symbols that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied and the third end condition are set. It is possible to control to a specific game state until the special symbols are variably displayed over the larger number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the game is established.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (11), and (12) above,
A counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol,
The counting means
Of the at least two specific game states, when the transition condition to another specific game state is established in any one specific game state, or the transition condition to the one specific game state and the other specific game state If the conditions for transitioning to
The number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the one specific game state is satisfied, and the number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific game state is satisfied; It is characterized in that both can be counted.

The game machine of (13) above, when the transition condition to another specific game state is established in any one specific game state, or when the transition condition to one specific game state and the transition to another specific game state When the conditions are established, the number of times of display of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of one specific game state is established, and the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific game state is established. It is possible to count both the number of times of display and .

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
When the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, as the end condition of the corresponding specific game state, end condition setting means (for example, S235, S237, S238 processing is performed which can set the number of times of variable display of the special symbol) Equipped with a main CPU 201),
The end condition setting means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction game state) is established, and when the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction game state) is established, It is characterized in that it is possible to set different times as the number of variable display times of special symbols (for example, the number of time reduction times).

In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied and when the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied, different times are set as the number of variable display times of special symbols. It is configurable.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (14) above,
In the first specific game state,
The derivation probability of the normal per symbol stop mode is higher than any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

In the gaming machine (15) above, in the first specific game state, the derivation probability of the normal per-symbol stop mode is higher than in either the second specific game state or the third specific game state. Thereby, the first specific game state can be positioned as a specific game state more advantageous than the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, a counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) and the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) are satisfied, the third specific game state It is characterized by being controllable to

The gaming machine of (16) above is capable of being controlled to the third specific game state when the conditions for transition to the second specific game state and the conditions for transition to the third specific game state are established.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, the transition to the second specific game state is possible even if the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied.

In the gaming machine of (17) above, when the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, even if the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied, the transition to the second specific game state is possible. It is.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, a counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
In the variable display of the special symbol where the transition condition to the third specific game state is established (for example, the variable display of the special symbol of the ceiling number), the transition condition to the second specific game state is not established ( For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), it is possible to shift to the third specific game state without confirming that the transition condition to the second specific game state is not satisfied. do.

In the gaming machine of (18) above, when the transition condition to the second specific game state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbols in which the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied, the second specific game state It is possible to shift to the third specific game state without confirming that the transition condition of (1) is not satisfied.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
In the variable display of the special symbol where the transition condition to the third specific game state is established (for example, the variable display of the special symbol of the ceiling number), the transition condition to the second specific game state is not established ( For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), after confirming that the transition condition to the second specific game state is not satisfied, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state. do.

In the gaming machine of (19) above, in the variable display of special symbols in which the condition for transition to the third specific game state is established, when the condition for transition to the second specific game state is not satisfied, the second specific game state After confirming that the transition condition is not satisfied, the transition to the third specific game state is made possible.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), (15), and (16) above,
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction) or the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction) is established, the transition to establish the transition flag to the specific game state A flag establishment means is provided,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the specific game state.

The gaming machine of (20) above shifts to the second specific game state when the transition condition for the second specific game state is satisfied, and shifts to the third specific game state when the transition condition for the third specific game state is satisfied. It is designed to be transferred.

(21) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction) is established, the second transition flag is established, and when the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction) is established It establishes the third flag,
The specific game state control means is
When the second transition flag is established, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state, and when the third transition flag is established, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

The gaming machine of (21) establishes the second transition flag when the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, and sets the third transition flag when the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied. It is made to be established, that is, to establish a separate flag.

(22) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started, counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established (for example, when S233 in FIG. 41 is YES determination), it is possible to shift to the third specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) characterized by being

The gaming machine of (22) above gives priority to the transition to the third specific game state when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established.

(23) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started, counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established (for example, when S236 of FIG. 45 is YES determination), the second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) can be shifted to characterized by being

The gaming machine of (23) above gives priority to the transition to the second specific game state when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established.

(24) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means is
Said second specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) when the transition condition is established, said third specific game state (e.g., B time-saving game state) is used when the transition condition is established It is characterized by establishing a common transition flag (for example, a time saving transition flag).

The gaming machine of (24) above establishes a common transition flag used in common when the conditions for transition to the second specific game state and the conditions for transition to the third specific game state are established. be.

(25) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started, counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the common transition flag is established, if the transition condition to the third specific game state is established, even if the transition condition to the second specific game state is established, the third specific game state It is characterized by being able to shift to

In the gaming machine of (25) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the third specific game state are established, the transition to the third specific game state is performed rather than the transition to the second specific game state. It is designed to give priority to the migration of

(26) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started, counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S182 in FIG. 44) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the common transition flag is established, if the transition condition to the second specific game state is established, even if the transition condition to the third specific game state is established, the second specific game state It is characterized by being able to shift to

In the gaming machine of (26) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the second specific game state are established, the transition to the second specific game state is performed rather than the transition to the third specific game state. It is designed to give priority to the migration of

According to the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 5, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[7-6. Appendix 6]
The pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 6 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the lottery is derived;
When the special stop mode is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled to a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed;
counting means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs ceiling counter update processing) capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbols when the special game state is not in effect;
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol management process) capable of controlling a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
A main control means (for example, a main control circuit 200) having
The game state control means is
As a game state in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed,
Normal game state,
A plurality of games including a specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) that is controllable as a transition condition that the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times and is more advantageous than the normal game state. It is characterized by being controllable to one of the states.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is not in the special game state, the number of variable display times of the special symbols is counted, and the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times as the transition condition. Controllable to the specific game state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new game features such as playing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means,
A game state in which the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is counted by the counting means (for example, a game state in which the probability variation flag is off), and a game state in which the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is not counted by the counting means (for example, probability variation A game state in which the flag is on) and are included.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the game state counted by the counting means and the game state not counted are included. As a result, the width of the game is widened, and it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means,
As the game state in which the number of variable display times of the special symbols is counted by the counting means, the probability that the normal game state, the specific game state (for example, the B time-saving game state), and the special stop mode are derived is the An advantageous gaming state higher than the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (for example, a high certainty gaming state) is included,
The game state control means is
When the advantageous game state is not controlled, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times, the specific game state can be controlled,
When controlled to the advantageous game state, it is possible not to control to the specific game state even if the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times.

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the counting means counts any of the normal game state, the specific game state, and the advantageous game state. However, if it is not controlled to an advantageous game state, it can be controlled to a specific game state when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the specified number of times, but if controlled to an advantageous game state, the number of times of variable display of special symbols is the specified number of times. It is possible not to control to a specific game state even if it reaches.

The above-mentioned "when the game is not controlled to the advantageous game state" corresponds to, for example, the case where the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number without being controlled to the advantageous game state even once. In addition, the above-mentioned "when it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state" is, for example, when it is a specification to perform a ST machine or a variable falling lottery, when it is controlled to a normal gaming state after the advantageous gaming state is finished. Equivalent to.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
a storage means (for example, main RAM 203) capable of storing information including the number of times information counted by the counting means as information relating to the progress of the game;
Information erasing operation means (for example, backup clear switch 176) used for the operation of erasing information stored in the storage means;
The number of times counted by the counting means stored in the storage means separately from when the special game state is controlled or when the special game state ends and when the information erasing operation means is operated. Count initialization operation means capable of initializing information (for example, a setting key 174 as a switch separate from the backup clear switch 176, a dedicated switch, etc.);
characterized by comprising

In the gaming machine of (4) above, the number of times information counted by the counting means is initialized separately when the special game state is controlled or when the special game state ends, and when the information erasing operation means is operated. It is provided with counting initialization operation means that can be initialized.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the count initialization operating means (for example, the setting key 1174 for changing settings) is operated, information erasing means (for example, processing of S361) capable of erasing the information stored in the storage means is executed. It is characterized by having a CPU 201).

In the game machine of (5) above, the information stored in the storage means can be erased when the count initialization operation means is operated.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, display mode of a small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed (for example, , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled to a small hit game state);
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area;
with
The production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies the transition condition to the specific game state, rather than the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived, the specific game state is entered. It is characterized in that it is possible to perform control so that the transition performance suggesting that the transition condition of 1 is satisfied is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies the transition condition to the specific game state, rather than the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived, Control is performed so that a transition performance suggesting that a condition for transition to a specific game state has been established is preferentially performed.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, display mode of a small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed (for example, , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled to a small hit game state);
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area;
with
The production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol where the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, the special It is characterized by being controllable so that a special effect suggesting that the stop mode will be derived is preferentially performed.

In the gaming machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbols for which the condition for transition to the specific game state is satisfied, the transition effect suggesting that the condition for transition to the specific game state is satisfied. The control is performed so that the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived is preferentially performed.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The counting means can count the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed when the variable display of the special symbols is started,
The special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol,
The lottery means
A first special symbol lottery means for performing a first special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the first special starting area (for example, the first starting port switch 121);
A second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area (for example, the second start port switches 141A and 141B);
has
The special symbol control means is
Main CPU 201 that performs variable display of the first special symbol and performs control so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived (for example, the first special symbol variable display end process (S94) )and,
Second special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs second special symbol variable display end processing (S94) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and controlling so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. )and,
It is possible to variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of times the first special symbol changes per unit time, and the unit time One of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per per is configured to be larger than the other expected value,
The game state control means is
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), when the variable display of the special symbol when reaching the specified number of times is started, it is possible to shift to the specific game state. characterized by being

The gaming machine of (8) above is capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time, In a gaming machine configured such that one of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per unit time is greater than the other expected value, the counted number reaches a prescribed number. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols is started when reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to shift to the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the delay in the transition timing to the specific game state.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, display mode of a small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed (for example, , Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled in the small winning game state),
The game state control means is
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached until the result of the lottery is derived While it is possible to shift to the specific game state during
Even if the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, if the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbols when the specified number of times is reached, after the special game state ends It is characterized by being able to shift to the specific game state.

In the gaming machine of (9) above, when the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times, it is possible to shift to the specific game state before the result of the lottery is derived, while the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbols at the time, it is possible to shift to the specific game state after the special game state is finished.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
As a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed, the probability of deriving the special stop mode when the special symbols are variably displayed is an advantageous game that is higher than the normal game state and the specific game state. While being controllable to a state (for example, a high certainty gaming state),
The game machine is
A fall lottery means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of performing a fall lottery for determining whether or not to end the advantageous game state in the advantageous game state is provided,
The counting means
When the advantageous game state ends as a result of the fall lottery being performed without counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed in the advantageous game state, it is possible to start counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed. characterized by

The gaming machine of (10) above does not count the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed in the advantageous game state, and starts counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed when the advantageous game state ends as a result of the falling lottery. It is possible.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) with different probabilities of deriving the special stop mode can be set, and the probability corresponding to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived in
The prescribed number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability by a prescribed value within a prescribed range (for example, within the range of 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the probability,
The specified value is different according to the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which set value is set among the plurality of set values. do.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of deriving the special stop mode can be set, and the special stop mode is derived with a probability corresponding to the set set value. It is a game machine in which a lottery is performed. The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode will be derived by a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode will be derived. The specified value differs depending on the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which set value is set among the plurality of set values. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the setting values that have been set based on the specified number of times, which is the transition condition to the specific game state.

According to the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 6, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[7-7. Appendix 7]
The pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 7 has the following features.
(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) capable of performing a special symbol lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big win game state) in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145);
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol management process) capable of controlling a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301 that performs effect mode determination processing (S504)) capable of controlling display effects in a predetermined display effect area;
with
The game state control means is
Normal game state,
A plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state and whose transition condition is that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. can be controlled by either of
The production control means is
In the variable display (for example, final ceiling change) before the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times, game progress effects related to the progress of the game (for example, shutter closing effect, right-handed navigation effect, night mode display effect) are performed. It is characterized by being controllable to start.

The gaming machine described in (1) above provides a new and unprecedented game feature such as performing a game progress effect related to the progress of the game in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times. It is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with

It should be noted that ``in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times, the game progress effect relating to the progress of the game is started'' means that the variable display before the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times. Not only the game progress effect is performed in , but also the game progress effect is performed after that (for example, the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbols include one special symbol (eg, first special symbol) and another special symbol (eg, second special symbol),
The special symbol lottery means is
One special symbol lottery means for performing a special symbol lottery for the one special symbol (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing a hit determination process (S104) for the first special symbol) and a special symbol lottery for the other special symbol and another special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the second special symbol hit determination process (S104)),
The special symbol control means is
one special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the first special symbol) that performs variable display of the one special symbol and controls to derive the result of the one special symbol lottery; ,
Other special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the second special symbol) that performs variable display of the other special symbol and controls to derive the result of the other special symbol lottery. ,
and, even if one of the one special symbol and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the other can be variably displayed,
The game machine is
normal symbol lottery means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing normal symbol variable display start processing (S293)) for performing a normal symbol lottery when another condition different from the predetermined condition is met;
Normal symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs normal symbol variable display end processing (S294)) that performs variable display of normal symbols and controls to derive the result of the normal symbol lottery;
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, the normal electric role) that makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol lottery Main CPU 201) that performs object release processing (S296);
further comprising
The production control means is
It is possible to perform a first display effect accompanying variable display of the one special symbol or a second display effect accompanying variable display of the other special symbol,
Prior to the transition to the specific game state, the first display effect is given priority over the second display effect,
After the transition to the specific game state, it is possible to perform the first display effect so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific game state.

The gaming machine of (2) above is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying one special symbol and another special symbol in parallel, and before shifting to the specific game state, i.e., variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. Until then, the first display effect is displayed with the variable display of one special symbol, and after the transition to the specific game state, the display frequency of the first display effect is reduced.

After the transition to the specific game state, it is preferable that the second display effect (for example, night mode display effect) associated with the variable display of other special symbols is preferentially displayed over the first display effect.

Further, "to perform the first display effect so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific game state" means that the execution frequency of the first display effect is higher than before the transition to the specific game state. This is intended to include not only the case of lowering, but also a mode in which the first display effect is not displayed at all after the transition to the specific game state.

In addition, the special symbol lottery facilitating means makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of other special symbol lotteries, but by providing a plurality of other special symbol lottery execution opportunities (for example, the second start port A plurality of them may be provided), and only one of them may increase the execution frequency of other special symbol lotteries by the special symbol lottery facilitation means.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the one special symbol, the first display effect can be performed until the second display effect is started. (For example, second normal pattern)
It is characterized by

The gaming machine of (3) above performs the first display effect until the second display effect is started when the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of one special symbol. It made it possible.

A mode in which the first display effect is displayed until the second display effect is started corresponds to, for example, a mode in which the first display effect is displayed in a loop.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to the specific game state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The production control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect of displaying the number of times of time saving in B time saving game state). and
When the variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after shifting to the specific game state are displayed. When the variable display is finished or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, the third display effect can be performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

(5) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to the specific game state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The production control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect of displaying the number of times of time saving in B time saving game state). and
When the variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after shifting to the specific game state are displayed. When the variable display is finished or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, the third display effect can be performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

The above (4) and (5) gaming machines are capable of performing a third display effect related to the end condition of the specific game state when the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is completed. It is the one that was made. In such a gaming machine, when the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the specific game state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent times after shifting to the specific game state. When the variable display of the special symbols is completed or when the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, the third display performance is performed.

Note that (4) above can also be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (1) above. Similarly, (5) above can be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above.
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to the specific game state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The production control means is
When the first variable display of the other special symbols after transitioning to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, count up to display the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state) It is possible to perform directing),
The variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the one special symbol, and at the end of the variable display of the one special symbol, the other special symbol is being variably displayed. When there is, or when the variable display of the other special symbols is not performed, when the variable display of the other special symbols after the variable display of the other special symbols is completed, or when the variable display of the other special symbols is performed It may be characterized in that it is possible to perform the third display effect when it is not displayed.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (2), (3) or (5) above,
The production control means is
The variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of the one special symbol ends during, it is possible to perform the first display effect when the variable display of the one special symbol ends (for example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (6) above, the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbols, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols. When the variable display of one special pattern ends during the variable display of the special pattern, the first display performance can be performed when the variable display of one special pattern ends.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The production control means is
The game progress effect can be displayed at the start of the variable display of the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols which is the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state. (for example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (7) above, at the start of the variable display of the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols, which is the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state, the game It is possible to display the progress effect.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7) above,
The production control means is
The variable display of the one special symbol is performed during the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol, which is the first variable display of the special symbol after shifting to the specific game state. Even when the ready-to-win effect is performed as the first display effect associated with the variable display of the one special symbol, the game progress effect (for example, right-handed small navigation effect) can be displayed (for example, , 1st irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (8) above, one special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols, which is the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state. When variable display of patterns is performed and ready-to-win performance is performed as a first display performance accompanying variable display of one special pattern, game progress performance (for example, right-handed small navigation performance) can be displayed.

It should be noted that the "game progress effect can be displayed" is not limited to displaying all of the game progress effect described in (1) above, but only a part of the game progress effect described in (1) above. Including those that are displayed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (2) or 3 above,
The production control means is
The variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of the one special symbol is not performed during the game, it is configured so that part of the game progress effect is not performed (for example, the third irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (9) above, the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbols, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols. When one special symbol is not variably displayed during the variable display of the special symbols, the second display effect is performed without performing the first display effect.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (9) above,
The normal symbol control means is
The variable display of the normal symbol is a short normal symbol variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the normal symbol performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, the normal symbol variation pattern "02H" in FIG. 239). , The expected value of the variable display frequency of the normal symbol performed per unit time is relatively small long general figure variable display mode (for example, the normal symbol variation pattern "05H" in FIG. 239), and at least a plurality of normal It can be done in any of the figure variable display modes,
Before the transition to the specific game state (for example, time saving flag = 0 shown in FIG. 239), the variable display of the normal design in the long general figure variable display mode, after the transition to the specific game state (for example , the time saving flag=1) shown in FIG. 239 can be performed at a different frequency.

In the gaming machine of (10) above, before shifting to the specific game state, it is possible to perform variable display of the normal symbols in the variable display mode of the long-common pattern at a frequency different from that after the transition to the specific game state. It is.

"Different frequency after transition to specific game state" may be performed with a higher frequency than after transition to a specific game state, or a lower frequency (probability 0).

It should be noted that "Before the transition to the specific game state, the variable display of normal symbols in the long-universal figure variable display mode is performed at a different frequency than after the transition to the specific game state" means before the transition to the specific game state. Also includes a mode that does not perform variable display of normal symbols at all in the long and wide figure variable display mode. Here, "not performed at all" may be either the case where the probability of performing a lottery is 0 or the case of discarding the lottery result of a lottery.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (10) above,
The other special symbol control means is
The variable display of the other special symbols is a short special symbol variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the other special symbols performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, the fluctuation of the special symbols for high start pattern), and a long special figure variable display mode (for example, a special symbol variation pattern for low start) with a relatively small expected value for the number of variable display times of the other special symbols performed per unit time. It is possible to do it in any of the multiple special figure variable display modes including,
Although the probability that the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific game state, before the transition to the specific game state, to the specific game state At a higher frequency than after the transition, it is possible to perform the variable display of the other special design in the long special design variable display mode (for example, the second irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (11) above, although the probability of deriving the special stop mode is the same before and after the transition to the specific game state, before the transition to the specific game state, the transition to the specific game state It is possible to perform variable display of other special symbols in a long special symbol variable display mode at a higher frequency than later.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The production control means is
It is possible to perform a normal effect that can be displayed in the normal game state and a specific effect that can be displayed in the specific game state,
A count effect control means capable of performing a count effect capable of grasping the number of variable display times of the special symbol performed before switching from the normal effect to the specific effect,
The count effect control means is
When shifting from the normal game state to the specific game state, it is possible to reset and display the number of variable display times of the special symbols performed until the normal performance is switched to the specific performance.

In the gaming machine (12) above, when the normal game state is shifted to the specific game state, it is possible to reset and display the number of variable display times of the special symbols performed until the normal effect is switched to the specific effect.

According to the pachinko game machine of Supplementary Note 7, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[7-8. Appendix 8]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, an image is displayed. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode ), the game is shifted to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, JP-A-2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention came to the idea that, in the process of earnestly examining various effects performed in a game machine, it would be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko game machine has the following features.

(A-1) production executing means capable of executing production;
icon display means capable of displaying icons (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, etc.) in the effect executed by the effect execution means;
The icon display means has the same system when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed by the effect execution means and when the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed. It is possible to display an icon (a "bell" icon),
The effect executing means is configured to provide different effects after the icon is displayed when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform a rendition,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed and when the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed, icons of the same system ("Bell" icon) can be displayed. Then, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). ) is displayed and after the icon (“bell” icon) is displayed, different effects can be executed. As a result, by giving variation to the effects performed before and after the icons are displayed, and by making the icons displayed between the effects the same system, the development of the effects can be easily understood from the player's point of view. can do. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

As explained in the fifth pachinko game machine, as icons in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately employ icons composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or combinations thereof. “Icons of the same family” means that one icon and another icon have at least part of the same characters, figures, symbols, and colors. For example, when the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 (see FIG. 170(b)) is adopted as the icon, the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed and the second effect (second notice effect ) is being executed, the completely same “X” icon confirmation image 9051 may be displayed, and when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed, “X” is displayed in the first color (for example, blue), and when the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed, the character "X" is displayed. An “X” icon confirmation image 9051 of a second color (eg, red) may be displayed. Further, when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed, an "X" icon confirmation image 9051 in which the character "X" is a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is displayed. (second notice effect) is being executed, the character "Y" is the same color as the character "X" (for example, yellow) 9052 (see FIG. 170 ( c) see) may be displayed.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko machine, various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, second specific icon, and third specific icon) In the big hit notice effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect), they are displayed as “mutually similar icons”. For example, various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) are Various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) and "same system" be.

(A-2) The gaming machine of (A-1),
The effect execution means provides a common effect (see FIG. 152 After executing the notice after stopping the icon corresponding to the shown effect number "91" or "92", it is possible to execute the different effects from each other,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the same icon is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is possible to execute a common effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) when the system icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. is configured to This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the common production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, data for the first effect (first advance notice effect) and second effect (second notice effect) are used as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, it is possible to simplify the performance control.

(A-3) The gaming machine of (A-1) or (A-2),
The effect executing means displays a first icon (“bell” icon) as the icon of the same system, and a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon. It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) in the case of
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system, and when the second icon (“bell” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed "Watermelon" icon) is displayed, and a common effect (announcement after icon stop corresponding to effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) can be executed. there is This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the common production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, as data for effecting when the icons are displayed, both data for the first icon (“bell” icon) and data for the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are stored. Since there is no need to set the display, the effect control can be simplified.

It should be noted that "common" is a concept that can be rephrased as "same type" as in the above-described "same system", and one performance and another performance may not be exactly the same. If one performance and another performance include at least a part of the same element, these performances can be said to be a common performance. For example, in the background image displayed in one effect and the background image displayed in another effect, if the basic scenery is the same, even if a part of the scenery is subtly different, these background images may be considered "common".

(A-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-3) above,
a movable member;
Advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The effect executing means (the sub-control circuit 300 that performs the effect shown in FIG. 168) determines the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, it suggests the player's expectation of advantageous control over the operating time of the movable member. is configured in such a way that As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon), and the movement of the movable member from the display of the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon) can be enhanced. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance.

(A-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-4) above,
a movable member;
Advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The production executing means is
A first specific effect performed when the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number “91” or “92” shown in FIG. 152) ), a third icon (a "cherry" icon) different from the first icon, while it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the advantageous control to be performed through the operation time of the movable member. In the second specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number “93” shown in FIG. 152) that is performed when is displayed, the control to operate the movable member is not performed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first specific effect (effect number "91" or "92", it is possible to suggest the player's expectation of advantageous control over the operating time of the movable member. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon), and the movement of the movable member from the display of the icon of the same system (the "bell" icon) can be enhanced. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance. On the other hand, a second specific effect (corresponding to effect number “93” shown in FIG. 152) performed when a third icon (“cherry” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. In (announcement after icon stop), it is configured not to perform control to operate the movable member. In this way, by making the presence or absence of movement of the movable member different according to the type of the displayed icon, it is possible to associate the type of the icon to be displayed with the mode of presentation after the icon is displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the development of the production after the icon is displayed.

It should be noted that the movement of the movable member may be started after the display of the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is finished, or the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) may be started while the movement of the movable member is being performed. "Bell" icon) may continue to be displayed.

(A-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-5),
The production executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect,
In the second effect, before the icon of the same system is displayed, a preliminary effect suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed ( Display of icon suggestive items) can be executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 152 or While it is possible to execute the notice after stopping the icon corresponding to "92", it is also possible to specify when the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) It is configured to be able to execute an effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the specific production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). can be made easier to understand. In addition, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is suggested that the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed before the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed. 143 (display of an icon-suggestion-type item in an effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 143). As a result, when it is suggested that the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) will be displayed, the player can predict the development of the effect one step ahead.

(A-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-6) above,
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The production executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect,
In the second effect, a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (roulette effect) is provided,
The predetermined effect execution means is
a first suggesting means (a sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 143) capable of suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed;
A second suggesting means (sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "15" shown in FIG. 143) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the advantageous control being performed,
The production executing means is
When the first suggesting means suggests that the icon of the same system should be displayed in the second effect, the specific effect can be executed after the icon of the same system is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation degree is suggested by the second suggesting means in the second effect, the specific effect is not executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 152 or While it is possible to execute the notice after stopping the icon corresponding to "92", it is also possible to specify when the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) It is configured to be able to execute an effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the specific production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152). can be made easier to understand. Also, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (roulette effect), and in the predetermined effect (roulette effect), the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. There are cases where it is suggested that it will be displayed, and there are cases where it is suggested that the degree of expectation for control that is advantageous to the player is performed. Then, when it is suggested that the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect), the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed. After that, while it is possible to execute a specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152), the expectation level is suggested, the specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 152) is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) will be displayed, the player can predict the development of the effect one step ahead. On the other hand, when the degree of expectation is suggested, it is possible to create a player's sense of expectation without the development of the performance, so it is possible to improve the attractiveness of the second performance (second advance notice performance). can be done.

(A-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-7) above,
The production executing means is
A common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) in the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect ), it is possible to execute the different effects from each other,
When the icon of the same system is displayed in a third effect (third notice effect) different from the first effect and the second effect, a specific effect (third 1 connecting effect (dedicated)) can be executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the same icon is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured such that it is possible to execute a common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) when the system icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the performance through the common specific performance (first connecting performance (common)), so that the development of the performance can be more easily understood. In addition, data for the first effect (first advance notice effect) and second effect (second notice effect) are used as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, it is possible to simplify the performance control. Furthermore, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), a specific effect different from the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) It is configured to be able to execute an effect (first connecting effect (dedicated)). Thus, an appropriate specific performance corresponding to the content of the third performance (third notice performance) different from the first performance (first notice performance) and the second performance (second notice performance) is realized. can be done.

In the present invention, the specific effect different from the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) is displayed with a similar icon (“bell” icon) in the third effect (third advance notice effect). It may appear only when the third effect (third notice effect) is displayed, and it may also appear when the icon of the same type ("Bell" icon) is displayed in the effect other than the third effect (third notice effect). may be Further, in the present invention, even when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common) ) may be performed.

(A-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-8),
Equipped with an operation means (production button 54) capable of accepting an operation by a player,
The icon display means is
First icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated (when the effect button 54 is operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 146) and,
A second icon capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is not operated (when the effect button 54 is not operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" shown in FIG. 146) a display means;
The effect executing means executes a specific effect (connecting effect) in both cases when the icon is displayed by the first icon display means and when the icon is displayed by the second icon display means. is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon is displayed when the operation means (effect button 54) is operated, and when the icon is displayed even if the operation means (effect button 54) is not operated. There is. And it is configured such that the specific effect (connecting effect) can be executed in any situation in which the icon is displayed. Thereby, the specific effect (connection effect) is executed when the operation means (effect button 54) is operated, and the specific effect (connection effect) is executed even if the operation means (effect button 54) is not operated. It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to play, and through such a situation, it is possible to provide variations in the development of the production.

In addition, a specific effect (connection effect) that is executed when the operation means (production button 54) is operated, and a specific effect (connection effect) that is executed when the operation means (production button 54) is not operated may be a common presentation (partially different presentation), or may be completely the same presentation.

(A-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-9) above,
The production executing means is
a pattern effect executing means capable of executing a pattern effect in which a pattern is displayed;
When a specific pattern display (image display related to 4-symbol Tenpai swaying) is performed in the pattern production performed in the first production state (the state in which the normal background is displayed), the first production state is changed from the first production state to the first display. a production state switching means capable of switching to a production state of 2 (a state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4-symbol tenpai),
The icon display means is
When the specific symbol display is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, it is possible to display a first icon (a "bell" icon) as the icon of the same system,
After switching to the second effect state by the effect state switching means, when the specific symbol display is performed in the symbol effect, a second icon ("watermelon") different from the first icon is displayed. icon),
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific symbol display (image display related to 4-symbol Tenpai swaying) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (state in which the normal background is displayed) , it is possible to switch from the first presentation state (the state in which the normal background is displayed) to the second presentation state (the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4-symbol tenpai). 1 icon (the "bell" icon) can be displayed. Then, after switching to the second production state (the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4-pattern tenpai), when a specific pattern display (image display related to the 4-pattern tenpai fanning) is performed in the pattern production, It is configured to be able to display a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon). In this way, the first icon (“bell” icon) and the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are displayed step by step, and the specific pattern display (image display related to the 4-pattern tenpai swaying) and effect state are displayed. By associating the switching of , it is possible to create an attractive production development.

Note that the first effect state and the second effect state may be states in which different backgrounds are displayed, or the appearance frequency of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed) is They may be in different states. For example, the probability that the first effect is performed is higher than the second effect in the first effect state, while the probability that the second effect is performed is higher than the first effect in the second effect state. It may be configured to be In addition, while the probability that the first character appears is higher than the second character in the first production state, the probability that the second character appears is higher than the first character in the second production state. It may be configured to be

(A-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-10),
Equipped with a pattern display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of patterns,
The pattern display means is capable of temporarily stopping and displaying the pattern before the pattern is finally stopped and displayed,
The effect executing means, when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") from when the variable display of the symbol is started until the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol It is possible to execute the different effects from each other in the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of is resumed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") from when the variable display of the pattern is started until the pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the icon of the same system ("Bell" icon ) is displayed, the different effects can be executed in the second pseudo-game (“pseudo-2”) after the variable display of symbols is resumed. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first pseudo-game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo-game (“pseudo 2”) with the display of the same system icon (“bell” icon) as a mark. , and the development of the production can be made even easier to understand.

In the present invention, one unit game (special symbol variation game) is formed from the start of symbol variation display until the symbol is finally stopped and displayed. One unit game (special symbol variation game) corresponds to one special symbol start winning (one reserved ball), and even if the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the number of reserved balls does not decrease. It is possible to configure

[7-9. Appendix 9]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, an image is displayed. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode ), the game is shifted to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, JP-A-2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention came to the idea that, in the process of earnestly examining various effects performed in a game machine, it would be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko game machine has the following features.

(B-1) Equipped with production mode control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage),
In the plurality of production modes, the occurrence ratio of each production is different from each other,
The production mode control means, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, one production mode It is possible to transition from to another production mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the occurrence ratio of each production is different from each other, and a specific condition ( When the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is established, one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage). As a result, as the game progresses, through the gradual transition between production modes (production stages) with different production tendencies, which production mode (production stage) is currently being stayed and which production mode (production stage) is next. It can interest the player as to whether to transition to. As a result, it is possible to create an interesting performance development, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), a lottery based on random numbers is performed, respectively, based on the production lottery table. , the content of the effect that occurs is determined. Different production lottery tables are used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage). In the production lottery table used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), at least one of the lottery values (random value range) specified for each production Some are different. As a result, when a predetermined effect that can occur in any of the effect modes (the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage) is provided, the effect mode (the first effect stage, the third effect stage, the The occurrence probability (frequency) of the production is different for each production stage (second production stage, and the third production stage), or the production that can occur in one production mode (for example, the first production stage) is different from another production mode (for example, the first production stage). , second production stage and third production stage). That is, in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the tendencies (systems) of production are different from each other. For example, in the first production stage, pseudo-continuous production is more likely to occur than in the second production stage and the third production stage. Also, the time stock notice can occur only in the second production stage. Also, the meter UP notice can occur only in the third production stage.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery. explained as being to be done. In the present invention, the method of determining the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is not particularly limited. For example, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the production mode (first production stage , second production stage, or third production stage) may be sequentially shifted. In addition, a mode (random mode) in which the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery, and a production mode (first production A stage, a second production stage, or a third production stage) is configured so that the player can select one of the modes (order mode) by operating a button or the like. You may Further, the player can select by operating a button or the like to play the game in any one of the production modes (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage). can be configured to For example, a random mode, an order mode, a first production stage fixed mode (a mode in which the game is played only on the first production stage), a second production stage fixed mode (a mode in which the game is played only on the second production stage), and a third production stage It may be configured such that the player can select one of the fixed mode (the mode in which the game is played only in the third effect stage) by operating a button or the like. At this time, even when the first production stage fixed mode, the second production stage fixed mode, or the third production stage fixed mode is selected, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, A stage change announcement performance may be generated.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition), the condition that the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times). Also, an example employing the condition that the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177 is selected has been described. A specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and any condition can be appropriately adopted. For example, the predetermined number of times may be a numerical value selected by lottery from a plurality of numerical values (eg, 0 to 99) instead of a predetermined numerical value. For example, at the start of one special symbol variation (for example, after executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 186), one numerical value is selected by lottery, and special symbol variation for the number of times corresponding to the numerical value is performed. However, when (a specific condition corresponding to the lottery result is established), the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed. At this time, when 0 is selected by lottery, after once transitioning the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) in one special design variation, the special design In the variation, the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed again. Alternatively, when a specific condition is established according to a predetermined winning (for example, winning of a game ball to the first start port 120), the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed.

In addition, when the RAM clear is executed, it may be made to stay in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). Also, at this time, the post-transition fluctuation number counter (see step S9261 in FIG. 188) may be set to "0". RAM clear is a process of clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203, as described in the first pachinko game machine, and is stored in the work area of the main RAM. This is the process of clearing the existing information. When the RAM clear (backup clear processing) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear processing) has been executed is sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 as a command. By receiving this command, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that RAM clear (backup clear processing) has been executed. As explained in the first pachinko game machine, in the RAM clear (backup clear processing), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but in principle the information stored in the specific work area Not cleared.

Further, when the power is turned on, the production stage managed by the sub-control circuit 300 may be made to stay in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). As a result, regardless of the game state managed by the main control circuit 200, the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). At this time, the post-transition fluctuation counter may be set to "0".

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as game states managed by the main control circuit 200, a normal game state and a probability variable game state (high probability game state) are provided, and in the probability variable game state, special symbol fluctuations occur a predetermined number of times ( 50 times), it has been explained that the variable probability game state shifts to the normal game state. Here, when shifting from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, another gaming state (intervening gaming state) may be passed through. For example, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probability variation gaming state, the transition from the probability variation gaming state to the intervening gaming state occurs, and the special symbol variation occurs the specified number of times (eg, two times) in the intervening gaming state. When done, it can be configured to transition from the intervening gaming state to the normal gaming state. In the intervening game state, the lottery may be performed using a table different from the various tables used in the normal game state and the variable probability game state (for example, a variation pattern table of special symbols).

As the performance mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300, a performance mode (intermediate mode) corresponding to the intervening game state may be provided. For example, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times) in the probability variation mode, the transition from the probability variation mode to the intervention mode occurs, and the special symbol variation is performed a specified number of times (eg, 2 times) in the intervention mode, It can be configured to transition from intervention mode to normal mode. For example, when the probability variable mode ends, a result screen corresponding to the result during the bonus (for example, an image showing the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode) can be displayed. Conceivably, the result screen may continue to be displayed even in the intervening mode.

When such an intervening mode shifts to the normal mode, a stage change may always occur (transition to a production stage determined by lottery). In addition, when an irregularity (power failure, etc.) occurs or when RAM clearing is executed, the game state managed by the main control circuit 200 is an intervening game state, while the production mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300 is a predetermined effect mode (for example, an image corresponding to the first effect stage is displayed). In this case, until the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times), the predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage) may be made to stay.

(B-2)
The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
game control means capable of controlling the execution of a game based on one set value among a plurality of set values;
setting value suggesting means capable of suggesting the setting value;
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
The production mode control means is capable of transitioning from the first production mode to the second production mode when the specific condition is satisfied,
The setting value suggesting means can suggest the setting value by displaying the specific condition (displaying a counter image when a stage change occurs).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, the second It is possible to transition from one production mode (first production stage) to a second production mode (second production stage), and a display showing the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) It is configured so that it is possible to suggest a set value by In this way, since the display indicating the specific condition (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs) is performed, the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage) The player can be interested in the conditions for transitioning to. At the same time, through the display (the display of the counter image when a stage change occurs), it is possible for the player to predict the set value, so that the player's interest in the condition can be heightened.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the image indicating the name of the production mode (production stage) after transition is being displayed, the content of the display showing the specific condition (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs) is displayed. It was explained as being reset (recovered). Thus, in the present invention, when a specific condition (stage change generation condition) is satisfied, the production mode of the transition destination (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) corresponds to It is possible to change the display indicating a specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) while an image (background, name, etc.) is displayed.

In the present invention, display of a counter image when a stage change occurs can be used as the display indicating the specific condition. The counter image may be a counter image displayed in the stage change game (special symbol variation in which the stage is changed), or a game before the stage change game (for example, one of the special symbol variations in which the stage is changed). It may be a counter image displayed in the previous special symbol variation). For example, in the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, an effect such as changing the color of the counter image to the color corresponding to the set value may be performed.

(B-3)
The gaming machine of (B-1) or (B-2),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
First production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and second production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174) It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth advance notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including
It is possible to display patterns in mutually different patterns when the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode and when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode. be,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second effect mode (the effect number "104" shown in FIG. 174 ” and “106”). notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174), and a specific effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the second effect. Patterns can be displayed in different patterns depending on the mode (the mode corresponding to the mode numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174). As a result, it is possible to display the symbols in a pattern corresponding to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the symbol display are appropriately linked.

(B-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-3),
Identification information display means (display device 7) capable of performing variable display and static display of identification information;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
A first effect (a first notice effect, a second notice effect, a third notice effect, and a fourth notice effect) is provided as a effect that can be executed only in the first effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. and
A second effect (eighth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the second effect mode among the plurality of effect modes,
A third effect (sixth advance notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode,
The production executing means is
First production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and second production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 174) It is possible to execute the third effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including
Identifying after starting variable display of identification information in the case where the third effect is executed in the first effect mode and the case where the third effect is executed in the second effect mode It is possible to display the identification information with different variation patterns as the variation pattern of the identification information until the information is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174) and the second effect mode (the effect number "104" shown in FIG. 174 ” and “106”), it is possible to execute the third effect (sixth notice effect), 6th notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 174), and when the third effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the first 2 presentation mode (the presentation mode corresponding to the presentation numbers ``104'' and ``106'' shown in FIG. 174). It is configured such that identification information can be displayed in different variation patterns as information variation patterns. As a result, it is possible to display the identification information in a variation pattern according to the presentation mode, and it is possible to realize an presentation in which the presentation mode and the display of the identification information are appropriately linked. In addition, the first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) and second effect (eighth notice effect) are respectively in the first effect mode (first production stage) and the second production mode (second production stage), whereas the third production (sixth advance notice production) is the first production mode (first production stage) and the second production mode (second production stage). Therefore, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is established, for example, when the transition is made from the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage) , While the first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) is no longer performed, the second effect (eighth notice effect) is performed. , Further, it is possible to create a situation in which the third effect (sixth advance notice effect) is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in each production mode (production stage) and specific conditions (stage change occurrence conditions).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" to "106" are performed, the decorative patterns are changed in a dedicated pattern as shown in FIGS. 176(a) to (c). It was explained as letting On the other hand, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" are performed, for example, the default variation patterns shown in FIG. It is possible to fluctuate the decorative design with a fluctuation pattern in which the timing at which the decorative design is stopped is earlier than the fluctuation pattern shown.

(B-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-4) above,
The specific condition can be established according to the first symbol fluctuation display (first special symbol fluctuation), but cannot be established according to the second symbol fluctuation display (second special symbol fluctuation). ,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, while a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) can be established according to the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation), the second symbol variation It is configured so that it cannot be established according to the display (second special symbol variation). As a result, in the situation where the second symbol variation display (second special symbol variation) is performed, the transition of the production mode (production stage) does not occur, but the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed, a transition of the production mode (production stage) occurs. As a result, the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed with respect to the situation in which the second symbol variation display (second special symbol variation) is performed ) can be characterized as a situation in which the transition occurs, and the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed can be made interesting.

(B-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-5),
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 163) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information;
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first start port 120) is established;
display control means capable of causing the identification information display means to variably display the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, and then stop displaying the identification information;
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery,
The suggesting means is
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the variable display of the identification information based on the satisfaction of one of the predetermined conditions (retained ball in the stage change section) among the plurality of times the predetermined condition is satisfied is the display control. When the transition of the production mode by the production mode control means is performed in response to being performed by the means, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With regard to the predetermined lottery conducted in response to the above, while the result of the lottery can be suggested, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery conducted in response to the selection, no suggestion can be made regarding the outcome of the lottery.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the predetermined condition (the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) is established over a plurality of times, the predetermined condition (the first starting port 120 When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of one of the predetermined conditions (stage change section relevant reserved ball) , after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition (retained ball in the stage change section) is started, according to the establishment of the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 120) With regard to the predetermined lottery (jackpot judgment) performed in the Regarding a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first start port 120) before the display is started, a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery ( It is configured so that the look-ahead effect) cannot be performed. As a result, depending on the timing of establishment of each predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 120) and the timing of the variable display at which the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed, The number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which a suggestion (forecast effect) regarding the result can be performed is changed. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion about the result (prefetching effect) cannot be performed is predetermined, the number of predetermined lotteries in which the suggestion (prefetching effect) can be performed There is a possibility that (big hit determination) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to make a suggestion (forecast effect) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-6) above,
Lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (prefetch effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery;
A transition destination production mode determination means (sub CPU 301 that executes the processing of step S9203 in FIG. 186) capable of determining the production mode of the transition destination,
The production mode control means, when the specific condition is satisfied, from one production mode, it is possible to transition to the transition destination production mode determined by the transition destination production mode determination means,
The suggesting means is
When the predetermined lottery is performed multiple times, the predetermined lottery performed after the transition destination production mode is determined by the transition destination production mode determination means among the predetermined lotteries of the plurality of times , while the result of the lottery can be suggested, the result of the lottery can be suggested for the predetermined lottery performed before the transition destination production mode is determined by the transition destination production mode determination means. do not have,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed a plurality of times, the transition destination production mode (production stage) among the predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) is Regarding the predetermined lottery (jackpot judgment) performed after the determination, the result of the lottery can be suggested (forecasting effect), while the destination effect mode (effect stage) is determined. For a predetermined lottery (big hit determination), it is configured so that no suggestion (forecast effect) regarding the result of the lottery can be performed. As a result, depending on the timing of each predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) and the timing of determining the production mode (production stage) of the transition destination, a suggestion regarding the result (forecast production) can be performed. The number of lotteries (jackpot determination) will change. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion (prefetching effect) cannot be performed is predetermined, the predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion (prefetching effect) can be performed It is possible to increase the number of judgments), and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to make suggestions (prefetching effects) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-7),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production mode control means, when the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established as the specific condition In addition, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
The production executing means is
When the transition of the production mode by the production mode control means is performed in response to the establishment of the first condition, the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is executed. a first effect executing means capable of
A second effect executing means capable of executing a fifth effect different from the fourth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177),
The effect mode control means (the sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9281 in FIG. 189) sets the second condition related to the fifth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 177) even if the first condition is not satisfied. If the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected) is established, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 178) ) can be executed. Also, even if the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is not satisfied, the fourth production (Fig. 178) different from the fifth effect (effect corresponding to effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177) (effect corresponding to effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. If the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected) is established, it is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage). configured as possible. As a result, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) and the second condition (production number shown in FIG. 177 " 121" or "122" corresponding to the main variation pattern is selected), and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) and the fifth effect (shown in FIG. 177 Regarding the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"), it is possible to make the player interested in which condition is established and which effect is generated. As a result, it is possible to make the development of the production related to the transition of the production mode (the production stage) more interesting.

(B-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-8),
production execution means capable of executing production;
and a production selection means capable of selecting the production executed by the production execution means,
The effect mode control means, when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177(a)) is selected by the effect selection means, selects one effect mode from another effect mode. It is possible to transition to the production mode of
The effect executing means, at any one of a plurality of timings including a first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)) and a second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)) , it is possible to execute the predetermined production,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 (a)) is selected, one effect mode (effect stage) It is possible to transition from to another production mode (production stage), the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177 (b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177 (b)) At any timing of a plurality of timings including ing. As a result, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. Since it occurs at the timing 1) shown in (b) or at the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)), it is rich in variations in relation to the transition of the production mode (production stage). It is possible to create the development of the production.

177(b)) and the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)). 2 timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)), one or a plurality of timings may be provided. For example, while setting the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)) to be later than the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 177(b)) by a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds), At a third timing that is later than the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 177(b)) by a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds), a predetermined production (production number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177(a) ”) may be configured to be able to execute.

(B-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-9),
Lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
production execution means capable of executing production;
production pattern selection means capable of selecting a production pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the production executed by the production execution means;
Effect pattern replacement means (sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9210 in FIG. 186) capable of replacing the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means with another effect pattern,
The effect executing means includes a suggestive effect executing means capable of performing a suggestive effect (prefetch effect) that can suggest the result of the predetermined lottery,
When the suggestive effect is performed by the suggestive effect executing means, the effect pattern replacing means selects the first effect pattern (sub-fluctuation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 190) by the effect pattern selecting means. is selected, the production pattern is replaced, while the second production pattern (sub-fluctuation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 190) is selected by the production pattern selection means. does not replace the production pattern,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a suggestive effect (read-ahead effect) that can be suggested regarding the result of a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed, the first effect pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern "1 '' ~ "20") is selected, while the production pattern (sub-variation pattern) is replaced, the second production pattern (sub-variation pattern "21" ~ "30" shown in FIG. 190) is selected. If it is, it is configured not to replace the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern). Thus, as the first stage for determining the production pattern (sub-variation pattern), one production pattern (sub-variation pattern) is selected without considering whether or not the suggestive production (prefetch production) is performed. , On top of that, as a second step, when a suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is performed, an appropriate effect pattern according to the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is provided by replacing the effect pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) as necessary. In determining (sub-fluctuation pattern), the efficiency of processing can be improved.

(B-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-10),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production mode control means is
When the first condition as the specific condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is established, from one production mode A first production mode control means capable of transitioning to another production mode;
When the second condition (that the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is satisfied as the specific condition, from one production mode to another production mode A second production mode control means that can be transitioned to,
The production executing means is
When the transition of the production mode by the first production mode control means is performed in response to the establishment of the first condition, the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is performed. a first effect execution means that can be executed;
When the transition of the production mode by the second production mode control means is performed in response to the establishment of the second condition, the fifth production (corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 and a second effect execution means capable of executing the effect to
When both the first condition and the second condition are met, the fourth effect is not executed by the first effect executing means, and the second effect executing means executes the fourth effect. It is possible to perform the production of 5,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 178) ) can be executed. In addition, when the second condition (that the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is satisfied, one production mode (production stage) to another production It is possible to transition to the mode (production stage), and the second condition (that the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177 is selected) is established. When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed accordingly, it is possible to execute the fifth production (the production corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177). Then, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) and the second condition (production number "121 or the selection of the main variation pattern corresponding to "122"), the execution of the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 178) is executed. 177), the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) can be executed. In this way, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) and the second condition (production number shown in FIG. 177 When both conditions are satisfied, than the fourth effect (effect corresponding to effect number “131” shown in FIG. 178) By preferentially executing the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 178 ) does not occur, and the player's interest in the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 177) can be heightened.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the fifth effect (corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 177) rather than the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 178) production) can be preferentially executed. On the other hand, in a situation where the predetermined effect and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 178) can be performed, the fourth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 178) is preferred over the predetermined effect. The effect corresponding to the number "131") may be preferentially executed. As the predetermined production, there is an production performed when the special symbol variation starts (for example, a design action announcement production). The symbol action notice effect is a effect of generating a predetermined effect on the decorative symbol at the start of the special symbol variation. Even when it is decided to generate a symbol action notice performance at the start of one special symbol variation, when a stage change is performed in the special symbol variation, the symbol action notice performance is not performed. It is possible to

(B-12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-11),
a symbol display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect in one effect pattern out of a plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to effect numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 194);
production pattern selection means capable of selecting one production pattern from the plurality of production patterns as a production pattern executed by the production execution means;
The pattern display means can temporarily stop and display the pattern before the pattern is finally stopped and displayed,
The effect execution means selects one effect pattern among the plurality of effect patterns in a first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") from when the variable display of the symbols is started until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. After executing the production in , in the second pseudo-game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of the pattern is resumed, it is possible to execute the production with one production pattern among the plurality of production patterns. can be,
The production pattern selection means (the sub CPU 301 that executes the processing of step S9363 in FIG. 198 and the processing of step S9473 in FIG. 202) selects the pattern of the production performed in the second pseudo-game, and then based on the pattern , It is possible to select the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo game,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") from when the variable display of the symbols is started until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a plurality of production patterns (in FIG. 194 After executing the production with one of the production patterns corresponding to the production numbers "161" to "163" shown), the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the fluctuation display of the pattern is resumed. , it is possible to execute an effect with one of a plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to effect numbers “161” to “163” shown in FIG. 194). And, after selecting the pattern of the effect performed in the second pseudo-game ("pseudo 2"), based on the pattern, it is possible to select the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo-game ("pseudo 1"). configured as possible. As a result, it is possible to easily design the development of the effect performed from the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") to the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2").

[7-10. Appendix 10]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, an image is displayed. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode ), the game is shifted to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-110576).

The inventor of the present invention, in the process of earnestly examining the above-described gaming machine, came to the idea that it would be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the change time of the identification information. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko game machine has the following features.

(C-1) first lottery means capable of conducting a first lottery (ordinary lottery);
A second lottery means capable of performing a second lottery (second special lottery);
Based on the result of the first lottery performed by the first lottery means, a first display means (normal symbol display portion 161) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopped,
a second display means (second special symbol display section 164) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopped based on the result of the second lottery performed by the second lottery means; prepared,
The first display means can variably display the identification information over a first period of time (500 ms) when the result of the first lottery is the first result (per normal symbol). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result (normal loss), the identification information is variably displayed over a second time (600000 ms) longer than the first time. is possible and
The second display means variably displays the identification information over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time when the result of the second lottery is a specific result (small win). It is possible to let
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per normal symbol), the identification information is changed over the first time (500 ms). While it is possible to display, if the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), the second time (600000 ms) longer than the first time (500 ms) ), it is possible to variably display the identification information. Further, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the identification information is displayed for a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time (600000 ms). It is configured so that it can be variably displayed. As a result, while the variable display (first variable display) of the identification information is performed when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the second lottery is performed. It is possible to complete the variable display (second variable display) of the identification information when the result of the (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit). Therefore, by using the time from the end of the second variable display to the end of the first variable display, it is possible to create novel game characteristics and improve the amusement of the game.

(C-2) The gaming machine of (C-1) above,
A first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) in which game balls can enter,
A second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small winning) into which a game ball can enter;
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, it is possible to control the first winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the first winning means. 1 control means;
When the identification information is variably displayed over the second period of time by at least the first display means and the result of the second lottery is the specific result, the second prize winning means a second control means capable of controlling the second prize winning means so that game balls are easier to enter;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (ordinary symbol hit), the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) is used to play the game. It is possible to control the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) so that the ball can easily enter, and at least the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) can display the second If the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win) while the identification information is being variably displayed over time (600000 ms), the second winning means (small It is configured to be able to control the second winning means (big winning hole 151 for small winning) so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole 151 for winning. As a result, the second result (normal If a loss) occurs, while the identification information is being changed (first change display) based on the second result (normal loss), the second winning means (small winning big winning opening 151), it is possible to perform control to make it easier for the game ball to enter, and using the time until the first variable display ends, the second winning means (small winning big winning opening 151) It is possible to create a situation in which a game ball can easily enter.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the identification information is being changed (normal symbol losing length variation) based on the second result (normal losing), the second winning means (large winning opening for small winning) 151) explained that a situation is created in which game balls are likely to enter. The second result in the present invention is not limited to loss (normal loss), but may be hit (normal symbol win). It should be noted that the second time can be about 10 to 100,000 times (or 100 to 10,000 times, 500 to 5,000 times, 1,000 to 2,000 times, etc.) the first time. , and it is possible to set the time to about 5 to 10,000 times (or 100 to 5,000 times, 500 to 1,000 times, etc.) the third time. In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) is 0.5 to 50 times (or 1 to 1) the first time. 10 times, 2 times to 5 times, etc.). In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the second winning means (big winning hole for small win 151) is 0.5 to 100 times (or 1 time) the third time. up to 50 times, 2 times to 10 times, etc.).

(C-3) The gaming machine of (C-1) or (C-2),
A pattern display means (display device 7) capable of displaying patterns;
a pattern effect executing means capable of executing a pattern effect (drum variation effect) in which a plurality of patterns are displayed on the pattern display means;
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, the symbol effect executing means is arranged such that one symbol among the plurality of symbols is different from at least one symbol among the remaining symbols. On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, the pattern effect is executed so that the plurality of patterns are all the same pattern. it is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (ordinary design), one of the plurality of designs is the remaining design. While it is possible to execute a pattern performance (drum variation performance) so as to be different from at least one of the symbols, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss) is configured to be able to execute a pattern effect (drum variation effect) so that all of the plurality of patterns are the same pattern. Thus, by displaying all the same patterns as a plurality of patterns, the player can understand that the identification information is variably displayed over a relatively long period of time (second period of time (600000 ms)). can be done.

(C-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-3) above,
an image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
an image display control means capable of controlling image display on the image display means;
A state control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variable mode),
When the image display control means is controlled to the second state, predetermined images corresponding to the display mode of the identification information on the first display means (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and , right drum pattern 9202R) can be displayed on the image display means, while the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display means when being controlled to the first state,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when it is controlled to the second state (variable probability mode), a predetermined image corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161) (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) can be displayed, while the predetermined image ( The left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R) are not displayed. As a result, the second state (variable probability mode) is compared with the first state (normal mode), and the production (predetermined image The player can be made aware of the state in which (the effect using the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R) is performed.

(C-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-4) above,
production execution means capable of executing production;
A state control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variable mode),
The state control means is capable of terminating the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
The effect executing means, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, provides a predetermined effect (drum based on a winning pattern) according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state. There are cases where the variable production) is executed and cases where the predetermined production is not executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are performed in the second state (variable probability mode), it is possible to end the second state (variable probability mode). be. In addition, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), a predetermined effect is given according to the remaining number of executable unit games in the second state (probability variable mode). (drum fluctuation effect by winning pattern) is executed and the predetermined effect (drum fluctuation effect by winning pattern) is not executed. In this regard, if the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is small (for example, the time required to execute the remaining unit games in the second state (variable probability mode) is the first In a situation where the change display time of identification information when the result of the lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss) is relatively short compared to the second time (600000 ms)) , there is a possibility that the significance of the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becoming the second result (ordinary loser) may be diminished. According to the invention of (5), since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the hit pattern) in such a case, it is possible to appropriately realize an effect corresponding to the game situation. can be done.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the remaining number of executable unit games in the second state (variable probability mode) is a specific number of times (10 times) or more, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the It has been explained that a predetermined production (drum fluctuation production by a hit pattern) is performed based on the result of 2 (normal symbol losing length fluctuation). Here, as the second result (normal symbol loss length fluctuation), a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds, etc.), the specific number of times may be varied according to the determined variable time. For example, in the variable probability gaming state, the identification information variation display time is 5 seconds when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a loss, and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is Assume that the total time of the variable display time of the identification information in the case of a small win and the opening time of the second prize winning means (big prize winning port 151 for small win) is 5 seconds. In such a form, when 60 seconds is determined as the variation time corresponding to the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), the remaining number of executable unit games in the second state (probability variation mode) is 12. If it is more than once, the variable display can be almost completed during the second state (probability variable mode). In this case, it is possible to set the specific number of times to 12 times. In this way, the value obtained by dividing the determined normal design fluctuation time by the expected value of the special design fluctuation time (for the small hit, the total time of the special design fluctuation time and the opening time of the small winning prize opening) may be determined as the specific number of times.

Further, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the determination of whether or not the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is a specific number of times (10 times) or more is It has been explained that the lottery 1 (ordinary lottery) is performed when passage through the gate that triggered the lottery (ordinary lottery) occurs. In the present invention, the determination may be made when the normal symbol variation corresponding to the gate passage starts. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when gate passage occurs is a specific number (10 times) or more, the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the normal symbol variation starts is specified If it is less than the number of times (10 times), the predetermined effect (drum variation effect by winning pattern) may not be performed.

As described in the fifth pachinko game machine, the predetermined images (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) based on the winning patterns are identified by the second result (normal losing). It is possible to configure so as to be stopped and displayed before the fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) is started. After the predetermined images (the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) are stopped and displayed, a win notification effect (see FIG. 207(k)) is performed. It is preferable that the hit notification effect ends at the same time as the normal symbol loss length variation starts. Thus, it is possible to classify the performance modes such that the variable probability mode is used while the winning notification performance is performed, and the first bonus mode is used after the winning notification performance is performed. In the variable probability mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 224 and 225 are performed, and in the first bonus mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 218 to 221 are performed. It should be noted that when the hit notification effect is being performed, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (for example, 10R big hit) in the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164) (jackpot game When the start condition of the state is satisfied), a predetermined big hit effect is performed. As a result, the game is shifted to the first bonus mode. The predetermined jackpot effect can be the same effect as the effect performed when the condition for starting the jackpot game state is established at another timing during the variable probability mode (when the win notification effect is not performed). be. On the other hand, when the condition for starting the big win game state is established in the first bonus mode, an effect different from the predetermined big win effect may be performed.

(C-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-5) above,
an image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
and image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means performs display on the image display means in accordance with the change time of the identification information on the first display means, and changes the display mode over time so that the display gradually becomes lighter. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the display is performed according to the change time of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161), and the display mode is changed over time so that the display gradually becomes lighter. It is configured so that it can be changed to As a result, the change time of the identification information on the first display means (ordinary symbol display section 161) is imprinted in the player's mind, and the player can be strongly aware of the time.

(C-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-6) above,
an image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
and image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means is
A first image capable of causing the image display means to display a predetermined image (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information on the first display means. display control means;
a second image display control means capable of performing time display (display of normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image) corresponding to the fluctuation time of the identification information on the first display means on the image display means,
The first image display control means does not cause the image display means to display the predetermined image when the time display is being performed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, predetermined images (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (normal pattern display section 161) ) can be displayed, and time display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image display) according to the variation time of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161) can be performed. It is possible. Then, when the time display (normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image display) is performed, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. is configured as As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the time display (display of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image), and to make the player strongly aware of the time.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal symbol losing length variation), the time display (normal symbol losing length variation remaining time image display) is displayed. It has been described as being done (see FIG. 210). The time may be the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation at the time when one normal symbol losing length variation starts (that is, the variation time itself of the normal symbol variation related to the normal symbol losing length variation). , It may be the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation at the time when one normal symbol losing length variation is being performed.

In the present invention, the situation in which the time display (normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image display) is performed is not particularly limited, and the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (per normal symbol). In some cases, or when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a predetermined result (losing or big hit), etc., time display (display of normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed. good. For example, in a situation where the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the fluctuation pattern of all the normal symbol fluctuations that are being held corresponds to the first result (per normal symbol). When it is a variation pattern, or when the result of the jackpot determination related to all reserved special symbol variations is a loss, time display (normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image display) is performed. can be adopted. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time has decreased.

(C-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-7) above,
production execution means capable of executing production;
a state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a specific state (second bonus mode);
When the specific state ends, the effect executing means, when part or all of the second time has passed, the remaining time of the second time (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) It is possible to execute a production according to the remaining time),
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a part or all of the second time (600000 ms) has passed when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the second time (600000 ms) It is configured such that it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the remaining time of the time (the remaining time of normal symbol loss length fluctuation). As a result, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variable display (first variable display) of the identification information and the specific state (second bonus mode) are changed. In a situation that occurs in a superimposed manner, the performance content is varied according to how much time (second time) remains for the variable display at the time when a specific state (second bonus mode) ends. be able to. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the remaining time of the second time (the remaining time of normal symbol losing length variation), and to make the player strongly aware of the remaining time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) continues at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the remaining time of the second time ( It was explained that the production is performed according to the normal pattern loss length fluctuation remaining time). In the present invention, the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) may end at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends. That is, when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, when the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) ends (when the remaining time of the second time is 0) and When the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues (when the remaining time of the second time is not 0), different effects may be performed.

When the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues at the time the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first lottery (normal The result of the lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) occurs, and the first variation display ( While the normal symbol losing length variation) is being performed, the first variation display (normal If the pattern losing length fluctuation) continues, and in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal losing), and the first lottery A first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) corresponding to (normal lottery) occurs, and the first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) occurs at the time when a specific state (second bonus mode) ends. can be assumed to continue. Here, in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), and the first variation corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) When the display (normal symbol loss length variation) occurs, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) in the second state (variable probability mode) becomes the second result (normal loss), and the first lottery An effect (special effect) different from the effect performed when the first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) corresponding to (ordinary lottery) occurs may be performed.

(C-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-8) above,
production execution means capable of executing production;
a state control means capable of being controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode);
The state control means is capable of terminating the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
The effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining number of STs) in the second state when the identification information is variably displayed over the second time period. it is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is performed. can be terminated. In addition, when the identification information is variably displayed over the second time (600000 ms), in the second state (remaining ST count subtraction mode), according to the remaining count (remaining ST count) of the executable unit game It is configured so that it is possible to execute the production. As a result, when the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) is large in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) will continue for the time being ), or when the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is small (the end of the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is approaching situation), it is possible to appropriately realize an effect according to the game situation.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) is a predetermined number of times (5 times) or more, and a predetermined number of times (5 times ), the contents of the presentation may differ depending on the case. In the present invention, it is possible to divide the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) into a plurality of periods, and to vary the content of the effect performed in each period. As the plurality of periods, for example, a period in which the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is a first predetermined number (for example, 30 times) or more ( first period), the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is a second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) or more first predetermined number (for example, 30 times), the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the third predetermined number (for example, 5 times). A period (third period) that is less than the second predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the fourth The remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) during the period (fourth period) in which the predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) or more is less than the third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) It is possible to set a period (fifth period) in which (remaining number of STs) is the fifth predetermined number of times (for example, once).

(C-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-9),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect executing means is configured to provide a suggestive effect that can suggest that the result of the first lottery has become the second result while the identification information is being variably displayed on the second display means. directing) can be performed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result while the identification information is being variably displayed on the second display means (second special symbol display portion 164). It is configured so as to be able to execute a suggestive effect (general map prefetch effect) that can suggest that it has become (usually lost). As a result, the first display means (ordinary symbol display section 161) through the suggestive effect (general pattern look-ahead effect) performed while the identification information is being variably displayed in the second display means (second special symbol display section 164) , the player can expect that the identification information will be variably displayed for a relatively long time (second time (600000 ms)).

201, 1201, 2201 Main CPU
301, 1301, 2301 Sub CPU
120, 120A, 120B, 1120, 2120 First starting port 140A, 140B, 1140, 2140 Second starting port

Claims (1)

holding means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is established and holding the acquired starting information up to a predetermined number;
Lottery means for performing a lottery including a special result and a specific result in a lottery result using the start information held by the holding means when the fluctuation start condition is established;
a pattern control means for performing control so that when the fluctuation start condition is established, a pattern is variably displayed in a predetermined display area and a result of the lottery is derived;
a special game state control means capable of transitioning to a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to a player when the symbol is variably displayed and a special stop state indicating the special result is derived;
specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state when any one of a plurality of predetermined conditions is established;
an effect control means for controlling the effect to be performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbols in a predetermined effect area;
prior to the lottery by the lottery means, prior determination means capable of prior determination of the result of the lottery;
a preceding effect control means for controlling to perform a preceding effect in a predetermined effect area prior to the variable display of the symbols based on the result of the preceding determination by the preceding determining means;
a counting means capable of counting the number of times the pattern is displayed in a variable manner;
with
The plurality of predetermined conditions are
a first predetermined condition that can be satisfied when the pattern is variably displayed and a specific stop mode indicating the specific result is derived;
at least a second predetermined condition that can be satisfied when the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times,
The preceding production control means is
When there is a possibility that the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to perform the preceding effect,
A special start in which the special stop mode can be derived from the start information after the number of times of variable display of the pattern counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times among the start information held by the hold means. When the information is included, it is possible to control so that the preceding performance for the special start information is not performed,
If the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is included in the start information after the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, among the start information held by the holding means, It is possible to control so that the preceding performance for the special start information is performed,
When the special result is derived, even if the holding means contains the specific start information from which the specific result can be derived, the preceding performance related to the specific start information in the game state after the special game state is completed. is controllable so that
The production control means is
It is controllable to execute a state notification effect that notifies that it is controlled to the specific game state,
The state notification effect is not executed in the variation in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied, but is performed based on the satisfaction of the variation start condition after the variation in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. The game machine is characterized by an effect to obtain.

Images